Notsablosom

Detailed Syllabus
Lecture-wise Breakup
Course Code 15B11PH111 Semester: Odd Semester: 1st Session: 2020 -2021
Semester Month from June 21 to July 21
Course Name PHYSICS-1

Credits 4 Contact Hours 3+1
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Anshu D. Varshney & Ashish Bhatnagar

Teacher(s) Alok Pratap Singh Chauhan, Anuj Kumar, Anuraj Panwar, Anshu D.
(Alphabetically) Varshney, Ashish Bhatnagar, Manoj Tripathi, Papia Chowdhury,
R.K. Dwivedi. S. C. Katyal, Suneet Awasthi
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Recall the basic principles of physics related to optics, relativity, Remembering (C1)
C101.1
quantum mechanics, atomic physics and thermodynamics.
Illustrate the various physical phenomena with interpretation Understanding (C2)
C101.2
based on the mathematical expressions involved.
Apply the concepts/principles to solve the problems related to Applying (C3)
C101.3
wave nature of light, relativity, quantum mechanics and atomic physics.
Analyze and examine the solution of the problems using physical Analyzing (C4)
C101.4
and mathematical concepts involved.
Module Title of the Topics in the Module No. of

No. Module Lectures for
the module
1. Physical Optics Analytical treatment of interference, Intensity distribution 15
of fringe system, Fresnel’s Biprism, Newton’s rings,
Michelson interferometer, Diffraction (limited to
Fraunhoffer class) from Single slit, double slit and
Diffraction grating, Polarization, Phenomenological
understanding of Birefringence, Principles of use of uni-
axial crystals in practical polarizers, compensators and
wave plates, Production and analysis of completely
polarized light. Optical activity, Polarimeter
2. Michelson-Morley experiment, Lorentz transformations,
Relativity Addition of velocities, Mass variation with velocity, Mass- 5
energy relation.
3. Black body radiation, Wein’s law, Rayleigh Jeans law, 3
Radiation
Planck’s law of radiation.
4. Wave-particle duality, Compton scattering, Matter waves,
Quantum Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle, Schrödinger wave
9
Mechanics equation and its applications to the free particle in a box,
potential barrier and Harmonic oscillator.
5. Origin of spectral lines, spin and orbital angular
Atomic Structure momentum, Quantum numbers, Atoms in magnetic field, 4
Zeeman effect.
6. Review of the basic laws of thermodynamics, Entropy and
Thermodynamics 4
Clausius-Cleyperon equation.
Total number of Lectures 40
Evaluation Criteria
Components Maximum Marks
T1 20
T2 20
End Semester Examination 35
TA 25 [2 Quiz (7M), Attendance (7M), PBL (6M) and Class performance (5M)]
Total 100
Recommended Reading material: Author(s), Title, Edition, Publisher, Year of Publication etc. ( Text books,
Reference Books, Journals, Reports, Websites etc. in the IEEE format)
1. A. K. Ghatak, Optics, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. E. Hecht, Optics, Pearson Education.
3. F. A. Jenkins and H. E. White, Fundamentals of optics, Tata McGraw Hill.
4. R. S. Sirohi, Wave Optics, Orient and Longman.
5. Reshnick, Relativity, New Age.
6. A. Beiser, Concepts of Modern Physics, Mc Graw Hill International.
7. Mark W. Zemansky, Thermodynamics,Tata McGraw Hill.
Detailed Syllabus
Lab-wise Breakup
Course Code 15B17PH171 Semester: ODD Semester: 1st Session: 2020 -2021
Month from June 21 to July 21
(deferred)
Course Name Physics Lab-1
Credits 01 Contact Hours 02
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Anuraj Panwar and S K Awasthi

Teacher(s) Alok Pratap Singh Chauhan, Amit Verma, Anuj Kumar, Ashish
(Alphabetically) Bhatnagar, Manoj Tripathi, N. K. Sharma, Papia Chowdhury,
Prashant Chauhan, R. K. Dwivedi, S. P. Purohit, Sandeep Chhoker,
Vikas Malik
COURSE OUTCOMES COGNITIVE LEVELS

C170.1 Recall optics and modern physics principles behind the experiments. Remembering (C1)
Explain the experimental setup and the principles involved behind the Understanding (C2)
C170.2
experiments performed.
C170.3 Plan the experiment and set the apparatus and take measurements. Applying (C3)
C170.4 Analyze the data obtained and calculate the error. Analyzing (C4)
C170.5 Interpret and justify the results. Evaluating (C5)
Module Title of the Module List of Experiments CO

No.
1. Optics 1. To determine the wavelength of sodium light with the help of 1-5
Newton’s rings setup
2. To determine the wavelength of sodium light with the help of
Fresnel’s Bi-prism
3. To find the specific rotation of cane- sugar solution by a
polarimeter at room temperature, using half-shade / Bi-quartz
device.
4. To determine the dispersive power of the material of a prism
with the help of a spectrometer.
5. To determine the wavelength of prominent spectral lines of
mercury light by a plane transmission grating using normal
incidence method
2. Modern Physics 6. To study the Photoelectric effect and determine the value of 1-5
Planck’s constant.
7. Determination of Planck’s constant by measuring radiation in
a fixed spectral range.
3. Electricity and 8. To verify Stefan’s law by electrical method. 1-5
Magnetism 9. To determine the resistance per unit length of Carey Foster’s
bridge wire and specific resistance of the material of the given
wire using Carey Foster’s bridge.
10. To study the variation of magnetic field with distance, along
the axis of Helmholtz galvanometer, and to estimate the radius
of the coil.
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Term Viva (V1) 20
End Term Viva (V2) 20
D2D 60
Total 100
Recommended Reading material: Author(s), Title, Edition, Publisher, Year of Publication etc. (Text books,
1. Dey and Dutta, Practical Physics, Kalyani Publication.
2. Experiment hand-outs.
Mathematics-1 (15B11MA111)
Course Description
Course Code 15B11MA111 Semester Odd Semester I Session 2020-21

Month from Aug 2020- Dec 2020
Course Name Mathematics-1
Credits 4 Contact Hours 3-1-0
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Yogesh Gupta, Dr. Pinkey Chauhan

(Names) Dr. Yogesh Gupta, Dr. Pinkey Chauhan, Dr. Anuj Bhardwaj,
Teacher(s)
(Alphabetically) Dr. Amita Bhagat, Prof. Lokendra Kumar, Dr. Trapti Neer, Dr.
Sarfaraz
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES LEVELS
After pursuing the above mentioned course, the students will be able to:
Explain the concepts of limits, continuity and differentiability of Understanding
C105.1
functions of several variables. Level (C2)
Explain the Taylor's series expansion of functions of several variables Applying Level
C105.2
and apply it in finding maxima and minima of functions. (C3)
Make use of double and triple integrals to find area and volume of Applying Level
C105.3
curves and surfaces. (C3)
Explain the concepts of vector calculus and apply Green's, Stoke's and Applying Level
C105.4
Gauss divergence theorems in engineering problems. (C3)
Solve the ordinary differential equations and explain the concepts of Applying Level
C105.5
Laplace transform for solving engineering problems. (C3)
Utilize matrix algebra for solving a system of linear equations and Applying Level
C105.6 (C3)
explain eigenvalues, eigenvectors, diagonalization and quadratic form.
Module Title of the Topics in the Module No. of Lectures
No. Module for the module
1. Partial Chain rule, change of variables, Taylor’s series for 7

differentiation function of two or more variables, maxima and
minima of function of two variables, Jacobians.
2. Double integrals Change of order and change of variables, Gamma 7

and Beta functions, Applications to areas and
volumes, Equations to curves and surfaces, Plots of
some well known curves and surfaces.
3. Vector Gradient, divergence and curl, Normal and tangent 3

Differentiation to a plane surface.
4. Vector Line integrals, Green’s Theorem in a plane, surface 7

Integration integrals, Gauss and Stokes theorems.
5. Differential Differential Equations with constant coefficients, 6

Equations Cauchy-Euler equations, Equations of the form
y’’=f(y), simple applications.
6. Laplace Laplace Transform, inverse Laplace transform, 6

Transform Dirac delta and unit step function, Solution of IVPs.
7. Matrices Linear dependence and independence of rows, row 6

echelon form, Rank, Gauss elimination method,
Eigen values and vectors, symmetric matrices,
Reduction to diagonal form Quadratic forms.
Total number of lectures 42
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Quiz, Assignments, Tutorials, PBL)
Total 100
Recommended Reading material: Author(s), Title, Edition, Publisher, Year of Publication etc.
(Text books, Reference Books, Journals, Reports, Websites etc. in the IEEE format)
Jain, R. K. &Iyenger, S. R. K., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 4th Ed., Alpha Science
1. International, 2013.
Prasad, C., (a) Mathematics for Engineers (b) Advanced Mathematics for Engineers, Prasad
2. Mudranalaya, 1982.
3. Lipschutz, S., Lipsom, M., Linear Algebra, 3rd Ed, Schaum Outline Series, 2001.
Thomas, G. B and Finney, R. L., Calculus and Analytical Geometry, 9th Ed., Pearson
4. Education Asia (Adisson Wesley), New Delhi, 2000.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B11HS112 Semester: Odd Semester: I Session 2020 -2021

Month from July 20 to Dec 20
Course Name English
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr Monali Bhattacharya (Sect 62) Dr Nilu Chaudhary ( Sect128)
Teacher(s) Dr Anshu Banwari, Dr Ekta Srivastava, Dr Monali Bhattacharya, Dr

(Alphabetically) Nilu Chaudhary, Ms Puneet Pannu , Ms Rashmi Jacob, Dr Santosh
Dev
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
C114.1 Develop an understanding and appreciate the basic aspects of English as a Understand (C2)
communication tool.
C114.2 Apply the acquired skills in delivering effective presentations Apply (C3)
C114.3 Demonstrate an understanding of different forms of literature and rhetorical Understand

devices (C2)
C114.4 Examine literature as reflection of individual and society Analyse (C4)
C114.5 Compose different forms of professional writing Create (C6)
C114.6 Apply Phonetics through theory and practice for better pronunciation Apply (C3)
Module Title of the Module Topics in the Module No. of Lectures

No. for the module
1. English as a Basic aspects of English 10
Communication Tool · LSRW: Listening, Speaking, Reading, Writing
Non Verbal Communication: Body Language, Voice
Modulation, Posture
Gambits
Phonetics: Pronunciation, Stress, Rhythm, Intonation
2. Language through Short Stories 10
Literature · Too Bad by Isaac Asimov
· The Castaway by Rabindranath Tagore
Poems
· The Highwayman by Alfred Noyes
· Where the mind is without fear by Rabindranath Tagore
· “If” by Rudyard Kipling
· Ode to Clothes by Pablo Nerruda
One act Play
Refund by Fritz Karinthy
Famous Speech
· Swami Vivekanand’s Chicago Speech
3. Professional Textual Organization 8
Application/Writing · Letter Writing
· Circulars
· Notices
· Agenda
· Minutes
· Report Writing
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project, Assignment)
Total 100
C.L.Bovee, J.V.Thill, M.Chaturvedi, Business Communication Today,9th Ed, Pearson Education,
1.
copyright@ Dorling Kinderslay (India) Pvt Ltd,2009
Kelly M. Quintanilla and S.T.Wahl, Business and Professional Communication, Sage Publications Pvt
2.
India Ltd,2011
3. S. Kumar and Pushp Lata, Communication Skills, Oxford University Press,1st, Ed. 2011
4. R.K Bansal, and J.B Harrison, Spoken English for India, Orient Longman, 2018
5 Alfred Noyes, “The Highwayman”, Oxford University Press, USA, Sep 1999
6 Rabindranath Tagore, “Where the Mind is without Fear”, BK Classics

7 Rudyard Kipling, “If”, If Handbook, Creative Editions, 2014
8 Pablo Neruda, “Ode To Clothes” Late & Posthumous Poems, 1968-74
9 Isaac Asimov, “Too Bad”, Robot Visions, ROC Books, New York, NY, USA, 1991
RabindraNath Tagore, “The Castaway”, Selected Short Stories, Introduction & translated by William
10
Radice”, Penguin Classics, 2005
Fritz Karinthy, “The Refund”, A Play in One Act adapted by Percival Wilde, French’s Acting Edition,
11
London, 1958
Swami Vivekananda & Sankar Srinivasan, “ Sisters & Brothers of America: Speech at World
12
Parliament of Religions, Chicago, 1893”, Creative Space Independent Publishing Platform, 2015
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B11CI111 Semester Odd Semester I Session-2020-21
(specify Odd/Even) Month from: July to December
Course Name Software Development Fundamentals – I
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Manish Kumar Thakur, Ms. Mradula Sharma (J62) / Dr. Avinash
Pandey (J128)
Teacher(s) Dr. Manish Kumar Thakur, Ms. Mradula Sharma ,Dr. Arpita Jadhav
(Alphabetically) Bhatt, Ms. Deepti, Dr. Dharmveer Singh Rajpoot, Ms. Sakshi Agarwal,
Ms. Sonal, Dr. Suma Dawn
Dr Avinash Pandey, Akanksha Bhardwaj, Nitin Shukla, Bindu Verma,
Payal Khurana Batra, Rashmi Kushwah, Shailesh Kumar, Swati Gupta

C109.1 Explain various phases of software development life cycle and Understand Level (Level 2)
C109.2 Explain various data types, memory allocation schemes. precedence of Understand Level (Level 2)
arithmetical and logical operations, and need of array, and structures
C109.3 Draw the flow chart and write the high level code for different problems Understand Level (Level 2)
C109.4 Apply and implement functions with or without pointers for different Apply Level (Level 3)
Problems
C109.5 Demonstrate and implement various operations like traverse, insertion, Apply Level (Level 3)
deletion, etc. on files

the module
1. Introduction Introduction to Software Development Life Cycle, Step by step 9
solution to simple problems, developing logic/flow-
chart/pseudo code to solve problems like 2D screen saver,
simple/logical games, puzzles
2. Data types, Data, variables and constants, data types, operators – binary, 9
operators, and unary, ternary, operator precedence, operations using different
Control Flow operators, if, if-else, while, do-while, for, switch-case in C
Programming
3. Array Fundamentals of Array, Implementation of 1D/2D Array and 6
related operations like insertion, traversal, updating, etc. in C
programming using different problems
4. Functions Introduction to Functions and its implementation in C 4
programming language, Functions using Pass by value,
recursive functions
5. Structures and Introduction and implementation of Structures and Union in C 4
Union programming, Array of Structures and related operations like
insertion, traversal, updating, etc. in C programming using
different problems, Structures using function
6. Pointers Pointers in C, Dynamic memory allocation for 1D/2D array and 6
structures, Arithmetical operations on pointers, functions using
pass by reference
7. File Handling Introduction to File, creation of files in C programming 4
language, Modes of File Handling like read, write, update;
different types of files like binary file and text file and
respective operations like, opening, closing, reading, writing,
end of file,
traversing the file, for structured and unstructured data
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Quiz and Assignment (15), Attendance (10)
Total 100
1 Herbert Schildt. “The Complete Reference C ”, 4th Edition, TMH, 2017

2 Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie ,“The C Programming Language”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education India, 2015
3 H. Cooper and H. Mullish, Jaico Publishing House. “Spirit of C”, 4th Edition, Jaico Publishing House,
2006
4 B. A. Forouzan, R. F. Gilberg “Computer Science: A Structured Programming Approach Using C”, 1st
Edition, Cengage, New Delhi, 2012
5 Ashok N. Kamthane , “Programming with ANSI and Turbo C”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, Delhi,
2013
6 Balagurusamy, Programming in ANSI C”, Eighth edition, TMH, 2019
Detailed Syllabus
Lab-wise Breakup
15B17CI171 Software Development Fundamental Lab - I
Develop C programs using varied data types, expressions, conditional structure (if-else), and
iterative control structure (do-while, while, for), one or multidimensional arrays and functions.
Store heterogeneous data and perform basic queries over it. Programs using pointers and recursive
functions like palindrome, factorial, fibonacci series, number system etc. Write menu driven C
programs to perform basic file operations (create, read, write, update).
Course Code 15B17CI171 Semester ODD Semester: 1st Session: 2020 -2021
Month from: Aug –Dec
Course Name Software Development Fundamentals Lab-1

Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Dharmveer Singh Rajpoot (J62), Ms. Kritika Rani (J128)
(Names) Akanksha Mehndiratta, Alka, Amanpreet Kaur, Amarjeet,
Teacher(s)
(Alphabetically) Ambalika Sarkar, Amrit Pal Singh, Anita Sahoo, Ankita,
Anubhuti Mohindra, Anuja Arora, Aparajita Nanda, Archana
Purwar, Arpita Jadhav Bhatt, Arti Jain, Avinash Pandey,
Bansidhar Joshi, Bharat Gupta, Bindu Verma, Charu, Chetna
Dabas, Chetna Gupta, Deepti, Dhanalakshmi G, Gagandeep
Kaur, Gaurav Kumar Nigam, Himani Bansal, Himanshu
Agrawal, Himanshu Mittal, Indu Chawla, K Vimal Kumar,
Kashav Ajmera, Kavita Pandey, Kirti Aggarwal, Manju,
Mradula Sharma, Mukta Goyal, Neeraj Jain, Nitin Shukla,
Niyati Aggrawal, Parmeet Kaur, Parul Agarwal , Pawan
Kumar Upadhyay, Pawan Mehra, Payal Khurana Batra,
Potukuchi Raghu Vamsi, Prantik Biswas, Pulkit Mehndiratta,
Raju Pal, Rashmi Kushwah, Rupesh Kr. Koshariya, Sakshi
Agarwal, Sangeeta Mittal, Sarishty Gupta, Shailesh Kumar,
Shardha Porwal, Shariq Murtuza, Sherry Garg, Shikha Mehta,
Shikha Jain, Shilpa Budhkar, Shruti Jaiswal, Shulabh, Somya
Jain, Sonal, Suma Dawn, Swati Gupta, Taj Alam, Varsha
Garg, Vartika Puri, Vivek K. Singh
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
C172.1 Develop programs/logic for data types, expressions and Apply (level 3)
conditional structure.
C172.2 Perform programs for array and functions. Apply (level 3)
C172.3 Implement programs for structure and union. Apply (level 3)
C172.4 Perform programs of pointers and recursive functions. Apply (level 3)
C172.5 Implement menu driven programs to perform basic file Apply (level 3)
operations.
Module Title of the Topics in the Module No. of Weeks

No. Module (2 Labs/Week)
1 Flow chart and Developing logic/flow-chart/pseudo code to 2 Weeks
Logic Building solve problems, simple/logical games, puzzles
2 Data Type, Data, variables and constants, data types, 1 Week

Statements, operators – binary, unary, ternary, operator
precedence, associativity
Expressions,
Operators
3 Control Flow Develop C programs using conditional structure 2 Weeks
(if, if-else, nested if), and iterative control
structure (do-while, while, for).
Implement switch case statement.
4 Array and Array initialization, reading and writing 2 Weeks
String operations with array, one dimensional, two-
dimensional array, strings, and related
operations like addition, multiplication,
traversal, transpose etc.
5 Functions User defined functions and inbuilt functions, 1 Week
Functions definition, declaration, calling, Pass
by value, functions with array
6 Structures and Struct keyword, Structure and Union, Structure 2 Weeks
Union variable, dot operator, arrow operator, Array of
Structures, structure using functions.
7 Pointers Pointers in C, Dynamic memory allocation for 2 Weeks

1D/2D array and structures, Arithmetical
operations on pointers, functions using pass by
reference, recursive functions like palindrome,
factorial, fibonacci series, number system etc
8 File Handling File creation, Modes of File Handling like read, 2 Weeks
write, update; different types of files like binary
file and text file and respective operations like,
opening, closing, reading, writing, end of file,
traversing the file for structured and
unstructured data
Total Number of Weeks 14 Weeks

Evaluation Criteria
Lab Test -1 20
Lab Test -2 20
Day to Day 60
Evaluation 1 15
Evaluation 2 15
Project 15
Attendance 15
Total 100
Recommended Reading material: Author(s), Title, Edition, Publisher, Year of Publication

etc. (Text books, Reference Books, Journals, Reports, Websites etc. in the IEEE format)
1 H. Cooper and H. Mullish, Jaico Publishing House. “Spirit of C”, 4th Edition, Jaico
Publishing House, 2006
2 Herbert Schildt. “The Complete Reference C ”, 4th Edition, TMH, 2000
3 Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie ,“The C Programming Language”, 2nd Edition,
Prentice-Hall India, New Delhi, 2002
4 Peter Norton, “Introduction to Computers”, 5th edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, Delhi., 2005.
5 Balaguruswamy, Programming in ANCI C”, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2001.
6 Ashok N. Kamthane , “Programming with ANSI and Turbo C”, Pearson Education, Delhi,
2003
7 Rajaraman V., “Fundamentals of Computer”, 3rd Edition, Prentice-Hall India, New Delhi,
2005.
8 B. A. Forouzan, R. F. Gilberg “Computer Science: A Structured Programming Approach
Using C”, 2nd Edition, Thomson Press, New Delhi, 2006.
9 Avi Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth, and S. Sudarshan, “Database System Concepts”, 6th
edition, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B11EC111 Semester Even Semester 2nd Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month from Jan-June
Course Name Electrical Science -1
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Vimal Kumar Mishra, Neetu Joshi

Teacher(s) Archana Pandey, Bhagirath Sahu, Jyoti Vyas, Mandeep Narula,
(Alphabetically) Megha Agarwal, Nisha, Rachna Singh, Sajaivir Singh, Shraddha
Saxena.
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Recall the concepts of voltage, current, power and energy for Apply Level
C113.1 different circuit elements. Apply the Kirchhoff laws and different (C3)
analyzing techniques to identify the different circuit parameters.
C113.2 Define and apply the networks theorems in the complex AC and DC Applying Level
circuits, networks. Demonstrate the physical model for given (C3)
Sinusoidal AC signal and construct the phasor diagrams.
C113.3 Demonstrate the concept of resonance and operate different instrumental Understanding Level
and measurement equipments. (C2)
C113.4 Demonstrate the construction and working of single phase transformer. Understanding Level
(C2)

the module
1. Basic Concepts Voltage, Current, Power and Energy analysis for Circuit 6
elements (R, L, C), Independent and Dependent Sources,
Kirchhoff's Laws, Voltage Divider rule, Current Divider
rule
2. DC Circuit Star-Delta Transformation, Source transformation, Mesh 6
Analysis and Supermesh Analysis, Nodal and super nodal Analysis
3. Network Theorems Superposition Theorem, Thevenin’s Theorem, Norton’s 6

Theorem, Maximum Power Transfer Theorem
4. Sinusoidal Steady Physical Model for a Sinusoid, Average Value, Effective 4

State Analysis Value, Phasor presentation, Addition of Phasor using
Complex Numbers, Concepts of impedance and admittance.
5. AC Network Mesh and Nodal analysis, Superposition Theorem, 6
Analysis and Thevenin’s Theorem, Norton’s Theorem, Maximum Power
Theorems Transfer Theorem
6. Resonant Circuits Series and Parallel resonance, frequency response of Series 4
and Parallel resonance, Q-Factor, Bandwidth
7. Electrical Essentials of an Instrument, Permanent Magnet Moving 6
Instruments Coil (PMMC) Instruments, voltmeter, ammeter, Ohmmeter,
Meter Sensitivity (Ohms-Per-Volt Rating); Loading Effect;
Multimeter; Cathode Ray Oscilloscope: Construction,
Working and Applications. Function Generators
8. Single Phase Principle of operation, construction, e.m.f. equation, 4
Transformer equivalent circuit, power losses, efficiency (simple
numerical problems), introduction to auto transformer.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignment, quiz, attendance)
Total 100
Project based learning component: Students will learn fundamental concepts, working and applications of
Permanent Magnet Moving Coil (PMMC) Instruments, voltmeter, ammeter, Ohmmeter, Cathode Ray
Oscilloscope and Function Generators that develop aptitude among students to design minor and major
projects. They will also develop knowledge about step-up and step-down transformer which can be further
used to design advanced circuits in communication and robotics. It will also help develop concepts about
instrumentation in electrical/electronics/biotech/communication based industries.
1. R.C. Dorf and James A. Svoboda, “Introduction to Electric Circuits”, 9th ed, John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
th
Charles K. Alexander (Author), Matthew N.O Sadiku, “ Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, 6 ed, Tata Mc
2.
Graw Hill, 2019.
Robert L. Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky, “ Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory ”, 11th ed, Prentice Hall of
3.
India, 2014.
4. D.C. Kulshreshtha, Basic Electrical Engineering,Revised 1st ed, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2017 .
Course Description
Course Code 15B17EC171 Semester -: Even Semester II Session: 2020 -21

(specify Odd/Even) Month- : January - May
Course Name Electrical Science Lab-1
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Bhagirath Sahu & Shradha Saxena

Teacher(s) Archana Pandey, Ashish Gupta, Atul kumar Srivastav, Bhagirath
Sahu, Garima Kapur, Gaurav Verma, Juhi Gupta, Kaushal Nigam,
Kirmender Singh, Mandeep Singh Narula, Neetu Singh, Pankaj
Kumar Yadav, Parul Arora, Raghvenda Kumar Singh, Sajai Vir
Singh, Shivaji Tyagi, Shradha Saxena, Vijay Khare, Vivek kumar
Dwivedi

Understand various active and passive components and instruments Understanding
C176.1 (Multimeter, Bread board, Regulated D.C. power supply). (Level II)
Acquire the knowledge of electrical network and circuit such as Analyzing

C176.2 branch, node, loop and mesh in networks and circuits. (Level IV)
Study and verification of reduction technique using different network Remembering

C176.3
theorem. (Level I)
Study and verification of series and parallel AC circuits as well as Applying
C176.4
Open & Short Circuit Test in single phase transformer. (Level III)
Module Title of the List of Experiments COs

No. Module
1. Introduction of Introduction to various components (Resistor, Capacitor,
active and inductor, and IC) and instruments Multimeter, Bread board, C176.1
passive Regulated D.C. power supply and CRO.
components
2. Analysis and C176.2
verifications of Verification of KVL and KCL using a given circuit.
Mesh and Node
verification of Realization of Equivalent Resistance of Star to Delta and
Transform Delta to Star Transformation.
Network
verification of Verification of Super Node using Voltage Source.
of Super Node

verification of To verify the voltage divider rule (VDR) and the current
Divider rules divider rule (CDR).
for Current and
Voltage
6. Study and C176.3

Analysis of Verification of Superposition Theorem.
Superposition
Theorem
verification of Verification of Thevenin’s Theorm and Norton Theorm.
Thevenin’s/
Norton
Theorem
verification of Verification of Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.
Maximum
Power Transfer
Theorem
9. Study and To study the Root-Mean-Square(RMS), Peak, and Peak-to- C176.4
Verification of Peak Values, Measurements with Oscilloscope.
AC Signal in
term of RMS
and PP Value
10. Study and C176.4
Analysis of To study the behavior of Series-Parallel RLC Circuit at
Resonance Resonance.
Circuit
11. Study of open Open Circuit Test in Single Phase Transformer C176.4
Circuit Test using Vlab.
12. Study of Short Short Circuit Test in Single Phase Transformer C176.4
Circuit test using Vlab.
Evaluation Criteria
Viva1 20
Viva2 20
Report file, Attendance, and D2D 60 (15+15+30)
Total 100
1. Nilsson Riedel, Electric Circuits,” Pearson, 11th Edition, 2019
2. Abhijit Chakrabarti, “Circuit Theory Analysis and Synthesis,” Dhanpat Rai & Co.; 7th Edition , 2018
3. U. S. Bkashi A.U. Bakshi S. Ilaiyaraja,, “Circuit Theory Technical Publications; 3rd Edition, 2019
Roman Malaric, “Instrumention and Measurement in Electrical Engineering, “Universal Publisher, 3rd
4.
Edition, 2011.
5. DP Kothar and I J Nagrath, “ Electric Machine,” TMH; 4 th Edition, 2010
Software Development Fundamentals – II
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B11CI211 Semester:Even Semester: II Session: 2020-21
(specify Odd/Even) Month from: Jan to June
Course Name Software Development Fundamentals – II NBA Code: C110
Credits 4 Contact Hours 4 (3 Hrs. Theory, 1 Hr. Tutorial)
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Mukesh Saraswat, Manish Kumar Thakur, Ashish Mishra
Teacher(s) Anuradha Gupta, Arti Jain (T), Avinash Pandey, Himani Bansal,
(Alphabetically) Kritika Rani, Shailesh Kumar, Swati (T)

C110.1 Explain various object-oriented concepts like class and objects, friend Understand Level(Level 2)
function, function and operator overloading, etc.
C110.2 Apply and implement the relationships of association, aggregation, Apply Level (Level 3)
composition, and inheritance
C110.3 Analyze the output of the source code and able to debug the errors Analyze Level (Level 4)
C110.4 Design the class diagram for real life problems and implement it using Create Level (Level 6)
virtual functions, abstract classes, templates, and exception handling
C110.5 Apply SQL commands to create tables and perform various operations Apply Level (Level 3)
like insert, delete, select, etc.

the module
1. Introduction to Comparison of Procedural and Object-Oriented Approach, 2
Object Oriented Characteristics of Object-Oriented Languages, Separation of
Programming behavior and implementation
2. OO Concepts using Objects, Classes, Internal representations of Objects, 8
C++ Constructors, Destructors Functionand Operator Overloading,
Static and Friend Functions
3. Inheritance using Base Class, Derived class, Method Overriding, Private and 3
C++ Public Inheritance, Multiple Inheritance.
4. Polymorphism Virtual Functions, Pure Virtual Functions, Abstract Classes, 3
using C++ Dynamic Dispatch, Internal representations of method tables,
RTTI
5. UML/Relationship Models, Views and Model Elements, Class Diagram, 8
Implementation in Relationships of Association, Aggregation, Composition, and
C++ Inheritance, etc. and their implementing
6. Exceptions, Exceptions, Try, Catch and Throw, Re-throwing exceptions, 8
Templates, and Exception and Inheritance, Function Templates, Overloading
STL in C++ Functions Template, Class Templates, Collection classes and
iteration protocols (STL)
7. Introduction to Fundamentals of Database and Database Management 10
Database System, Introduction to Relational Database, Table,
Attributes, Records, Introduction to SQL, Data types in SQL,
Various operations on single table like create, insert, delete,
update, alter, etc. using SQL, SQL queries on single table
using select statement with or without where/ group by
clause, etc.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Mini Project (10), Attendance (10), Tutorial Assignments (5))
Total 100
Project based learning: Each student in a group of 3-4 will have to develop a mini project based on
Object Oriented Programming and database. The students can opt any real-world application where these
concepts can be applied. The students have to implement the mini project using C++ language. Project
development and its presentation will enhance the knowledge and employability of the students in IT
sector.
1 Herbert Schildt, C++: The Complete Reference, McGraw-Hill Osborne Media, 4th Edition, 2017
2 Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B. Navathe, Fundamentals of Database Systems, Pearson, 7th Edition, 2016
3 Stroustrup B., The C++ Programming Language, Addison Wesley, 4th Edition, 2013
4 Avi Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth, and S. Sudarshan, “Database System Concepts”, 6th edition, McGraw-
Hill, 2010.
5 Robert Lafore, Object Oriented Programming in C++, SAMS, 4th Edition, 2002
6 John Hubbard, Schaum's Outline of Programming with C++, McGraw-Hill, 2nd Edition, 2000
Software Development Lab - II
Detailed Syllabus
Lab-wise Breakup
Course Code 15B17CI271 Semester: Even Semester: II Session: 2020-21
Course Name Software Development Lab - II
Credits 1 Contact Hours 2 hrs
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Anita Sahoo, Niyati Aggrawal, Himani Bansal (J128)
Teacher(s) (J62) Adwitiya Sinha, Anita Sahoo, Ankita Verma, Arpita Yadav,
(Alphabetically) Bhawna Saxena, Chetna Dabas, Deepti, Hema N., K Vimal Kumar,
K.Rajalakshmi, Manju, Megha Rathi, Mradula Sharma, Neetu
Sardana, Niyati Aggrawal, Prantik Biswas, Shardha Porwal
(J128) Ambalika Sarkar, Anubhuti Mohindra, Arti Jain, Avinash
Pandey, Devpriya Soni, Himani Bansal, Kritika Rani, Mukesh
Saraswat, Nitin Shukla, Rashmi Kushwah, Shailesh Kumar, Shariq
Murtuza, Shilpa Budhkar, Swati Gupta.
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
C173.1 Write programs in C++ to implement OOPs concepts related to objects, classes, Apply Level (Level 3)
constructor, destructor, and friend function.
C173.2 Write programs in C++ using OOPs concept like encapsulation, inheritance, Apply Level (Level 3)
polymorphism and abstraction.
C173.3 Write programs in C++ using Standard Template Library. Apply Level (Level 3)
C173.4 Perform exception handling in C++ programs. Apply Level (Level 3)
C173.5 Write MySQL queries to perform operations like ADD, DELETE, UPDATE, Apply Level (Level 3)
SELECT on relational databases.
Module Title of the List of Experiments No. of Labs

No. Module for the
module
1. OO Concepts using Write output based C++ programs to implement the concepts 3
C++ of Objects, Classes, Internal representations of Objects,
encapsulation, Constructors, Destructors, Function and
Operator Overloading, Static and Friend Functions.
2. Inheritance using Write programs in C++ to implement concepts of Base Class, 2
C++ Derived class, Method Overriding, Private and Public
Inheritance, Multiple Inheritance.
3. Polymorphism Write programs in C++ using Virtual Functions, Pure Virtual 2
using C++ Functions, Abstract Classes, Dynamic Dispatch, Internal
representations of method tables, RTTI, operator overriding.
4. UML/Relationship Write programs in C++ using based on Class diagram, 1
Implementation in Relationships of Association, Aggregation, Composition, and
C++ Inheritance
5. Exceptions, Write programs in C++ using Exceptions, Try, Catch and 2
Templates, and Throw, Re-throwing exceptions, Exception and Inheritance,
STL in C++ Function Templates, Overloading Functions Template, Class
Templates, Collection classes and iteration protocols (STL)
6. Introduction to Design simple SQL queries using MYSQL to apply various 2
Database operations on single table like create, insert, delete, update,
alter, etc., Queries on single table using select statement with
or without where/ group by clause, etc.
Total number of Labs 12
Evaluation Criteria
Evaluation 1 15
Lab Test1 20
Evaluation 2 15
Lab Test 2 20
Mini Project 15
Attendance 15
Total 100
Project based leaning: Groups of 3-4 students will choose a project topic. They will use the concepts of OOP
and/or database to execute their project. In a team, they will learn how to apply the concepts for problem solving
in a meaningful way.
1 Herbert Schildt, C++: The Complete Reference, McGraw-Hill Osborne Media, 4th Edition, 2017
2 Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B. Navathe, Fundamentals of Database Systems, Pearson, 7th Edition, 2016
3 Stroustrup B., The C++ Programming Language, Addison Wesley, 4th Edition, 2013
4 Avi Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth, and S. Sudarshan, “Database System Concepts”, 6th edition, McGraw-
Hill, 2010.
5 Robert Lafore, Object Oriented Programming in C++, SAMS, 4th Edition, 2002
6 John Hubbard, Schaum's Outline of Programming with C++, McGraw-Hill, 2nd Edition, 2000
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B11PH211 Semester: Even Semester: II Session 2020-21

Month from: January to June
Course Name PHYSICS-2
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Prof. R.K. Dwivedi& Dr.Suneet Kumar Awasthi

Teacher(s) Alok Pratap Singh Chauhan (ALC)
(Alphabetically) Anshu D. Varshney (ADV)
Anuj Kumar (AK)
Ashish Bhatnagar (ABH)
Dinesh Tripathi (DT)
Himanshu Pandey (HP)
Manoj Kumar (MKC)
Navendu Goswami (NG)
R. K. Dwivedi (RKD)
S C Katyal (SCK)
Suneet Kumar Awasthi (SKA)
Vikas Malik (VM)

Recall the basic concepts relating to electromagnetic theory, statistical Remembering (C1)
CO1 physics, lasers, fiber optics and solid state physics.
Illustrate the various physical phenomena with interpretation based on the Understanding (C2)
CO2 mathematical expressions involved.
Apply the basic principles in solving variety of problems related to lasers, Applying (C3)
CO3 electromagnet theory, fiber and solid state physics.
Analyze and examine the solution of the problems using physical and Analyzing (C4)
CO4 mathematical concepts involved in the course.

the module
1. Electromagnetisma Coulomb’s law, Gauss law and its applications,Treatment 18
nd Optical Fiber of electrostatic problems by solutionof Laplace and
Poisson’s equations, Biot-Savartlaw, Ampere’s law,
Maxwell’s equations in freespace and dielectric media.
Electromagneticwaves, Derivations of expressions for
energydensity and energy flux (Poynting vector) in
anelectromagnetic field, Radiation pressure.Propagation of
EM waves through boundary-Reflection, Refraction,
Absorption and TotalInternal Reflection. Light propagation
in fibersand Graded Index fibers, Numerical Apertureand
Attenuation, Single and Multimode.
2. Statistical Maxwell-Boltzmann, Bose-Einstein and Fermi-Dirac 08
Distributions and distributions and their applications.Principle and working of
laser, Einstein A and Bcoefficients, Ruby Laser.
Lasers
3. Solid State Basic ideas of bonding in solids, Crystalstructure, Bragg’s 14
Physics law X-ray diffraction, Bandtheory of solids, Distinction
between metals,semiconductors and insulators.
Electronicconduction in metals, Intrinsic and extrinsic
(nandp-type) semiconductors and their
electricalconductivity. p-njunction and Hall effect
insemiconductors.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
(a) Quizes /class tests (07M),
(b) Attendance (07M)
(c) Internal Assessment (05)
(d) Assignments in PBL mode (06M)
Total 100
1. D. J. Griffiths, Introduction to electrodynamics, Pearson India.
2. G. Keiser, Optical Fiber Communications, Tata Mc Graw Hill Education.
4. S. O. Pillai, Solid State physics, New Age International (P) Limited.
5. B. G. Streetman & S. Banerjee, Solid State Electronic Devices, Prentice-Hall India.

Detailed Syllabus
Lab-wise Breakup
Course Code 15B17PH271 Semester:Even Semester:II Session 2020 -2021

Month: from January -July
Course Name Physics Lab-2
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Prof. Navendu Goswamiand Dr. Vikas Malik.

Teacher(s) Ashish Bhatnagar, B.C. Joshi, Dinesh Tripathi, Manoj Kumar, Manoj
(Alphabetically) Tripathi, Navendu Goswami, Sandeep Chhoker, Suneet Kumar
Awasthi, Vikas Malik,

Recall laser, fibre optics, semiconductor and solid state physics Remembering (C1)
C171.1
principles behind the experiments.
Explainthe experimental setup and the principles involved behind the Understanding (C2)
C171.2
experiments performed.
C171.3 Plan the experiment and set the apparatus and take measurements. Applying (C3)
C171.4 Analyze the data obtained and calculate the error. Analyzing (C4)
C171.5 Interpret and justify the results. Evaluating (C5)

No.
1. Semiconductor 1(a). To determine the band gap in a semiconductor using its p-n 1-5
Physics junction diode.
1(b). To draw the I-V characteristic of Solar cell and find
maximum power and fill factor.
2(a). To measure resistivity of semiconductor at different
temperatures by Four Probe Method.
2(b).To determine Band Gap of the semiconductor.
3.To study the Hall effect in semiconductor and to determine its
allied coefficients.
2. Solid State Physics 4. To study the Magnetostriction in metallic rod with the help of 1-5
Michelson interferometer arrangement.
5. To find the susceptibility of a paramagnetic substance (FeCl 3 )
in the form of liquid or a solution.
6.Study of dielectric (constant) behavior and determination of
Curie’s temperature of ferroelectric ceramics.
3. Modern Physics 7.To study the magneto resistance of given semiconductor 1-5
material.
8(a). To determine the value of specific charge (e/m) of an
electron by Magnetron method.
8(b). To determine the velocity of ultrasonic wave in the
medium of liquid using ultrasonic interferometer and to
determine the compressibility of the given liquid.
9(a). To determine Planck‟s Constant using LEDs of known

wavelength.
9(b). To study the photovoltaic cell and hence verify the inverse
square law.
4. Optical Fiber 10(a). To determine the numerical aperture of a given 1-5
multimode optical fiber.
10(b). To measure the power loss at a splice between two
multimode fibers and tostudy the variation of splice loss with
Longitudinal and Transverse misalignments of thegiven fibers.
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Term Viva (V1)20
End Term Viva (V2)20
D2D 60
Total 100
1. Dey and Dutta, Practical Physics
2. Lab Manuals
Mathematics-2 (15B11MA211)
Course Description
Course Code 15B11MA211 Semester Even Semester II Session 2020-2021

Month from Jan 2021- June 2021
Course Mathematics 2
Name
Credits 4 Contact 3-1-0
Hours
Faculty Coordinator(s) Prof. Lokendra Kumar, Dr. DCS Bisht
(Names) Teacher(s) Prof. Lokendra Kumar, Dr. DCS Bisht, Prof. Alka
(Alphabetically) Tripathi, Dr. Anuj Bhardwaj, Dr. Yogesh Gupta, Prof.
R.C. Mittal, Dr. Trapti Neer, Dr Pankaj Srivastava, Dr.
Mohd. Sarfaraz, Dr. Neha Ahlawat
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
apply different methods for solving ordinary differential Applying
C106.1
equations of second order. Level (C3)
explain different tests/methods of convergence for infinite Understanding
C106.2
series. Level (C2)
find the series solution of differential equations and use it to Applying
C106.3
construct Legendre’s polynomials and Bessel’s functions. Level (C3)
classify the partial differential equations and apply Fourier Applying
C106.4
series to find their solution. Level (C3)
explain Taylor’s & Laurent’s series expansion, singularities, Understanding
C106.5
residues and transformations. Level (C2)
apply the concept of complex variables to solve the problems Applying
C106.6
of complex differentiation and integrations. Level (C3)
the module
1. Second Order Linear Differential Equations of Second 5
Linear Order with constant coefficients and with
Differential variable coefficients, Change of Variable,
Equations Variation of Parameters.
2. Convergence Convergence of series, Tests of convergence, 7
of Series Alternating Series, Absolute & Conditional
Convergence, Uniform Convergence.
3. Series Solution Series Solutions, Bessel Function, 7
and Special Recurrence Relations and Orthogonality.
Functions Legendre functions, Recurrence relations and
Orthogonality.
4. Fourier Series Fourier Series. Classification and Solution of 5
and Partial PDE, Equation of vibrating string, Solution
Differential of one dimensional wave & heat equations.
Equations
5. Complex Limit, Continuity and Differentiability of 3
Variables Functions of Complex Variables, Analytic
Functions, Cauchy’s Riemann Equations.
6. Complex Cauchy Integral Theorem, Cauchy Integral 4
Integration Formula and Applications.
7. Series Taylor and Laurent Series Expansion, Poles 4
Expansion and Singularities.
8. Contour Residues, Cauchy’s residue theorem and its 5
Integration applications.
9. Conformal Bilinear transformation 2
Mapping
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Quiz, Assignments, Tutorials)
Total 100
Recommended Reading material:
Jain, R. K. &Iyenger, S. R. K., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 5th Ed., Narosa
1.
Publishing House, New Delhi, 2016.
Brown, J.W. & Churchill, R.V., Complex Variables and Applications, 6th Ed.,
2.
McGrawHill, 1996.
Prasad, C., (a) Mathematics for Engineers (b) Advanced Mathematics for Engineers,
3.
Prasad Mudranalaya, 1982.
Kreysizg, E., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10th Edition, John Willey & Sons,
4.
Inc., 2015.
Simmons, G. F., Differential Equations with Applications and Historical Notes, 2nd
5.
Ed. McGraw Hill, 1991.
6. Spiegel, M.R., Complex Variables, Schaum’s outline series, Mac Graw-Hill, 2009.
Grewal, B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics” 44th Edition, Khanna Publisher,
7.
New Delhi, 2018.
Detailed Syllabus
Lab-wise Breakup
Course Code 18B15GE111 Semester : Even Semester: IInd Session 2020-2021
Course Name Engineering Drawing and Design
Credits 1.5 Contact Hours 3
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Mr. Chandan Kumar,Mr. Rahul Kumar

Teacher(s) Mr. DeepakKumar, Mrs. MadhuJhariya,Mr. Nitesh Kumar, Dr.
(Alphabetically) PrabhakarJha,Mr. VimalSaini

Recall the use of different instruments used in Engineering Drawing Remembering
C178.1
and Importance of BIS and ISO codes. (Level I)
Illustrate various types of mathematical curves and scale. Understanding
C178.2
(Level II)
Classify different types of projection and Construct Orthographic Applying
C178.3 (Level III)
projection of Point, Line, Plane and Solid.
Construct Isometric Projection and Conversion of Orthographic view Applying
C178.4 (Level III)
to Isometric view and vice-versa.
Construct Engineering model in Drawing software (AutoCAD) and Analyzing
C178.5 (Level IV)
Compare it with conventional drawing.

No.
1. Introduction to • Principles of engineering graphics and their significance, usage
Engineering of drawing instruments. C178.1
Drawing • Technical vertical capital letters which includes English
alphabets and numeric.
2. Engineering Curves • Constructing a pentagon and hexagon; engineering curves:

Parabola, Ellipse, Hyperbola, Cycloids and Involutes. C178.2
3. Orthographic • Projection of points: Point on VP, HP, in space.

Projections • Projection of straight lines: Lines inclined or parallel to any one
of the planes; lines inclined to both HP and VP with traces. C178.3
• Projection of planes: Plane on VP, HP, inclined to any one of
the planes; plane inclined to both HP and VP.
4. Projections of • Projections of solids in simple position inclined to one/both the

Regular Solids planes. C178.3
5. Sections and • Sections of solids: Section of standard solids and true shape
Sectional Views of
section of standard machine elements for the section planes
Right Angular C178.3
Solids perpendicular to one plane and parallel or inclined to other plane.
6. Isometric • Principles of Isometric projection – Isometric Scale, Isometric
Projections Views, Conventions; Isometric Views of Planes, Simple and
compound Solids; Conversion of Isometric Views to C178.4
Orthographic Views and Vice-versa.
7. Overview of • Demonstrating knowledge of the theory of CAD software; Dialog

Computer Graphics boxes and windows; Shortcut menus; the Command Line; the
C178.5
Status Bar; Isometric Views of lines, Planes, Simple and
compound Solids.
8. Customization & • CAD Drawing along with customization tools, Annotations,
CAD Drawing layering & other functions. Orthographic Projections; Model
Viewing; Co-ordinate Systems; Multi-view Projection; Surface C178.5
Modeling; Solid Modeling.
9. Demonstration of a • Technical 2D/3D orthographic and Isometric projections;

simple team design Demonstration of a simple team design project. C178.5
project
Evaluation CriteriaComponents Maximum Marks
Mid Viva 20
End Viva 20
TA 60
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total 100
Project based learning: AutoCAD is a computer-aided software used for creating blueprints for bridges, buildings,
interior & exterior designs etc. The software is widely used by designers and drafters for creating 2D and 3D
computer drawings. Each student will opt an Automobile or Manufacturing Industry of India and learn more about
their projects and latest designs.
1. Bhatt N.D., Panchal V.M. & Ingle P.R., Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publishing House, 2014.
2. Shah, M.B. &Rana B.C., Engineering Drawing and Computer Graphics, Pearson Education, 2008.
3. Agrawal B. &Agrawal C. M., Engineering Graphics, TMH Publication, 2012.
Narayana, K.L. & P Kannaiah , Text book on Engineering Drawing, Scitech Publishers, 2008
4.
Proposal for the conduct of Course
1.Detailed Syllabus (Lecture-wise Breakup)

Course Code 15B11EC411 Semester Odd Semester 3rd Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month from August to December
Course Name ANALOGUE ELECTRONICS
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Archana Pandey, Dr. Hemant Kumar

Teacher(s) Dr. Archana Pandey, Dr. Garima Kapur, Dr. Hemant Kumar, Dr.
(Alphabetically) Kirmender Singh, Mr. Shivaji Tyagi, Mr. Varun Goel

Classify the different modes of operation of a transistor and
C213.1 Understanding Level (C2)
stability analysis of a transistor.
Explain and analyze the various BJT and MOS amplifier
C213.2 circuits for different frequency ranges. Analyzing Level (C4)
List and explain the building blocks of an Op-Amp and its

C213.3 Understanding Level (C2)
characteristics.
Explain the effect of feedback on amplifier characteristics and
C213.4 Evaluating Level (C5)
design of various types of oscillators.
Apply basic understanding of Op-Amp to design various
C213.5 Applying Level (C3)
electronics circuits for specified gain and waveform.

No. Module (yellow highlighted part shows the content covered in Lectures for
PBL CO3, CO4, CO5) the module
1. BJT Amplifier Single stage (CE, CB, CC), Small-Signal Model, 9

Multistage: CE-CE, Cascode, Darlington-pair and
Frequency Response of CE Amplifier
2. Introduction of Introduction of MOSFET, characteristics and basing 9
MOSFET and (voltage and current), small signal models: common source,
analysis of MOS common gate and common Drain, Frequency Response of
amplifier CS amplifier
3. Building Blocks of Basic building block of Op-Amp, Differential amplifiers, 8
Op-Amp Analysis of Differential Amplifiers,Current Mirrors
4. Feedback Four basic feedback topologies: series-shunt, series-series, 5
shunt-shunt, shunt-series, Introduction and Criterion for
oscillations
5. Measurement of Output Offset Voltage, Input offset voltage, Input Bias 3

Op-Amp Current, Input Offset current, CMRR, Slew rate, Open loop
Parameters and closed loop gain, PSRR.
6. Application of Op- Comparators, Zero Crossing Detector, Peak Detector, 4
Amp Schmitt trigger, Waveform generator (square wave,
triangular wave), Instrumentation amplifier.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20 (JIIT 128) , Course coverage-Lecture 1 to Lecture 12
T2 20 (JIIT 128), Course coverage-Lecture 13 to Lecture 24
End Semester Examination 35 (JIIT 62)- Whole syllabus
TA 25 (Attendance 10 marks,
Assignment 1 (JIIT 128) 10 marks, to be assigned on 18th june,
submitted by 26th june
Assignment 2/PBL (JIIT 62) 5 marks, to be assigned on 10th july,
submitted by 17th july
Total 100
Project Based Learning: Students will learn about the building blocks of an Op-Amp and its
characteristics, the effect of feedback on amplifier characteristics, design of various types of oscillators,
and use of Op-Amp to design various electronics circuits for specified gain and waveform. Students
will be given an analytical and simulation based problem/project, which will help them to develop
circuit analysis skills and expertise of circuit simulation tools.
A.S .Sedra & K.C.Smith, Microelectronic CIRCUITS Theory and Application, 6th Edition, Oxford
1.
University Press, 2011
2. J.Milman & Halkias : Integrated Electronics, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 1991.
R.A. Gayakwad: Op Amp and Linear Integrated Circuit Technology, 3rd Edition, Prentice-Hall India,
3.
1999.
Detailed Syllabus
Lab-wise Breakup
Course Code 15B17EC471 Semester : ODD Semester 3rd Session 2020-21

(specify Odd/Even) Month from Aug to Dec
Course Name Analogue Electronics Lab
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Shivaji Tyagi, Dr. Bharatendu Chaturvedi

Teacher(s)
(Alphabetically)
COURSE DESCRIPTION COGNITIVE LEVELS

OUTCOMES
C275.1 Plot the transient, frequency response of second-order RC circuit Applying Level
using SPICE/MULTISIM and utilize the plot to compare 3-dB (C3)
cut-off frequency with theoretical calculation.
C275.2 Analyze the bias point and plot frequency response of single- Analyzing Level
stage amplifiers and they will be able to build an amplifier of (C4)
given specifications.
C275.3 Build a common-source amplifier for a specified gain using N- Applying Level
channel MOSFET. (C3)
C275.4 Analyze BJT based simple constant current biasing circuit and Analyzing Level
subsequently improves its specification by using modified (C4)
current mirror.
C275.5 Determine differential gain, common mode gain and CMRR of Applying Level
BJT based differential amplifier. (C3)
C275.6 Simulate an operational amplifier and use it in different Analyzing Level
applications. (C4)

No.
1. Introduction and Installation of PSPICE Light version on GPL with operating C275.1
demonstration of instructions. Simulate transient and frequency response of first-
Simulation tool with order RC circuit for input of sine and square waveform.
suitable example
2. Study and Analyzing Use PSPICE to simulate dependence of β dc on collector bias C275.2
Biasing Techniques current for discrete BJT transistor (BC547B/ 2N2222A/3904).
3 Study and Analyzing Use PSPICE to compare the biasing techniques such as voltage C275.2
Biasing Techniques divider, collector to base bias and fixed bias for DC “Q- point”
stability of a BJT (BC547B/2N2222A/3904) on PSPICE
4. Large signal and Use PSPICE to determine instantaneous node voltages and C275.2
small signal analysis branch currents of single stage CE amplifier for triangular
of CE amplifier input V i = 1.6V (p-p) using discrete transistor
(BC547B/2N2222A/3904). Also determine the maximum
amplitude of V i which is allowed to be used in the amplifier.
5. Design of BJT based Use PSPICE to design a single stage BJT amplifier for given C275.2
amplifier specifications.
6. Frequency Response Use PSPICE to simulate frequency response of the Common C275.3
of Amplifier source amplifier using N- channel MOSFET BS170.
Determine
a) Upper, lower 3-dB frequency
b) Bandwidth
7. Current Mirror Use PSPICE to design a basic BJT current mirror using discrete C275.4
transistor (BC547B/2N2222A/3904) for reference current of
1mA. Determine the output resistance, current gain error.
8. Current Mirror Use PSPICE to design Wilson current mirror of 1mA and C275.4
determine the output resistance, current gain error.
9.* Differential Use PSPICE to simulate the single stage differential amplifier C275.5
Amplifier and determine the following:
a) Frequency response of differential gain A d .
b) Frequency response of common mode gain A CM.
c) Common Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR).
10.* Applications of OP- Use PSPICE to simulate the closed–loop non inverting C275.6
AMP amplifier, inverting amplifier, adder, subtractor for given
specifications and determine:
a) Transient Response
b) Its 3-dB bandwidth
c) Input resistance R i
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Viva 20
End Viva 20
Day to Day 60
Total 100
* These are advanced level experiments.
Students are advised to register and download the student version of PSPICE software from the
following link: https://www.orcad.com/orcad-academic-program.
A.S .Sedra & K.C.Smith, Microelectronic Circuits Theory and Application, 6th Edition, Oxford
1.
University Press, 2015(Text Book)
2. Marc Thompson, Intuitive Analog Circuit Design, 2nd Edition, Elsevier Publication, 2013
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B11EC214 Semester Odd Semester IIIrd Session 2020 -2021
Course Name Signals and Systems
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Ajay Kumar, PriyankaKwatra

Teacher(s) Ajay Kumar, JyotiVyas,PriyankaKwatra,SajaiVir Singh,
(Alphabetically) SaurabhChaturvedi,

Understand the mathematical representation, classification,
Understanding
C210.1 applications and analyze both continuous and discrete time signals and
(Level II)
systems.
Analyze and interpret the response of continuous and discrete time LTI
Evaluating
C210.2 system in time domain
(Level V)
Choose and demonstrate the use of different frequency domain
Evaluating
C210.3 transforms to examine and explain the spectral representation of the
(Level V)
CT and DT signals and systems.
Apply Laplace and Z transform to analyze and examine the response Analyzing
C210.4
and behavior of the CT and DT system. (Level IV)

the module
1. Signals and their Signal:- definition, Classifications of Signals (Continuous- 4
classifications time & Discrete-time, Analog & Digital, Energy & Power,
Deterministic & Random, Periodic & Aperiodic, Even and
Odd etc.)
2. System and their Classifications of Systems Classifications of Systems 5

classifications (Linear & Nonlinear, Time invariant & Time varying,
Causal & Non- causal, Memory & Memory less, Stable &
unstable system), LTI Systems (continuous-time and
discrete time).
3. Response of LTI Impulse response of a system, Response of LTI system, 5
system Convolution (Integral and Sum).
4. Fourier analysis of Continuous Transforms Fourier series, Convergence of 7

Continuous time Fourier series, Continuous-time Fourier Transform,
signal and system properties of Fourier series and Transform, Frequency
domain analysis of continuous time LTI system
5. Fourier analysis of Discrete Transforms Fourier series, Convergence of Fourier 7
Discrete time signal series, Discrete-time Fourier Transform, properties of
and system Discrete-time Fourier series and Transform, Frequency
domain analysis of discrete-time LTI system
6. Laplace Transform Laplace Transform, Concept of ROC and Transfer function, 7
pole-Zero plot, properties Laplace Transform, solution of
differential equations using Laplace Transform, System
function, Laplace approach to analysis the LTI system,
stability analysis
7. Z-transform Z- Transform, Concept of ROC, properties Z- Transform, 6
solution of difference equations using Z- Transform,
System function, pole-Zero plot , Z- Transform approach to
analysis the Discrete-time LTI system, stability analysis of
Discrete-time LTI system
8. Introduction to Digital filters:- definition and frequency response of basic 1
Digital Filters: FIR filtering function like BP, HP, LP, BR, AP
& IIR Definition and representation of IIR and FIR digital filter

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (…)
Total 100
1. A.V. Oppenheim, A.S. Willsky& S.H. Nawab, Signals & Systems, 2nd edition ,PHI ,2004
2. H.P. Hsu, Schaum's outlines of theory and problems of signals and systems. McGraw Hill; 1995.
3. S. Haykin& B. Van Veen, Signals and Systems, 2nd edition, John Wiley & sons, 2004.
4. M. Mandal, Amir Asif, Continuous and Discrete Time Signals and Systems, Cambridge, 2007
5. M. J. Roberts, Signals and Systems, Tata Mcraw-Hill, 2003

TarunRawat, Signals and Systems, Oxford University Press , 2010
6.
J. G. Proakis& D. G. Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithmsand Applications,
7.
Fourth edition, PHI, 2007.
Detailed Syllabus Signals and Systems Lab (18B15EC214)
Lab-wise Breakup
Course Code (18B15EC214) Semester Odd Semester-:III, Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month- : January-May
Course Name Signal and Systems Lab
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Kuldeep Baderia, Rahul Kaushik

Teacher(s)
Jyoti Vyas, Kuldeep Baderia, Madhu Jain, Rahul Kaushik
(Alphabetically)

Understanding of MATLAB and its various applications, Classification Understanding
C270.1 of continuous time signals and discrete time signals. (Level II)
Apply the coding skills of MATLAB for Convolution of continuous Applying

C270.2 time signals and discrete time signals, for DFT and IDFT. (Level III)
Analyze different LTI systems with Frequency domain representation Analyzing

C270.3 of continuous time and discrete time periodic and aperiodic signals. (Level IV)
Determine Laplace Transform of continuous time signals and Z- Evaluating

Transform of discrete time signals. Introduction to SIMULINK and to (Level V)
C270.4 realize systems described by differential and difference equations

No.
1. Understanding of Introduction to MATLAB and its various applications. C270.1
MATLAB and its use
in signals and discrete
time signals.
2. Study and Introduction to continuous time signals. C270.1
Classification of
continuous time
signals
3. Study and Introduction to Discrete time signals.. C270.1
Classification of
Discrete time signals
4. Study of parts of Introduction to even and odd parts of signal. C270.1
signals
5. Study of plotting of Write MATLAB Codes for generating and plotting various C270.1
different combinations of the two signals and perform time scaling, time
signals using shifting, time reversal and multiple transformations.
MATLAB
6. Study and calculation Write MATLAB codes for finding the Signal Energy or power C270.1
of of signals.
Power and energy of
signals using
MATLAB
7. Apply the concepts of To calculate the convolution sum of two discrete time signals. C270.2
MATLAB in finding
the
Convolution sum of
signals
8. Apply the concepts of To calculate the convolution integral of two continuous - time C270.2
MATLAB in finding signals.
the Convolution sum
of signals
9. Analyze different LTI Realization of LTI system and verify it. C270.3
systems with
Frequency domain
representation
10. Analyze Frequency Determine frequency domain representation of CT and DT C270.3
domain representation periodic signals.
of continuous time
and discrete time
periodic signals.
11. Analyze different LTI Determine frequency domain representation of CT and DT C270.3
systems with aperiodic signals.
Frequency domain
representation of
continuous time and
aperiodic signals.
12. Analyze and realize Write your own MATLAB function to compute DFT (Discrete C270.3
Discrete Fourier Fourier Transform) and IDFT (Inverse Discrete Fourier
Transform and Transform) for the spectral analysis of signals.
Inverse Discrete
Fourier Transform
13. DetermineLaplace Find out output y (t) of the system where input is x (t) and C270.4
Transform of impulse response is h (t) using Laplace Transform. Also, find
continuous time the ROC of the transform.
signals
14. Determine Z- Find out output y [n] of the system where input is x[n] and C270.4
Transform of discrete impulse response is h[n] using Z-Transform. Also, find the
time signals. ROC of the transform. Verify answer using MATLAB
commands „ztrans‟ and „iztrans‟. Check stability of the system
using MATLAB
15. Introduction to Introduction to SIMULINK and to realize systems described by C270.4
SIMULINK differential and difference equations.
16. Understanding of Virtual Lab: 1. Signals and its properties C270.1
MATLAB and its use
in signals
17. Understanding of Virtual Lab: 2. System and their properties C270.2
MATLAB and its use
in systems
18. Understanding of Virtual Lab: 3. Fourier analysis of signals C270.3
MATLAB and its use
in Frequency Domain
Representation of
signals
Evaluation Criteria
Viva 1(Mid Sem Viva) 20
Viva 2(End Sem Viva) 20
Assessment Components 20
Attendance 15
Lab Record 15
Virtual Lab Exps. 10
Total 100
Project Based Learning: Every Student will learn analyzing different LTI systems with frequency domain
representation of continuous time and discrete time periodic and aperiodic signals. Moreover, small groups of
students are required to develop one Simulink model to realize systems described by differential and difference
equations.
#Due to Pandemic situation of COVID-19, All the MATLAB programs will be performed using open source SCILAB and
OCTAVE, due to unavailability of licensed MATLAB software to the students.
J.G.Proakis and D. G. Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms, and
1.
Applications, Third Edition, PrenticeHall, 1999.
A.V.Oppenheim and R.W. Schafer, Discrete-Time Signal Processing, Second Edition, Prentice
2.
Hall, 1999.
Sanjit K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing: With DSP Laboratory Using MATLAB : A Computer-Based
3.
Approach, Second Revised Edition, TMH, 2001.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B11EC211 Semester Odd Semester 3rd Session 2020 -2021
Course Name Electrical Science-2
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr.SatyendraKumar, Dr.Kirmender Singh

(Names) Dr.Akanksha Bansal, Mr.Ankur Bhardwaj, Dr.Archana Pandey,
Teacher(s)
Dr.AtulKumar,Dr.BhagirathSahu,Dr.BhartenduChaturvedi,Mr.Chandan
(Alphabetically)
Singh,Mr.Deepak Kumar, Dr.GarimaKapur, Dr.Hemant
Kumar,Dr.Jitendra Mohan, Dr.Kaushal Nigam, Ms. MadhuJharia,
Mr.MandeepNarula, Mr.Nitesh Kumar, Dr.Pankaj Kumar Yadav, Mr.
Prabhakar, Dr.Rachna Singh, Mr.RahulKumar,Dr.RubiBeniwal,
Mr.ShivajiTyagi, Ms.ShradhaSaxena, Dr.Vimal Kumar Mishra,
Mr.Vimal Saini, Dr.Yogesh Kumar
Study and analyze the complete response of the first order and second Analysing Level
C203.1 order circuits with energy storage and/or non-storage elements.
(C4)
C203.2 Understand two-port network parameters and study operational Understanding Level
amplifier, first-order&second-orderfilters.
(C2)
C203.3 Study the properties of different types of semiconductors, PN junction Analyzing Level
diode, zener diode and analyze diode applications.
(C4)
C203.4 Study the characteristics, operation of bipolar junction transistor (BJT) UnderstandingLevel
and its biasing, stability aspects.
(C2)

the module
1. First-order network analysis, sequential switching,

Transient Analysis Differential equation approach for DC and Non constant 10
source, second order network analysis using differential
equation approach for DC and non-constant source
2. Two Port Network Definition of Z, Y, h and Transmission parameters and their

5
Parameters conversions.
3. Introduction to
Introduction to Operational Amplifier and its applications,
Operational
First-order and Second-order (Low Pass, High Pass, Band 5
Amplifier and
pass and Band Stop) RLC Filters.
Filters
4. Semiconductor Physics-Energy Band Model, Carrier

Statistics, Intrinsic Semiconductors, Extrinsic
Introduction to Semiconductors, Fermi Level, Charge densities in a
6
Semiconductor semiconductor, Carrier Mobility and Drift Current, Hall
Effect, Recombination of charges, diffusion and
conductivity equation.
5. P-N Junction diode, Biasing the PN Junction diode,

Current–Voltage Characteristics of a P-N Junction, Half
Diodes
Wave Rectifier &Full Wave Rectifier, Clipper&Clamping 8
&Applications
Circuits, Zener Diode and its application as voltage
reference , Line and Load Regulations of reference circuits.
6. Transistor Construction and Basic Transistor Operation,

Bipolar Junction
Transistor Characteristics (CE,CB,CC). Transistor Biasing 8
Transistor
& Stability.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Recommended Reading material: Author(s), Title, Edition, Publisher, Year of Publication etc. (
Text books, Reference Books, Journals, Reports, Websites etc. in the IEEE format)
1. R.C.Dorfand James A. Svoboda, “Introduction to Electric Circuits”,9thed, John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
2. Charles K. Alexander,Matthew N.O. Sadiku,“FundamentalsofElectricCircuits”, 6th Edition,Tata

McGrawHill,2019.
3. AbhijitChakrabarti,CircuitTheoryAnalysisand Synthesis,7thed,DhanpatRai&Co.2018.
RobertL.Boylestad,LouisNashelsky, “Electronic DevicesandCircuitTheory”,11thed,PrenticeHall of India,

4. 2014.
5. JacobMillman,Millman'sElectronicDevicesandCircuits (SIE),4thed,McGrawHillEducation,2015.
Course Description
Course Code 15B17EC271 Semester -: Odd Semester-: III, Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month- : July - December
Course Name Electrical Science-2 Lab
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Mr. Ankur Bhardwaj, Dr. Yogesh Kumar, Dr. Abhishek Kashyap
Teacher(s)
Shamim Akhter, Jasmine Saini, Ruby Beniwal, Nisha
Venkatesh, Ankur Bhardwaj, Rachna Singh, Atul Kumar, Alok
Joshi, B. Suresh, Kuldeep Baderia, Vinay Tikkiwal, Vishal
Narain Saxena, Vimal Mishra, Priyanka Gandhi, Abhay
Kumar, Monika, Yogesh Kumar, Abhishek Kashyap

Understand Transient analysis and steady state response of series RC Understanding
C204.1 circuit. (Level II)
Acquire the knowledge of circuits like Adder, Subtractor, Integrator, Analyzing

C204.2 differentiator; inverting and non inverting amplifier circuits realized (Level IV)
using Op-amp IC-741.
Study and Implementation of the different logic gates. Remembering
C204.3
(Level I)
Construct Adder, Subtractor and Multiplexer circuits using logic gates. Applying
C204.4
(Level III)
Module Title of the List of Experiments COs

No. Module
1. Study of Transient analysis of a series RC circuit for a
Transient given time constant. C204.1
Analysis in the
Network
Circuit
2. Study and Analysis of Parallel Resonance circuits C204.1
Analysis of
Parallel
Resonance
Circuits
3. Study and Analysis of Series Resonance circuits. C204.1
Analysis of
Series
Resonance
Circuits
4. Study and To realize inverting and non inverting C204.2
Analysis of amplifier configuration using Op-Amp IC-
Inverting and
Non-inverting 741.
by Op-Amp
5. Study and To realize adder and substractor circuits using Op-Amp C204.2
Analysis of IC-741
Adder and
Substractor by
Op-Amp
6. Study and To realize differentiator and integrator C204.2
Analysis of circuits using Op-Amp IC-741.
Differentiator
and
Integrator by
Op-Amp
7. Study of Logic Verification of the truth tables of logic gates using ICs C204.3
Gates and
Verification of
Boolean Laws
8. Study and To implement basic logic gates AND, OR, NOT using C204.3
Implement of NAND and NOR gates.
Basics Logics
Gates using
Universal
Logic Gates
9. Perform the To implement the Boolean expressions using NAND C204.3
Boolean gates only:
Expression
using Universal
Gates
10. Design and To realize a Half Adder, Full Adder using logic gates. C204.4
Implementation
of Adders
11. Design and To realize a Half Subtractor , Full Subtractor C204.4
Implementation using logic gates.
of Subtractors
12. Design and To realize 4:1 Multiplexer using NAND C204.4
Implementation gates.
of Multiplexer
13. Study and To implement a Voltage Comparator circuit C204.2
Implement of using Op-Amp
Voltage
Comparator
using Op-Amp
14. Study of To generate a Square Waveform using Op- C204.2

Square Amp
Waveform
using Op-Amp
15. Study and To design a First Order Low Pass Filter C204.2
Analysis of
Filter in Op-
Amp
Evaluation Criteria
Viva1 20
Viva2 20
Report file, Attendance, and D2D 60 (15+15+30)
Total 100
1. Richard C. Dorf, James A. Svoboda, “Introduction to Electric Circuits,” Wiley; 7 Edition, 2006
2. M. Morris Mano, “Digital Design,” 3rd Edition, PHI, 2002
3. A. A. Kumar, “Fundamentals of Digital Circuits,” 3rd Edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Limited, 2014
4. D. Roy Choudhary and Shail B. Jain, “ Linear Integrated Circuit,” 2nd Edition, NAILP, 20 03
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B11CI312 Semester : Odd Semester : Odd Session : 2020-2021

Month from July’20 to Dec’20
Course Name Database Systems & Web
Credits 4 Contact Hours 4(3+1)
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Neetu Sardana

Teacher(s)
Aditi, Ankit Vidyarthi, Mahendra Kumar Gurve
(Alphabetically)

C212.1 Explain the basic concepts of Database systems and Web components. Understand Level (Level
II)
C212.2 Model the real world systems using Entity Relationship Diagrams and Apply Level
convert the ER model into a relational logical schema using various (Level III)
mapping algorithms
C212.3 Develop a simple web application with client and server side scripting Create Level
using Javascript and PHP and connect with a given relational database (Level VI)
C212.4 Make use of SQL commands and relational algebraic expressions for Apply Level
query processing. (Level III)
C212.5 Simplify databases using normalization process based on identified Analyse Level
keys and functional dependencies (Level IV)
C212.6 Solve the atomicity, consistency, isolation, durability, transaction, and Apply Level
concurrency related issues of databases (Level III)

the module
1. Introduction to Introduction to Databases, Physical Level of Data Storage, 4
Databases Structure of relational databases, Review of SQL Create,
Insert, Update, Delete and Select Statements, Overview of
NoSQL databases
2. Web Architecture Motivation, characteristics and complexities of web 2

& Introduction applications, Basics, of Web Server and Application server,
differences between web application and conventional
software, architecture layers.
3. Client Side Web SGML, HTML 5, DHTML, CSS, Java script 3

Technology
4. Server Side Web PHP, Database Connectivity with PHP 4
Technology
5. Database Design Entity type, Attributes, Relation types, Notations, 4
and ER Model Constraints, Extended ER Features
6. Relational Model SQL: Data Definition and Data Manipulation, Relational 9

and Structured Algebra
Query Language
7. Procedural PL/SQL: Stored Procedures, Functions, Cursors, Triggers 4
Language
8. Normalisation Data Dependencies, 2NF, 3NF, BCNF, building 5
normalised databases
9. Transaction Transactions, Concurrency, Recovery, Security 7

Management
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 15
Attendance 10
Total 100
1. Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz, S. Sudurshan, Database system concepts, 5th Edition, McGraw-
Hill, 2006
2. Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B. Navathe, Fundamentals of Database Systems, 4th Edition, Pearson
Education, 2006.
3. Ramakrishnan, Gehrke, Database Management Systems, Mcgraw-Hill, 3rd Edition, Addison-Wesley,2006.
4. Thomas Connolly, Carolyn Begg, Database Systems-A Practical Approach to design, Implementation and
Management, 3rd Edition, Addison-Wesley,2002.
5. “PHP and MYSQL Manual” by Simon Stobart and Mike Vassileiou
6. “PHP and MYSQL Web Development” by Luke Welling and Laura Thomson(Pearson Education)
7. “An introduction to database systems” by Bipin C. Desai, West Publishing Company, College & School
Division, 1990 - Computers - 820 pages
8. Christopher J. Date, Database Design and Relational Theory: Normal Forms and All That Jazz, 2012.
9. Rajiv Chopra, Database Management System (DBMS): A Practical Approach, 5th Edition, 2016, 682
pages.
Detailed Syllabus
Lab-wise Breakup
Course Code 15B17CI372 Semester Odd- Semester III Session 2020
Special Month from June’21 to July’21
Course Name Database System & Web Lab

Credits 0-0-1 Contact Hours 2
Faculty Coordinator(s) Payal Khurana Batra, Prantik Biswas

(Names)
Teacher(s)
Dr. Anita Sahoo, Dr. Neetu Sardana , Prantik Biswas
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Explain the basic concepts of Database systems and Web components. Understand
CI271.1
(Level II)
Develop web page using HTML, CSS with client side scripting using Apply
CI271.2 javascript. (Level III)
Develop a simple web application with client and server side scripting Apply
CI271.3 using Javascript and PHP and connect to a given relational database. (Level III)
Programming PL/SQL including stored procedures, stored functions, Apply
CI271.4 cursors, Triggers. (Level III)
Design and implement a database schema for a given problem-domain Creating
CI271.5 and normalize a database. (Level VI)
Design a Project based on database management Create
CI271.6 ( Level VI)
Module Title of the List of Experiments CO

No. Module
1. Introduction to 1. MySQL Create, Insert, Update, Delete and Select CI271.1
MySQL Statements.
commands.
2. Client Side Web 1. Design web page using SGML, HTML 5, DHTML, CI271.2
Technology CSS, Java script.
3. Server Side Web 1. Develop a web application with client and server side CI271.3,
Technology scripting using Javascript. CI271.5
2. Develop a web application with client and server side
scripting using PHP.
3. Design web application with databased connectivity.
4. Design web application with entering user data into
database.
5. Desig web application for user - databse interaction
through PHP.
4. SQL Simple Queries, Sorting Results (ORDER BY CI271.4

Clause), SQL Aggregate Functions, Grouping Results
(GROUP BY Clause),Subqueries, ANY and
ALL,Multi-Table Queries, EXISTS and NOT
EXISTS, Combining Result Tables (UNION,
INTERSECT, EXCEPT),Database Updates
5. Procedural 1. Write PL/SQL program for storing data using CI271.4
Language procedures.
2. Write PL/SQL program for storing data using
stored functions.
3. Write PL/SQL program for storing data using
cursors and Triggers.
6. Project Students are expected to designed web application CI271.5,

based on Php or JavaScript and connect with CI271.6
databased to execute insert, update, retrieve and
delete data queries.
Evaluation Criteria
Lab Test-1 20
Lab Test-2 20
Day-to-Day 60
(Project, Lab Assessment, Attendance)
Total 100
Recommended Reading material: Author(s), Title, Edition, Publisher, Year of Publication etc. ( Text
books, Reference Books, Journals, Reports, Websites etc. in the IEEE format)
1. Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz, S. Sudurshan, Database system concepts, 5th Edition,
McGraw-Hill,2006
2. Ramez Elmasri , Shamkant B. Navathe , Fundamentals of Database Systems, 4th Edition, Pearson
Education, 2006.
3. Ramakrishnan, Gehrke, Database Management Systems, Mcgraw-Hill, 3rd Edition, Addison-
Wesley,2006.
4. Thomas Connolly, Carolyn Begg, Database Systems-A Practical Approach to design,
Implementation and Management, 3rd Edition, Addison-Wesley,2002.
5. “PHP and MYSQL Manual” by Simon Stobart and Mike Vassileiou
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B11HS211 Semester : ODD Semester : III Session 2020-21

(specify Odd/Even) Month from: Aug-December
Course Name Economics
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Manas Ranjan Behera, Dr. Anshu Banwari

Teacher(s) Dr. Akarsh Arora, Dr. Amandeep Kaur, Dr. Ansu Banwari, Dr.
(Alphabetically) Kanupriya Misra Bakhru,Manas Ranjan Behera, Dr. Mukta Mani
Dr. Sakshi Varshney, Dr. Shirin Alavi
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Explain the basic micro and macro economics concepts. Understanding
C206.1
( Level 2)
Analyze the theories of demand, supply, elasticity and consumer choice in Analyzing
C206.2
the market. (Level 4)
Analyze the theories of production, cost, profit and break even analysis Analyzing
C206.3
(Level 4)
Evaluate the different market structures and their implications for the Evaluating
C206.4
behavior of the firm. (Level 5)
Examine the various business forecasting methods. Analyzing
C206.5
(Level 4)
Apply the basics of national income accounting and business cycles to Applying
C206.6
Indian economy. (Level 3)

the module
1. Introduction Economics Definition, Basic economic problems, Resource 2
constraints and welfare maximization. Micro and Macro
economics. Production Possibility Curve. Circular flow of
economic activities.
2. Basics of Demand, Demand side and supply side of the market. Factors 3
Supply and affecting demand & supply. Elasticity of demand & supply
Equilibrium – price, income and cross-price elasticity. Market
equilibrium price.
3. Theory of Theory of Utility and consumer’s equilibrium. Indifference 2
Consumer Choice Curve analysis, Budget Constraints, Consumer Equilibrium.
4. Demand Regression Technique, Time-series 6
forecasting Smoothing Techniques: Exponential, Moving Averages
Method
5. Production theory Production function. Isoquants, Isocostlines, Optimal 3
and analysis combination of inputs. Stages of production, Law of
returns, Return to scale.
6. Cost Theory and Nature and types of cost. 3
Analysis Cost functions- short run and long run
Economies and diseconomies of scale
7. Market Structure Market structure and degree of competition 5
Perfect competition, Monopoly, Monopolistic competition,
Oligopoly
8 National Income Overview of Macroeconomics, Basic concepts of National 3
Accounting Income Accounting,
9 Macro Economics Introduction to Business Cycle, Inflation-causes, 3
Issues consequences and remedies: Monetary and Fiscal policy.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project+Class Test+Attendance and Discipline)
Total 100
1. H.C. Petersen, W.C. Lewis, Managerial Economics, 4th ed., Pearson Education 2001.
2. D. Salvatore, Managerial Economics in a Global Economy, 8th ed., Thomson Asia, 2015.
3. S. Damodaran, Managerial Economics, 2nd ed., Oxford University Press, 2010.
4. M. Hirschey, Managerial Economics, 15th ed., Thomson Asia, 2019.
5. P.A. Samuelson, W.D. Nordhaus, Economics, 19th ed., Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2010.
6. S.K. Misra & V. K. Puri, Indian Economy, 37th ed., Himalaya Publishing House, 2019.
Detailed Syllabus
Subject 19B13BT211 Semester: ODD Semester: III Session: 2020-2021
Code Month from: July to December
Subject Environmental Studies
Name
Faculty Coordinator(s) 1. Dr. Krishna Sundari S

(Names)
Teacher(s) 1. Dr. Krishna Sundari S
(Alphabetically) 2. Manisha Singh
3. Dr. Rachana
4. Ms. Ekta Bhat
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
CO205.1 Explain diversity of environment, ecosystem resources and Understand
conservation. Level
(C2)
CO205.2 Identify hazards related to environmental pollution and safe Apply
management practices Level(C3)
CO205.3 Apply modern techniques for sustainable Urban planning and Apply
Disaster management Level(C3)
CO205.4 Recall Government regulations, Environmental Policies, Laws & Understand

ethics Level
(C2)
CO205.5 Survey ground situation on specific environmental aspects, Analyzing
examine risks involved, make a field report and present the Level(C4)
findings
Modul Subtitle of the Topics in the module No. of

e No. Module Lectures
for the
module
1. The Definition, scope and importance, Need for public 6
Multidisciplinary awareness, Types of Ecosystems, World Biomes,
nature of Ecosystem functioning, Diversity of flora and fauna,
environment, species and wild life diversity, Biodiversity hotspots,
Biodiversity threats to biodiversity, Case studies.
2. Natural resources, Water, Land, Energy (Renewable, non-renewable, wind, 10
Energy consumption solar, hydro, Biomass), Mineral, Forest, & Food
& conservation resources, Global Conventions on Energy, Kyoto
protocol, Case studies.
3. Pollution, hazardous Air, Water & Land, chemical, noise pollution, sources & 8
waste management causes, effects, Electronic waste, nuclear hazards, Case
studies.
4. Urban planning, Sustainable building, Disaster Management and 8
human communities, Contingency Planning, human population, resettlement,
Disaster rehabilitation environmental movements, environmental
management ethics, Critical issues concerning Global environment
Urbanization, population growth, global warming,
climate change, acid rain, ozone depletion etc Case
studies.
5. Environmental Regulation of technology and innovation, Policy and 4
Policies, Laws, laws, Different Acts such as: Environmental Protection
Regulations & ethics Act, Air and Water Acts, Wildlife and Forest Acts), US-
EPA, National Environmental Policy; Function of
pollution control boards (SPCB and CPCB), their roles
and responsibilities, Case studies.
6 Field Work/ Explore the current environment related occurrences at 6
national and international level, Study of successful
sustainable measures, a know-how of industries in local
region and their possible effects, measure of water, air
and land quality, Visit to a local polluted site-Urban/Rural
/Industrial / Agricultural, Study of simple ecosystems.

etc. ( Text books, Reference Books, Journals, Reports, Websites etc. in the IEEE format)
1. Benny Joseph, Environmental Studies Simplified, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill
Education, India, Published 2nd August, 2017
2. Erach Bharucha, Textbook of Environmental Studies for UG Courses, 3rd Edition,
Orient Black Swan, Published 1st Jan 2013
3. Issues of the Journal: Down to Earth, Published by Centre for Science and
Environment (CSE), Delhi
EVALUATION:
Mid Semester Examination - 30 marks (To be held along with T-2 Exam)
End Semester Examination - 40 marks
Teachers Assessment (TA) - 30 marks
Structure of Grading Academic Performance: Mandatory to Pass, grade will be awarded

Probability and Random Processes (15B11MA301)
Course Description
Course Code 15B11MA301 Semester Odd Semester III Session 2020-21

Month from Aug 2020 – Dec 2020
Course Name Probability and Random Processes
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Amit Srivastava and Dr. Neha Singhal
(Names) Teacher(s) Dr. Amit Srivastava, Dr. Neha Singhal, Dr. Yogesh Gupta,
(Alphabetically) Dr. Himanshu Agarwal, Dr. Trapti Neer, Dr. Lakhveer
Kaur, Dr. Amita Bhagat
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES:
LEVELS
explain the basic concepts of probability, conditional probability and Understanding
C201.1
Bayes’ theorem Level (C2)
identify and explain one and two dimensional random variables along Applying
C201.2
with their distributions and statistical averages Level (C3)
apply some probability distributions to various discrete and Applying
C201.3
continuous problems. Level (C3)
Applying
C201.4 solve the problems related to the component and system reliabilities.
Level (C3)
Applying
C201.5 identify the random processes and compute their averages.
Level (C3)
solve the problems on Ergodic process, Poisson process and Markov Applying
C201.6
chain. Level (C3)
the module
1. Probability Three basic approaches to probability, conditional 5
probability, total probability theorem, Bayes’
theorem.
2. Random One dimensional random variables (discrete and 8
Variables continuous), distribution of a random variable
(density function and cdf). MGF and characteristic
function of a random variable and its utility.
Bivariate random variable, joint, marginal and
conditional distributions, covariance and
correlation.
3. Probability Bernoulli, binomial, Poisson, negative binomial, 8
Distributions geometric distributions. Uniform, exponential,
normal, gamma, Earlang and Weibull distributions.
4. Reliability Concept of reliability, reliability function, hazard 6
rate function, mean time to failure (MTTF).
Reliability of series, parallel, series-parallel,
parallel-series systems.
5. Random Introduction, Statistical description of random 7
Processes I processes, Markov processes, processes with
independent increments. Average values of random
processes. Strict sense and wide sense stationary
processes, their averages. Random walk, Wiener
process. Semi-random telegraph signal and random
telegraph signal process. Properties of
autocorrelation function.
6. Random Ergodic processes. Power spectral density function 8
Processes II and its properties. Poisson processes. Markov
chains and their transition probability matrix
(TPM).
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
Total 100
Veerarajan, T., Probability, Statistics and Random Processes, 3rd Ed. Tata McGraw-Hill,
1.
2008.
Papoulis, A. & Pillai, S.U., Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes, Tata
2.
McGraw-Hill, 2002.
Ross, S. M., Introduction to Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists, 4th Ed.,
3.
Elsevier, 2004.
4. Palaniammal, S., Probability and Random Processes, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2012.
Prabha, B. and Sujata, R., Statistics, Random Processes and Queuing Theory, 3rd Ed.,
5.
Scitech, 2009.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B11EC413 Semester Semester IV Session 2020 –2021
Even Month from Jan to June
Course Name DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Madhu Jain, Hemant Kumar

Teacher(s)
Parul Arora, Smriti Bhatnagar
(Alphabetically)

Recall the principles of z-transforms, explain the DFTs (Discrete Applying
C215.1 Fourier Transform) and develop FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) (C3)
algorithms for DFT.
Construct and Analyze the digital FIR (Finite Impulse Response) and Analyzing
C215.2 IIR (Infinite Impulse Response) filters. (C4)
Demonstrate multi-rate signal processing and relate DSP (Digital Understanding

C215.3 Signal Processing) in various applications. (C2)

the module
1. Review of Discrete Review of discrete–time sequences and systems, discrete 3
time Signals and time system analysis using Z transform.
Systems
2. Discrete Fourier Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) and its properties, Linear 11
Transform and filtering methods based on DFT, Frequency analysis of
FFT signals using the DFT, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
algorithms using decimation in time and decimation in
frequency techniques.
3. FIR Filter design Basic structures of digital filters; Significance of Linear 8
phase response, FIR filters design - Frequency sampling
and Windowing techniques, Computer aided design.
4. IIR Filter design Approximation of filter functions: Butterworth, Chebyshev, 10
Elliptic; IIR filter design based on analog filter functions-
Impulse Invariant and modified invariant response
techniques, Bilinear transformation method.
5. Multi-rate Digital Decimation & Interpolation, Filter design with sampling 5
Signal Processing rate conversion by a rational factor I/D
6. DSP Applications Applications in speech and image processing, and power 7
spectrum estimation.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Project based learning: Students will learn different techniques used for the generation, transformation, extraction
and interpretation of information via discrete signals which is essential for smart phones, home appliances,
healthcare devices, cameras and in general for many digital systems. Student shall be given various practical
situation based design exercises to be implemented in MATLAB or OCTAVE. This would enable them to recall
and apply various techniques and algorithms taught in course to design and analyse the required system that meets
the given technical specification.
L. Tan and Jean Jiang , Digital Signal Processing Fundamentals and Applications, Third Edition,
1.
Academic Press, 2013
J. G. Proakis & D. G. Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithms and Applications,
2.
Fourth edition, PHI, 2007.
3. S. K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing: A Computer Based Approach, Fourth Edition, McGraw Hill, 2013.
4. L. R. Rabiner, B. Gold, Theory and application of digital signal processing, Third Edition, PHI, 2012
5. A. Antoniou, Digital Signal Processing: Signals, Systems, and Filters, TMH, 2006
Detailed Syllabus
Lab-wise Breakup
Semester IV Session 2020 -2021

Course Code 15B17EC473 Semester Even
Month from Jan – Jun
Course Name Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Laboratory
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Bajrang Bansal, Dr. Madhu Jain

Teacher(s) Dr. Bajrang Bansal, Dr. Kuldeep Baderia, Dr. Sajai Vir Singh, Dr.
(Alphabetically) Madhu Jain, Dr. Vineet Khandelwal, Dr. Abhinav Gupta, Dr. Rahul
Kaushik, Mr. Ritesh Sharma, Ms. Smriti Bhatnagar

Recall and interpret discrete time signals and systems in time domain
C277.1 and in frequency domain Understanding Level (C2)
C277.2 Develop and demonstrate coding skills from basic mathematical Applying Level (C3)
operations to complex operations like DFT and FFT.
C277.3 Identify and examine different digital filter structures. Analyzing Level (C4)
C277.4 Determine and observe magnitude and phase characteristics
(Frequency response Characteristics) of digital IIR-Butterworth, Evaluating Level (C5)
Chebyshev filters and digital FIR filters using window techniques for
various applications of DSP.

No. Module
1. Introduction to Introduction to the MATLAB and its features. C277.1

MATLAB
2. Introduction to Introduction to the different applications of MATLAB. C277.1
applications of
MATLAB
3. Discrete-Time Generation of discrete time signals with different operation on C277.1
Signals independent and dependent variable.
4. LTI Systems Write your own MATLAB function to implement linear C277.1
convolution as an operation to analyze discrete time LTI system.
5. Z-transform Compute z- transform and inverse z-transform of a discrete time C277.1
signals and systems. Plot pole-zero map of the same using
symbolic tool box.
6. Discrete Fourier Write your own MATLAB function to compute DFT (Discrete C277.2
Transform (DFT) Fourier Transform) and IDFT (Inverse Discrete Fourier
Transform) for the spectral analysis of signals.
7. Spectral Analysis To determine magnitude and power spectrum of given signal. C277.2
8. Circular Write your own MATLAB function ‘mycirconv’ to compute C277.2

Convolution circular convolution of two sequences.
9. FFT Develop radix-2 butterfly FFT (Decimation in Time) algorithm for C277.2
the computation of N-point dft.
10. FIR Filter Write MATLAB program to design digital FIR filter employing C277.4
windowing technique.
11. IIR Filter Write MATLAB program to design IIR digital filter for a given C277.4
specification using bilinear transformation and impulse invariant
method.
12. IIR Structures Write MATLAB program for realization of digital IIR filter using C277.3
direct form-I & II, cascade and parallel method.
13. DFT Properties Virtual Lab: Study of Transform domain properties and its use. C277.2
14. FIR Filter Study Virtual Lab: Study of FIR filter design using window method. C277.4
15. IIR Filter Study Virtual Lab: Study of Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) filter. C277.4
Evaluation Criteria
V1 20
V2 20
AC 25
Attendance 15
Report 15
Virtual Lab Exp 5
Total 100
Project based learning: Students will design Digital filters (FIR and IIR) for the given design
specifications using MATLAB programming as well Filter Design Analysis tool. Additionally,
students in group sizes of two-three will realize various applications of DSP employing digital filters.
Sanjit K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing: With DSP Laboratory Using MATLAB: A Computer-Based
1.
Approach, 4th Edition, TMH, 2013.
Vinay K. Ingle, John G. Proakis, Digital Signal Processing Using MATLAB, 3rd Edition, Cengage
2.
Learning, 2012.
Detailed Syllabii
Subject Code 18B11EC212 Semester Semester 4th Session 2020-21

EVEN Month from Jan to June
Subject Name ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
Faculty Coordinator(s) ReemaBudhiraja, , Yogesh Kumar

(Names)
Teacher(s) Bhawna Gupta, Raghvendra Kumar
(Alphabetically)

Understand need of modulation and differentiate among various
C211.1 amplitude modulation schemes and design simple systems for ApplyingLevel (C1)
generating and demodulating amplitude modulated signals.
Analyze the generation and detection of FM signal and design basic
C211.2 Analyzing Level (C4)
systems for the indirect and direct generation of FM signals.
Understand the concepts of transmitters and receivers for analog Understanding Level (C2)
C211.3 modulations, Sampling process, time division multiplexing and
GSOP.
C211.4 Understand the concepts of waveform coding techniques, Line Analyzing Level (C4)
coding schemes and analysis of ISI Mitigation Techniques
C211.5 Understand the concepts of digital modulation techniques and Evaluating Level (C5)
evaluate their probability of error and bandwidth efficiency.
Module No. Subtitle of the Module Topics No. of Lectures
1. Introduction Elements of a communication 2

system;Analog and digital signals,
bandlimited signals and systems,
bandwidth
2. Amplitude modulation Introduction to modulation; AMSC,DSB, 7

SSB, VSB Communication. Detection of
AM signals: Coherent detection, Envelope
detection,Costas receiver.
3. Angle modulation Concepts of FM and PM,Narrowband and 6

wideband FM, Direct and indirect methods
of FM generation, Detection of FM signals
4. Transmitters , Receivers and AM and FM Transmitters, 3

Multiplexing Techniques Superheterodyne AM and FM Receivers.
FDM,TDM, Interchannel crosstalk and
bandwidth effects
5. Sampling and Quantization Time and frequency domain sampling 5
techniques with aperture effects, Reconstruction of
signals, Quantization process and mean
square quantization error, GSOP.
6. Speech Coding ,Line Coding Pulse Code modulation,Line Codes: 11
and Baseband Digital Unipolar-NRZ, polar-NRZ, Unipolar-RZ,
Transmission Bipolar-RZ, Manchester Code, DPCM, DM,
Bit rate and bandwidth of digital signals,
ISI Mitigation Techniques
7. Digital Modulation ASK, FSK ,PSK, QPSK Modulation, 16- 9
Techniques QAM, Demodulation, Constellation
diagrams, BER and their BW calculation,

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Project based learning: Here, students will learn the process of analog and digital modulation schemes as it is of the
utmost importance to understand the process of communication system and to design the same. Student will be able to
design the communicationsystem as per requirements and some simulation on Matlab can also be performed to analyze the
same . Understating of these techniques will further help to work in any communication based industry.
Recommended Reading(Books/Journals/Reports/Websites etc.: Author(s), Title, Edition, Publisher, Year of

Publication etc. in IEEE format)
1. LathiB.P, Modern Digital and Analog CommunicationSystems, 5th /ed ,Oxford University Press,2018
2. H. Taub, D. L. Schilling and GautamSaha, Principles of Communication Systems, 4th/ed,TMH, 2017
3. S.Haykin, Digital Communication Systems,John Wiley & Sons, 2013

ADC LAB PROPOSAL FOR SPECIAL SEM 2021
Course Code 18B15EC212 Semester Semester IV Session 2020-2021

(special sem) Month from Jan to June
Course Name Analog and Digital Communication Lab
Credits 1 Contact Hours 2 Hrs per week
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Bhawna Gupta, Atul Kumar

Faculty involved
Ashish Goel, Neetu Joshi, Reema Budhiraja, Richa Gupta, Bajrang
in deciding mode
Bansal, Kapil Dev Tyagi
of conduction

Analyzing
(Level IV)
Analyse and construct various analogue modulation/
CO1
demodulation techniques
Applying
Understand the concepts of sampling process and time division (Level III)
CO2
multiplexing.
Analyzing
CO3 Analyze and verify various digital modulation techniques. (Level IV)
Analyzing
Utilize Scilab/Octave to implement and understand the concept (Level IV)
CO4
of Pulse code modulation and Delta modulation.
Module List of Experiments COs

No.
1. Study and simulation of amplitude modulation with full carrier for all three cases CO1
of modulation indices.
2. Study and simulation of double side band suppressed carrier (DSB SC) CO1
modulation.
3. Study and simulation of frequency modulation schemes NBFM and WBFM. CO1
4. Study and simulation of Sampling and signal reconstruction. CO2
5. Study and simulation of time division multiplexing (TDM). CO2

6. Study and simulation of binary amplitude shift keying (BASK) modulation scheme. CO3
7. Study and simulation of the binary phase shift keying (BPSK) modulation scheme. CO3
8. Study and Simulation of binary frequency shift keying (BFSK) modulation scheme. CO3
9. Study and simulation of generation and demodulation of pulse code modulation CO4
(PCM).
10. Study and simulation of generation of delta modulation. CO4
Evaluation Criteria Components Day to day breakup Assessment Components

Maximum Marks AC 1- Lab record
Assessment Components 45 AC 2- Day to day work
Attendance 15 AC 3- Teacher Assessment
Viva 1(Mid Sem Viva) 20 Total AC 4- Execution of
Viva 2(End Sem Viva) 20 60 experiment
Day to day 60
Total 100
LATHI, B.P, Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Oxford University Press, 3rd edition,
1.
2005.
2. S. Haykin, Communication Systems, John Wiley & Sons, Intl. Ed, 2004.
Online platform: GNU Octave or SciLab
3.
Octave tutorials: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8gczfvuwnf8
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mvvmJLmfwNw
4.
Scilab tutorials: https://youtu.be/AzElVPaS71U
Scilab software download: https://www.scilab.org/download/6.1.0
Supporting links:
5
sampling and reconstruction: https://youtu.be/sC1cLeme6fU
Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 18B11EC215 Semester Even Semester IV Session 2020-21

Month from January to June
Subject Name Digital Circuit Design
Faculty Coordinator(s) Bhartendu Chaturvedi, Jasmine Saini

Members
Teacher(s) Akansha Bansal, Jitendra Mohan
COURSE OUTCOMES- At the end of the course, students will be able to: COGNITIVE LEVELS
Understand the representation and conversion of various number systems

and binary codes.
Understand the fundamental concepts and techniques used in digital

electronics which in turn form a digital logic.
Analyze and construct combinational and sequential logic circuits. Develop

C212.3 skill to troubleshoot digital circuits using Finite state machines. Study and Analyzing Level (C4)
Implement combinational and sequential circuits using VHDL.
Classify different semiconductor memories and analyze digital system
C212.4 design using PLDs. Classify and analyze wave shaping circuits and digital Analyzing Level (C4)
logic families.
Module No. Subtitle of the Module Topics in the Module No. of Lectures
1 Introduction to Digital Systems, Digital systems, Importance, Analog vs. digital 4

Binary Codes and Boolean world; Conversion of bases, Representation of
Algebra negative numbers, 9’s and 1’s complements, 10’s
and 2’s complements, Arithmetic using 1’s and 2’s
complements; Hexadecimal code, BCD, Excess-3
code, Gray code and Alphanumeric code; Basic
theorems and properties of Boolean algebra;
Digital logic gates.
2 Boolean Function Canonical and standard forms; Prime implicants 5

Representation and and essential prime implicants; Minimization of
Minimization Techniques Boolean functions using Karnaugh map and
Quine-McCluskey technique; Two-level gate
implementation.
3 Combinational logic circuits Binary adders and subtractors: Half adder, full 9
adder, half subtractor, full subtractor, full adder
using half adder, parallel adder, adder cum
subtractor, look ahead carry adder; Circuit delay
calculation; Magnitude comparator; Decoder and
encoder; Multiplexer and demultiplexer; Binary
multiplier; Code converters .
4 Sequential logic circuits Latches and flip-flops: SR, JK, master-slave JK, T 10
and D; Conversion of flip-flops; Synchronous and
asynchronous counters; Registers and shift
registers; Counters using shift registers; State
diagram; Analysis of sequential circuits using flip-
flops.
5 State machines Finite state machine of sequential circuits - Moore 3

and Mealy machines.
6 Programmable logic devices RAMs- DRAM, SRAM and ROM. PLDs: PLAs, 3
PALs and PROMs.
7 Wave shaping circuits Linear wave shaping circuits, Schmitt trigger, 2

Square wave generator, IC-555 based
multivibrators.
8 Introduction to digital logic Parameters of logic families, Types- DTL, RTL, 3

families TTL, CMOS.
9 Introduction to VHDL Basic language elements, Different modeling 3

styles: Dataflow, structural and behavioral.
Total Lectures 42
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Project based learning: Digital Circuit Design is a fundamental course in Electronics and Communication Engineering. In
this course, a description of the effective and innovative logic circuit design is presented, which can be utilized to design
various logic circuits. The project based exercises using Boolean logic functions, constructing a truth table, assembling the
logic gates, counters design and FSM are also included. In addition to understand digital era, this course also delivers
VHDL based basic learning methods that bring knowledge to drive state of art projects.
1. M. Morris Mano, “Digital logic and computer design,” 5th ed., Pearson Prentice Hall, 2013.
M. Morris Mano and Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design with an Introduction to the Verilog
2.
Hdl,” 5th Edition, Pearson Education, 2013.
3. J. Bhasker, “A VHDL Primer,” 3rd ed., Pearson Education, 2015.
4. R. P. Jain, “Modern Digital Electronics,” 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2009.
5. A. Anand Kumar, “Fundamentals of Digital Circuits,” PHI; 4th Revised edition, 2016.
Detailed Syllabus
Lab-wise Breakup
Course Code 18B15EC215 Semester: Even Semester: 4th Session 2020-21

(specify Odd/Even) Month from: January to June
Course Name Digital Circuit Design Lab
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Jitendra Mohan, Dr. Richa Gupta

Teacher(s) Dr. Abhishek Kashyap, Dr. Ashish Goel, Dr. Bajrang Bansal, Dr.
(Alphabetically) Bhartendu Chaturvedi, Dr. Vimal Kumar Mishra, Mr. B.suresh, Ms.
Bhawna Gupta
COURSE OUTCOMES - At the end of the course, students will be able to: COGNITIVE LEVELS
Learn the nomenclature of digital ICs, familiarize and verify the truth
tables of logic gates using ICs.
C271.2 Analyze, construct and verify various combinational circuits and their
Analyzing Level (C4)
functionalities.
C271.3 Identify basic requirements to analyze, construct and verify sequential
circuits.
C271.4 Utilize VHDL to implement and simulate the combinational and
Applying Level (C3)
sequential logic circuits.

No.
1. Nomenclature and Introduction to Digital Circuit Design Lab: Nomenclature of C271.1
specifications of Digital ICs, specifications, study of the data sheet, concept of
digital ICs V CC and ground, verification of the truth tables of logic gates
using ICs.
2. Implementation of (a) To implement basic logic gates AND, OR, NOT using C271.1
basic logic gates NAND and NOR gates
(b) To implement Ex-OR gate using NOR gates only
(c) To implement the Boolean expression(s) using NAND gates
3. Combinational Logic To design 4-bit Binary to Gray and Gray to Binary Code C271.2
circuits Converters.
4. Combinational Logic To realize a Half Adder, Full Adder and Half Subtractor using C271.2
circuits logic gates.
5. Combinational Logic To design a 2-bit Multiplier using basic logic gates. C271.2
circuits
6. Combinational Logic To realize and implement 2-bit Magnitude Comparator using C271.2
circuits logic gates.
7. Combinational Logic To realize 4:1 Multiplexer using NAND gates. C271.2
circuits
8. Combinational Logic To realize 2:4 Decoder using basic logic gates and to realize Half C271.2
circuits Adder using 2:4 Decoder as a block.
9. Seven-segment Display decimal digit between 0-9 on seven segment using BCD C271.2
display Decoder IC-7447.
10. Sequential Logic To realize and verify the truth table of SR, Gated SR, Gated D C271.3
circuits Latch using logic gates and of JK flip flop using IC-74LS76.
11.* Sequential Logic To design a Ripple Counter (Asynchronous) using JK flip flop C271.3
circuits IC-74LS76 and display the output on seven segment.
12.* Sequential Logic To Design and implement counting sequence 0, 7, 1, 6, 2, 5, 0, C271.3
circuits 7…. (Repeating) using IC-74LS76.
13.* Wave shaping circuits Using IC-555 in Astable mode to generate a rectangular pulse of C271.3
1ms period with duty cycle 75%.
14.* Combinational and (a) Write the VHDL program for the following logic circuits: C271.4
Sequential Logic Half Adder, Full Adder, 2X1 Multiplexers, 2:4 Decoder.
Circuits using VHDL (b) Write VHDL program for D, JK, T and RS flip flops.
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Sem Viva 20
End Sem Viva 20
Day-to-day performance 30
Attendance 15
Lab Record 15
Total 100
Project Based Learning: The main learning objective of this Lab course is that students should be able to analyze and
design simple combinational and sequential circuits by means of discrete components and hardware description language.
Students’ opinions have been obtained by means of course exit survey at the end of the course.
* These are advanced level experiments.
Recommended Reading material: Author(s), Title, Edition, Publisher, Year of Publication etc. ( Text books, Reference
Books, Journals, Reports, Websites etc. in the IEEE format)
1. M. Morris Mano, Digital logic and computer design, 5th ed., Pearson Prentice Hall, 2013.
2. M. Morris Mano and Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design with an Introduction to the Verilog Hdl,” 5th
Edition, Pearson Education,2013.
3. J. Bhasker, A VHDL Primer, 3rd ed., Pearson Education, 2015.
4. R. P. Jain, “Modern Digital Electronics,” 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2009.
5. A. Anand Kumar, “Fundamentals of Digital Circuits,” PHI; 4th Revised edition, 2016.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B1NHS431 Semester : EVEN Semester IV Session 2020-2021

Month: January 2021 to June 2021
Course Name Introduction to Literature
Credits 3 Contact Hours 3 (2-1-0)
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Monali Bhattacharya (Sector 62)

&
Dr. Ekta Srivastava (Sector 128)
Teacher(s)
Dr. Ekta Srivastava , Dr. Monali Bhattacharya
(Alphabetically)

C206-5.1 Understand figurative language to demonstrate communication skills CL-2 Understanding
individually and in a group.
C206-5.2 Develop a critical appreciation of life and society through a close CL-3 Applying
reading of select texts.
C206-5.3 Analyse a literary text thematically and stylistically and examine it as CL-4 Analysing
representing different spectrum of life, human behavior and moral
consciousness of society.
C206-5.4 To interpret Literature as reflection of cultural and moral values of life CL-5 Evaluating
and society.

the module
1. Introduction to Introduction 5
Literature & Literary Genres
Genres Literary Devices
Learning Communication Skills through Literature
2. On His Blindness: John Milton 6
My Last Duchess: Robert Browning
Poems “Hope” is the thing with feathers: Emily Dickinson
A Prayer before Birth: Louis MacNeice
Goodbye Party for Miss Pushpa T.S.: Nissim Ezekiel
3. The Spectator Club: Richard Steele 6
Prose & Short
Evidence: Isaac Asimov
Stories
Toba Tek Singh: Saadat Hasan Manto
4. Andher Nagari Chaupat Raja: Bhartendu Harishchandra 7
The Characters of Macbeth & Lady Macbeth as Universal

Plays & Drama
Characters.
Arms & The Man: G B Shaw

5. Novel To Sir With Love: E.R. Braithwaite 4
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignment, Project, Class participation)
Total 100

1 M.H. Abrams, ‘A Glossary of Literary Terms’, 7th Edition, Hienle & Hienle: Thomson Learning, USA,
1999
2 Mark William Roche, ‘Why Literature matters in the 21st Century’, First Edition, Yale University Press,
2004.
3 E.R. Braithwaite, ‘To Sir With Live’, First Edition, Bodley Head, UK, 1959.
Susie Thomas(Ed), "E. R. Braithwaite: 'To Sir, with Love' – 1959", Available at
http://www.londonfictions.com
4 Khalid Hasan ( Translator), ‘Saadat Hasan Maanto : Toba Tek Singh’ Reprint, Penguin Books, India,
2008.
5 G.B Shaw, ‘Arms & The Man’, Paperback, 2013
https://onemorelibrary.com/index.php/en/?option=com_djclassifieds&format=raw&view=download&task
=download&fid=10428
6 Anon, (n.d.). The Spectator Club. Sir Richard Steele. 1909-14. English.... [online] Available at:
http://www.bartleby.com/27/7.html [Accessed 2018].
7 All poems online: http://www.poetryfoundation .org
8 Wolfgang Clemen, ‘Shakespeare's Soliloquies’, First Edition, Routledge, London, 1987.
Detailed syllabus
Subject Code 15B1NHS432 Semester: Even Semester IV Session 2020-2021

Months: from Jan to June
Subject Name INTRODUCTION TO PSYCHOLOGY
Credits 3 Contact Hours (2-1-0)
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Badri Bajaj
(Names)
Teacher(s) Dr. Badri Bajaj
(Alphabetically)

Demonstrate a basic understanding of different perspectives and Understanding
C206-6.1
concepts of psychology (Level 2)
Applying
C206-6.2 Apply the concepts of psychology in day to day life
(Level 3)
Examine the different theoretical perspectives and models of Analyzing
C206-6.3
psychology (Level 4)
Develop solutions for problems related to psychology using Creating
C206-6.4
appropriate tools/models (Level 6)
Module No. Subtitle of the Module Topics in the module No. of Lectures
for the module
1. Introduction to Psychology Definition, Nature, and Scope of 3
Psychology; Approaches: Biological,
Psychodynamic, Behaviorist, and
Cognitive. Methods: Experimental,
Observation and Case study; Fields of
application.
2. Basic Concepts Person, Consciousness, Behavior and 5
Experience, Perception and learning
3. Memory Process of Memory: Encoding, Storage, 3
Retrieval; Stages of Memory: Sensory,
Short term and Long term
4. Motivation Motives: Intrinsic and Extrinsic Frame 3

Work, Theories of Motivation; Techniques
of Assessment of Motivations; Frustration
and Conflict.
5. Emotions Concept, Development, Expression, 2

Theories of Emotions.
6. Intelligence Nature, Theories, Measurement and 3
Approaches - Genetic and Environmental
7. Personality Nature, Approaches, Determinants and 5

Theories; Techniques of Assessment:
Psychometric and Projective Techniques.
JIIT University, Noida

8. Psychology of Adjustment Psychological Disorders: Anxiety, Stress, 4
Depression; Psychotherapies.
Total: 28
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project, Assignment, Oral Questions)
Total 100
Project based learning: Students in a group will choose a research topic from the syllabi of psychology. Students
will cover the following points to prepare project reports: Understanding of concept, related theories and
perspectives; Describe the relevance of the chosen concept for personal growth; Discuss the application of
chosen topic for your professional life; Elaborate the relevance of the topic at group level and societal level.
Discussions on these practical aspects will enhance students’ understanding & application of concepts of
psychology in day to day life.
1. R.A. Baron and G. Misra, Psychology, 5th Ed., Pearson, 2015
2. S. Nolen-Hoeksema, B. L. Fredrickson, G. R. Loftus, and C. Luts, Introduction to Psychology,

16th Ed., Cengage Learning, 2014.
3. S. K. Ciccarelli and G. E. Meyer, Psychology, Pearson, 5th Ed., 2017.
4. Clifford Morgan, Richard King, John Weisz, John Schopler, Introduction to Psychology,
7th Ed., McGraw Hill Education, 2017.
5. James W. Kalat, Introduction to Psychology, 9th Ed., Wadsworth Publishing; 2010
6. Gregory Feist and Erika Rosenberg, Psychology: Perspectives and Connections, 5th Ed.,
McGraw-Hill Education, 2021

Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B1NHS433 Semester EVEN Semester IV Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month Jan 2021- June2021
Course Name INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY
Credits 3(2-1-0) Contact Hours 3
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Prof Alka Sharma

Teacher(s)
Prof Alka Sharma
(Alphabetically)

C206-7.1 Demonstrate an understanding of sociological perspectives and concepts. Remembering (C1)
Explain the concept of social stratification and types of stratification as class, Understanding (C2)
C206-7.2 caste and gender.
Apply the major sociological perspectives, social concepts and methods in the Applying(C3)
C206-7.3 systematic study of society
Analyze the relevance of various social Institutions and how it shapes and Analyzing (C4)
C206-7.4 influences social interactions.

the module
1. Introduction Emergence of Sociology- forces and historical background, nature 5
and scope, relationship with other social sciences, difference
between common sense and sociology, Major sociological
perspective and methods, the sociological imagination
2. Basic Concepts of Society, Culture, Groups, sub-groups, Communities, Association, 4

Sociology Organization, social interaction and social structure: status and
role
3. Social stratification Stratification-concept, theories and type. Basis of stratification 4
caste, class, gender and race, status and Roles
4. Sociology of Kinship, Family ,Religion, Education &Economy in Society 5
Institutions
5. Process of Change Concept, theories and Agents of Social Change, Process of Social 6
and Mobility Change in Indian Society: Sanskritization, Westernization,
Modernization, Urbanization
6. Politics and Society Power, Elite, Bureaucracy, Pressure groups, Political parties, 4
nation, state and civil society, protest, agitation and Social
Movements
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20 (Project based)
TA 25 (Presentation, assignment, quiz and tutorial participation)
Total 100
Each student will be assigned a project based on primary data collection through in-depth interviews with their
parents, grandparents and other relatives
Topic of the project- the students will conduct a multidimensional analysis of their class with the Occupation,
Education, Income, and Wealth variable, using their parents, grandparents, and themselves as examples to find out
how do these variables relate to Social Class and social mobility? How has the Social Class of their family changed
(or not) over the past three generations?
1 Johnson, Harry M. Sociology: a systematic introduction. Routledge, 2013.
2 Rawat, H. K. Sociology: basic concepts. Rawat Publications, 2007.
3 Macionis, John J. Society: the basics. Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2009.
C. Wright. And Mills, The Sociological Imagination, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1959.
4
Peter L Berger, The Social Construction of Reality: a Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge. Garden
5
City, New York: Anchor, 1966.
Conley and Dalton, You May Ask Yourself: An Introduction to Thinking Like a Sociologist, 2nd Ed, W. W.
6
Norton & Company New York, 2011. ISBN: 0393935175 or 978-0393935172
Ballentine and Roberts, Our Social World: Introduction to Sociology, 4th Edition, Sage. 2013.
7
Robert Parkinand Linda Stone, (ed.). Kinship and Family: An Anthropological Reader, U.S.A.:
8
Blackwell, 2000, selected chapters
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B1NHS434 Semester: Even Semester IV Session 2020 -2021
Month from Jan 2021 to June 2021
Course Name Principles of Management
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Shirin Alavi

Teacher(s)
Dr. Shirin Alavi
(Alphabetically)

Describe the functions, roles and skills of managers and illustrate how
C303-1.1 Understanding Level (C2)
the manager’s job is evolving.
C303-1.2 Examine the relevance of the political, legal, ethical, economic and
cultural environments in global business.
C303-1.3 Evaluate approaches to goal setting, planning and organizing in a
Evaluating Level (C5)
variety of circumstances.
C303-1.4 Evaluate contemporary approaches for staffing and leading in an
Evaluating Level (C5)
organization.
C303-1.5 Analyze contemporary issues in controlling for measuring
organizational performance.

the module
1. Introduction to Management an Overview: Introduction, Definition of 7
Managers and Management, Role of Management, Functions of Managers,
Management Levels of Management, Management Skills and
Organizational Hierarchy, Social and Ethical
Responsibilities of Management: Arguments for and against
Social Responsibilities of Business, Social Stakeholders,
Measuring Social Responsiveness and Managerial Ethics,
Omnipotent and Symbolic View, Characteristics and
importance of organizational culture, Relevance of
political,legal,economic and Cultural environments to
global business, Structures and techniques organizations use
as they go international .
2. Planning Nature & Purpose, Steps involved in Planning, Objectives, 5
Setting Objectives, Process of Managing by Objectives,
Strategies, Policies & Planning Premises, Competitor
Intelligence, Benchmarking, Forecasting, Decision-Making.
3. Organizing Nature and Purpose, Formal and Informal Organization, 7
Organization Chart, Structure and Process,
Departmentalization by difference strategies, Line and Staff
authority- Benefits and Limitations-De-Centralization and
Delegation of Authority Versus, Staffing, Managerial
Effectiveness.
4. Directing Scope, Human Factors, Creativity and Innovation, 4
Harmonizing Objectives, Leadership, Types of Leadership
Motivation, Hierarchy of Needs, Motivation theories,
Motivational Techniques, Job Enrichment, Communication,
Process of Communication, Barriers and Breakdown,
Effective Communication, Electronic media in
Communication.
5. Controlling System and process of Controlling, Requirements for 5
effective control, The Budget as Control Technique,
Information Technology in Controlling, Productivity,
Problems and Management, Control of Overall
Performance, Direct and Preventive Control, Reporting,
The Global Environment, Globalization and Liberalization,
International Management and Global theory of
Management.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project, Viva, Attendance)
Total 100
1. Koontz H, Weihrich H. Essentials of management: an international, innovation, and leadership
perspective. McGraw-Hill Education; 10th Edition 2018.
2. Tripathi PC. Principles of management. Tata McGraw-Hill Education; 6th Edition 2017.
3. Principles of Management Text and Cases, Pravin Durai , Pearson ,2015

4. Robbins, S.P. & Decenzo, David A. Fundamentals of Management,7th ed., Pearson, 2010
5. Robbins, S.P. & Coulter, Mary Management; 14 ed.,Pearson , 2009
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B1NHS435 Semester: Even Semester IV Session:2020-21

Month from: Jan-June
Course Name Financial Accounting
Credits 3 Contact Hours 3 (2,1,0)
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Mukta Mani (Sec-62), Dr. Sakshi Varshney (Sec-128)
Teacher(s)
Dr. Mukta Mani, Dr. Sakshi Varshney
(Alphabetically)

Understand the basic concepts of Accounting. Understanding level (C2)
C206-8.1
Apply accounting concepts for recording of business transactions. Applying level (C3)
C206-8.2
Compare and reconcile the accounting records with other sources of Analyzing level (C4)
C206-8.3
information
Evaluate the accounting records to identify and rectify the errors made Evaluating level (C5)
C206-8.4
during accounting process.
Construct the final accounts and cash flow statement of a business Creating (C6)
C206-8.5

the module
1. Introduction to Meaning of Accounting, Objectives of Accounting, 2
Accounting Understanding Company Management, Stakeholders
versus Shareholders, Financial Reporting Standards,
Financial Reporting
2. Understanding Elements of Financial Statements- Assets, Current 2
Accounting assets, Liabilities, Current liabilities, Equity, Income,
Elements Expenses, Accounting Equation
3. Accounting Business entity concept, Money measurement concept, 2

Concepts Going concern, Consistency, Matching concept, Cost
concept, Dual aspect concept, Materiality,Full
disclosure,Generally Accepted Accounting Principles
(GAAP)
4. Journal Journal, Rules of Debit and Credit, Compound Journal 2
Transactions entry, Opening entry
5. Ledger Posting Ledger, Posting, relationship between Journal and 3

and Trial Balance Ledger, Rules regarding Posting, Trial balance
6. Rectification of Different types of errors, their effect on trial balance, 5

Errors rectification and preparation of suspense account
7. Bank Meaning of Bank Reconciliation Statement, technique 2
Reconciliation of preparing BRS, Causes of difference
Statement
8. Final Accounts Trading account, Profit and Loss account, Balance 6
sheet, Adjustment entries
9. Cash Flow Introduction of Cash Flow Statement,Classification of 4
Statement Cash inflows and Cash Outflows Activities,prepare the
statement of cash flows using direct and Indirect
method
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project+ Class test/Quiz+Class Participation)
Total 100
Project Based learning: Students form a group of 4-5 students. Each group is required to choose a company listed in Indian
stock exchange and download its latest annual report. Students are required to describe the company,composition of board of
directors, number of company’s executives,independent directors,background of independent directors. They are required to
find outfinancing, investing and operating activities and examines the change in total assets, sales and net profit of the
company. As per auditor’s report, company’s position and future plans for growth of the company is also analyzed.
Maheshwari S. N., Financial and Management Accounting, 5th Ed., S. Chand & Sons Publication,
1. 2014. ISBN No.: 978-81-8054-529-0
Ghosh, T.P., Financial Accounting for Managers, 4th Ed., Taxmann Publications, 2009
2.
3. Tulsian,P., Financial Accounting,1st Ed., Pearson Education India,2002

Bhattacharya, A., Financial Accounting for Business Managers, 4th Ed., Prentice Hall of
4.
India,2012
Weygandt.J., Kimmel, P., Kieso,D., Accounting Principles, 12th Edition, John Wiley &
5.
Sons,2015
Barton,M., Bhutta, P.,S. O'Rourke,J.,Satyam Computer Services Ltd: Accounting fraud in
6.
India,London,SAGE Publications Ltd, 2017,
Detailed Syllabus
Subject 15B11HS111 Semester: EVEN Semester IV Session 2020-2021

Code Month from Jan to June
Subject LIFE SKILLS
Name
Credits 2 Contact Hours 2 (1 1 0)
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Praveen Sharma & Dr. Deepak Verma
(Names) Teacher(s) Dr.Akarsh Arora,Dr. Amandeep Kaur, Dr. Badri Bajaj, Dr.
(Alphabetically) Kanupriya Bakhru, Dr Praveen Sharma, Dr. Anshu Banwari, Dr.
Deepak Verma, Dr. Ekta Shrivastava, Dr. Nilu Choudhary

Understand Life Skill required to manage self and one’s Understand (C2)
C209.1
environment
Apply comprehensive set of skills for life success for self and Apply (C3)
C209.2
others
C209.3 Analyze group dynamics for its effective functioning Analysing (C4)
C209.4 Evaluate the role of women leadership and gender issues Evaluate (C5)
for the module
1. Introduction Introduction to Life Skills; basic Concepts 1
and Relevance for Engineers
2. Individual-1 Emotional Intelligence, Stress Management, 4
Goal Setting
3. Individual-II Dimensions of Personality, Values and 3
Attitudes, Assertiveness, Well being,
4. Group Dynamics Group, Group types, Group Relationship, 3
Social Loafing, Social Facilitation
5. Women Leadership Gender Sensitization, Women Leadership. 3
Total number of Hours 14
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignment & Project)
Total 100

Project Based Learning: Students are supposed to form a group (Maximum 5 students in each group) and
identify a Women leader of their choice. They are supposed to do the in-depth study on the leadership style of
their identified leader and explain it. They are also supposed to explain identified women leader’s personality
traits by referring the Big five personality traits model. The project provides understanding to students on
Women leadership and personality traits.
1. Stephen P. Robbins, Organizational Behaviour, 9th Edition, Prentice-Hall India 2001
2. Smith, E., Hoeksema, S., Fredrickson, B., & Loftus, G. Introduction to Psychology.
Thompsons and Wadsworth Co, 2003
3. Daniel Goleman, Working With Emotional Intelligence, Bantom Books 1998
4. Sue Bishop, Assertiveness Skills Training, Viva Books, New Delhi, 2004
5. Adele B. Lynn 50 Activities for Developing Emotional Intelligence, Ane Books, 2003
6. Sivasailam Thiagarajan, Glenn M. Parker; Teamwork and Teamplay, Games and Activities for
Building and Training Teams., Jossey-Bass, 1999
7. Kaul A.& Singh M., ”New Paradigms for Gender Inclusivity”, PHI Pvt Ltd 2012

Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16B1NHS332 Semester: Even Semester: IV Session 2020-21
(specify Odd/Even) Month from: Jan-June
Course Name Quantitative Methods for Social Sciences
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Manas Ranjan Behera
Teacher(s) Manas Ranjan Behera

(Alphabetically)
Demonstrate the key concepts of different quantitative methods Understanding Level- (C2)
C206-3.1 used in social sciences.
C206-3.2 Classify and summarize the data to be used for analysis. Understanding Level- (C2)
Apply the theoretical concept to perform basic data analysis in Apply Level –(C3)
C206-3.3 social sciences.
Examine different statistical methods and be able to discuss the Analyze Level –(C4)
C206-3.4 merits and limitations of a particular method
Recommend appropriate conclusions following empirical Evaluation Level- (C5)

C206-3.5 analysis

the module
1. Introduction Introduction to Quantitative Methods, Classification & 3

Presentation of Data: Tabulation-Types of Table,
Diagrammatical and Graphical presentation.
2. Mathematical Mathematical basis of Managerial Decision-Concepts, 3

Concepts Frequency Distribution and their Analysis
3. Statistical Concepts Measures of Central Tendency, Measures of Dispersion, 4

Measures of Association, Sampling and sample size
estimation, Point estimation, Statistical Intervals based on
Single sample.
4. Hypothesis Testing Hypothesis Testing based on single sample, Inferences 8

based on Two samples, t, Z and chi- square and F tests
5. Regression Simple Linear Regression and Correlation, Multiple 3

Analysis Regression Model
6. Time Series Trend Projection, Moving averages and Exponential 3

Analysis smoothing Techniques, Index Numbers
7. Multivariate ANOVA, MANOVA, Factor Analysis, Discriminant 4

Analysis Analysis
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Quiz+ Project+Viva-voce)
Total 100
Project based Learning: Students have to form a group (maximum 5 students in each group)
and have to do a project on quantitative research techniques and strategies. The project
emphasizes on objective measurement and the statistical analysis of data collected through
surveys, questionnaires and polls. The students will gain a first-hand experience of data analysis
which will help them in entering an analytical or research career.
1. Sirkin, RM. Statistics for the Social sciences. 3rd ed. Thousand Oaks, Calif: Sage Publications; 2006.
Montgomery, DC. , George C. Runger. Applied statistics and probability for engineers. 3rd ed. Hoboken,
2.
NJ: Wiley.,2007
3. Healey, JF. Statistics: A Tool for Social Research. 9th ed. Calif: Wadsworth Cengage Learning; 2012.
Stockemer, D.Quantitative Methods for Social Sciences: A Practical Introduction with examples in SPSS
4. and STATA 1st ed., Springer International Publishing, 2019
Kaplan, DW. The SAGE Handbook of Quantitative Methodology for the Social Sciences. 1st ed. SAGE
5. Publications Inc,2004
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16B1NHS431 Semester Even Semester IV Session 2020-21

Course Name HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
Credits 3 Contact Hours 3(2-1-0)
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr.Praveen Kumar Sharma

Teacher(s)
Dr. Praveen Kumar Sharma
(Alphabetically)

Demonstrate a basic understanding of different functions of human
resource management: Employer Selection, Training and Learning,
Understand Level (C2)
C206-1.1
Performance Appraisal and Remuneration, Human Relations and
Industrial Relations.
Apply various tools and techniques in making sound human resource Apply level (C3)
C206-1.2
decisions.
Analyze the key issues related to administering the human resource
management activities such as recruitment, selection, training,
Analyze Level (C4)
C206-1.3
development, performance appraisal, compensation and industrial
relation.
Critically assess and evaluate different human resource & industrial
C206-1.4 relation practices and techniques and recommend solutions to be
Evaluate Level (C5)
followed by the organization

the module
1. Introduction Introduction to Human Resource Management and its 3
definition, HRM functions and its relation to other
managerial functions, Nature, Scope and Importance of
Human Resource Management in Industry, Role & position
of Personnel function in the organization. Human Resource
Planning
2. Employer Selection Recruitment Process; Selection Process - Job and Worker 8
Analyses, Matching Job with the Person; Selection Methods
- Application Blank, Biographical Inventories, References
and Recommendation Letters, Interviews
3. Training and Need Identification; Psychological Factors in Learning; 6
Learning Training Methods in the Workplace; Effective Training
Programme
4. Performance Different methods of Performance Appraisal, Basic 6
Appraisal and concepts in wage administration, company’s wage policy,
Remuneration Job Evaluation, Issues in wage administration, Bonus &
Incentives
5. Human Relations Factors influencing industrial relations - State Interventions 5
and Industrial and Legal Framework - Role of Trade unions - Collective
Relations, Trends Bargaining - Workers' participation in management. Trends
in Human Resource in Human Resource Management: Analytics, Artificial
Management Intelligence
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25(Project, Quiz)
Total 100
Project-based learning: Each student in a group 4 to 5 will select a company which is registered in
India. To make subject application based, the student will analyze Human Resource management
policies and employed performing different functions at various levels related to recruitment, training,
development, performance appraisal, compensation and industry relation.
1. G. Dessler and B. Varrkey, Human Resource Management, 15e. Pearson Education India, 2005.
2. V. S. P. Rao and V. H. Krishna, Management: Text and cases. Excel Books India, 2009.
K. Aswathappa, Human resource management: Text and cases. Tata McGraw-Hill Education,
3.
2013.
P. M. Noe, R. A., Hollenbeck, J. R., Gerhart, B. A., & Wright, Fundamentals of Human Resource
4. Management. Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2019.
5. B. Pattanayak, “Human Resource Management, PHI Learning Pvt,” Ltd., New Delhi, vol. 2, 2018.
D. A. DeCenzo, S. P. Robbins, and S. L. Verhulst, Fundamentals of human resource management. John

6. Wiley & Sons, 2016.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B11EC312 Semester Odd Semester 5th Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month from August-December
Course Name Electromagnetic Field Theory
Faculty Coordinator(s) Ashish Gupta, Vishal Saxena

(Names)
Teacher(s)
K. Nisha, Neetu Joshi, Raghvenda Kumar Singh, Reema Budhiraja,
(Alphabetically)

Recall concepts of vector calculus to solve complex problems and Understanding Level
relate among different coordinate systems. Explain the basic principles (C2)
C312.1
of electrostatics and magnetostatics and relate the electric and magnetic
fields using Maxwell’s Equations.
C312.2 Illustrate the propagation of electromagnetic waves in different Applying Level
medium and their reflection and transmission parameters. Distinguish (C3)
among different wave polarizations.
C312.3 Estimate the current, voltage and power for the different types of Evaluating Level
transmission lines, determine reflection parameters. Demonstrate the (C5)
Waveguide theory, Wave equations, and evaluate different waveguide
parameters.
C312.4 Classify and compare the different parameters associated with the Understanding Level
antenna and also interpret the radiation mechanism. (C2)

the module
1. Review of scalar, vector fields and coordinate systems
Introductory
(cylindrical and spherical coordinate) Electrostatic and 8
material
Magneto static Fields
2. Inconsistency of Amperes law, Continuity equation,
Maxwell’s
Displacement current, Maxwell’s equations, Boundary 4
Equations
conditions.
3. Wave propagation in free space, Conductors and dielectrics,
Polarization, Plane wave propagation in conducting and
Electromagnetic
non conducting media, Phase velocity, Group velocity; 11
Waves
Reflection at the surface of the conductive medium, Surface
Impedance, Depth of penetration.
4. Poynting Vector Poynting theorem, Poynting Vectors and power loss in a
2
and Power plane conductor.
5. Transmission line equations, characteristic impedance, open
Transmission Lines and short circuited lines, standing wave and reflection 7
losses. Impedance matching.
6. Rectangular wave guides Modes in rectangular
Wave guides 6
coordinates, characteristics, power transmission and losses.
7. Radiation and Scalar and vector potentials. Radiation from a current
4
Antennas filament, Antenna characterstics, radiation pattern, radiation
intensity, directivity and power gain.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
( Text books, Reference Books, Journals, Reports, Websites etc. in the IEEE format)
1. M.N.O. Sadiku, S.V. Kulkarni, Principles of Electromagnetics, Oxford Press, 6th Edition, 2016.
W. H. Haytt, J.A. Buck, M. J. Akhtar, Engineering Electromagnetics, McGraw Hill Education, 8th Edition,
2.
2014.
3. S. Salivahanan, S. Karthie, Electromagnetic Field Theory, McGraw-Hill Education, 2nd Edition, 2019.
4. C.A. Balanis, Advanced Electromagnetics, Wiley Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2012.
5. S.C. Mahapatra, S. Mahapatra, Principles of Electromagnetic, McGraw Hill Education, 2nd Edition, 2015.
6. A.R. Harish, M.Sachidananda, aAntennas and Wave Propagation, Oxford University Press, 2015.
Detailed Syllabus
Lab-wise Breakup
Course Code 18B15EC312 Semester Odd Semester 5th Session 2020-21

(specify Odd/Even) Month from July to December
Course Name Electromagnetic Field Theory Lab
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Ashish Gupta, Monika

Teacher(s) Bhagirath Sahu, Neetu Joshi, Raghvenda Kumar Singh, Reema
(Alphabetically) Budhiraja, Vishal Narain Saxena
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
To observe electromagnetic wave propagation in X-band waveguide Understanding
CO1 and draw the dispersion curves. To simulate a rectangular waveguide (Level II)
and calculate its cut-off frequency.
Calculate and evaluate the various parameters such as VSWR and load Applying
CO2 impedance of transmission lines. (Level III)
Measure the microwave power in Gunn oscillator, directional coupler Evaluating

CO3 (Level V)
and also measure the radiation patterns of the antenna.
Design and simulate the different antenna parameters using HFSS Create
CO4 software and verify with the measured results. (Level VI)

No.
1. Rectangular To determine the frequency and wavelength in a rectangular 1
Waveguide Parameters waveguide working in TE10 mode.
2. Rectangular To study the propagation of wave in X-band waveguide and 1
Waveguide Parameters draw the ω-β plot.
3. Rectangular Determine the VSWR /input VSWR & corresponding 2
Waveguide Parameters impedance of the device at a spot frequency in X-band and
also verify by using smith chart.
4. Design of Rectangular Determine experimentally the broader dimension of 1
Waveguide rectangular waveguide using microwave test bench at X-band
of microwave frequency.
5. I-V characteristics of a To study Gunn Oscillator as a source of microwave power 3
Gunn-Diode and hence to study and plot its I –V characteristics.
6. Measurement of To study the variation of field strength of radiated wave, with 3
Received Power distance from a transmitting antenna.
7. Radiation Pattern To plot and study the radiation pattern of Dipole and Yagi 3
antenna.
8. Measurement Determine experimentally the propagation characteristics of 3
following microwave devices operating at X-band using
microwave test bench
a. Directional coupler,
b. Magic Tee.
9. Simulation Design and Simulation of Rectangular Waveguide and plot 1
the S- Parameters to obtain the cut-off frequency.
10. Simulation Design, Simulation, Optimization and characterization any 4
planar Antenna on ANSYS HFSS.
11. Measurement of Input Measurement of Input parameters of an Antenna using Vector 4
parameters of the Network Analyzer.
antenna
Evaluation Criteria
Attendance 15
Lab Record 15
Total 100
Project Based Learning: Students will learn to design a rectangular waveguide for a given frequency range and
to study the configuration of Electric and Magnetic waves. They can also see the number of supporting modes
for a given rectangular waveguide and operating frequency. They will be able to operate and characterize
different microwave devices such as Gunn Diode, Directional Coupler, magic tee etc. Students can also plot and
measure the radiation patterns of the given antennas. Most importantly students will be able to simulate and
characterize the designed antennas and waveguides with the help of Ansys High Frequency Structure Simulator
(HFSS) tool. After designing and subsequent fabrication, antennas can be measured using vector network
analyzer available in the lab. Thus students can make different projects by using the knowledge gained from the
mentioned experiments.
1. M.N.O. Sadiku, S.V. Kulkarni, Principles of Electromagnetics, Oxford Press, 6th Edition, 2016.
2. C.A. Balanis, Advanced Electromagnetics, Wiley Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2012.
3. A.R. Harish, M.Sachidananda, aAntennas and Wave Propagation, Oxford University Press, 2015.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B11EC313 Semester …Odd Semester Vth, Session 2020 -2021
Semester Month from August to Dec
(specify Odd/Even)
Course Name Microprocessor and Microcontroller
Credits 3 Contact Hours
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Smriti Bhatnagar, Varun Goel

Teacher(s)
Atul Kr. Srivastava, Smriti Bhatnagar , Varun Goel
(Alphabetically)

C330-1.1 Recall the basics of digital circuits, specifications and
C1
applications.
C330-1.2 Familiarize with the basics of 8 bit, 16 bit and 32 bit
microprocessor / Microcontroller, and its internal organization. C2
C330-1.3 Use the knowledge of different instructions of 8085

microprocessor/ 8051 Microcontroller to write the various
C3
programs in assembly language.
C330-1.4 Interface the memory chips and peripheral chips, LED,

LCD, Keyboard, Motor and Sensors with 8085 C4
microprocessors and Micro controllers.

the module
1. Introduction to Digital Circuit Parameters (Open collector outputs, Tristate 6L
Digital outputs, I/O source and sink, Fan-in and Fan-out,
Electronics & Propagation delay, Figure of merit), Pipelining & Parallel
Microprocessor Processing, Cache Memory, Memory Management, Virtual
Memory System, Introduction to Microprocessors,
Evolution of Microprocessor, Microprocessor Systems with
Bus Organization, Concept of Memory & its internal
Organization, Memory Expansion, Classification of
Memories & their types.
2. Detailed Study of Features of 8085, Microprocessor Architecture in detail, Pin 15L

Microprocessor Diagram in detail, De-multiplexing Address & Data Bus,
8085 Generation of Control Signals, Interfacing with Memory &
I/O Device with timing diagram, Instruction fetching,
execution & data transfer operation, Programmer’s Model
& Instruction Set, Different Formats for Instruction,
Opcode & Data, Addressing Modes, Complete Instruction
Set (Data transfer, Arithmetic & Logical, Branch & Stack),
Assembly language programming, Looping, Counting &
Indexing techniques, Interrupt System of 8085, Polling &
Interrupt, Basic definition of Interrupts, Interrupt Structure
& their types, Masking/Unmasking of Interrupts, Interrupt
driven I/O, Microprocessor (8086, 80186, 80286, etc.),
Architecture Advancement of Programming Examples
3. Detailed Study of Microprocessor Versus Microcontrollers, Microcontrollers 12L
8051 for Embedded Systems, Embedded Versus External
Microcontroller Memory Devices, CISC Versus RISC Processors, Harvard
Versus Von-Neumann architecture, 8051/8031/8052
Microcontroller (Basic architecture, Pin configuration,
Memory organization (registers and I/O ports), Assembly
language programming (addressing modes and instruction
set), Timers and Interrupts, Serial Communication,
Programming Examples.
4. Real World Interfacing of single LED, Blinking of LED with timer and 10L
Interfacing with without timer, Interfacing of push-button, LED & 7-
Microcontroller segment display, Intelligent LCD Display, Interfacing of
intelligent LCD display, Interfacing of Matrix Keyboard to
control 7-segment display, Stepper Motor & DC Motor,
Interfacing with stepper & DC motor, Relay Interfacing,
Different Sensor Interfacing, IR & LDR Sensor, DTMF,
8255 PPI Chip ( Pin Configuration, Block Diagram,
Operating Modes, Memory Mapped I/O & I/O Mapped
I/O), Application of 8255 - 7 segment, Traffic Light
Controller etc.
Total number of Lectures 43 L

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Muhammad Ali Mazidi, “The 8051 microcontroller and Embedded Systems using Assembly and C”, 2nd Edition,
1. Pearson Education, 2008.
2. R. S. Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture Programming & Applications”, Prentice Hall, 2002.

Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 20B12EC211 Semester Odd Semester 5th Session 2020-21
Month from Jul 20 to Dec 20
Subject Name Introduction to Digital Image and Video Processing
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Bhawna Gupta

Teacher(s)
(Alphabetically)
COURSE OUTCOMES
COGNITIVE LEVELS
Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to:
C330-2.1 Understand the image formation model, digital image display science Understanding [C2]
and storage formats.
C330-2.2 Apply and analyse image transformations for the processing in Analysing [C4]
different domains.
C330-2.3 Apply image enhancement or image restoration to improve or restore Analysing [C4]
the quality of the image for various applications such as bio-medical
image processing.
C330-2.4 Analyse video and apply processing on Videos for enhancement and Analysing [C4]
restoration.
C330-2.5 Apply compression algorithms and analyse the effect of compression Analysing [C4]
on various parameters of image and video.
Module No. title of the Module Topics in the module No. of Lectures
for the module
1. Human visual system and Image sensing and acquisition visual 3
Image perception perception, Noise in images,
2. Image digitization, Display Image sampling and quantization, Pixel 3
and Storage connectivity
3. Image Transforms Unitary transforms, 2D DFT, DCT, KL 5

and Harr transform.
4. Image analysis Edge and line detection, Hough transform, 7

segmentation, feature extraction,
classification image texture analysis, Color
models and color image processing.
5. Image Enhancement Gray level transformation, histogram 7

processing, Smoothing and sharpening
spatial Filters, Smoothing and sharpening
frequency domain filters.
JIIT , Noida
6. Image Restoration Linear degradation model, inverse and 5
Wiener filtering.
7. Video Display and Storage Principle of color video camera, video 3

camera, digital video, Sampling of video
Signals, Video Frame classifications, I, P
and B frames, Digital Video formats
8. Video Processing Introduction to Video analysis, 5
enhancement and restoration.
9. Image and Video Lossless and Lossy compression standards, 4
Compression Image/Video Quality parameters
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Attendance, Performance. Assignment/Quiz)
Total 100
1. R.C. GONZALEZ & R.E. WOODS: Digital Image Processing, 3rd ed. Pearson Education Ltd,
2008.
2. W.K. PRATT: Digital image processing: PIKS scientific inside, John Wiley, 2007.
3. A. K. JAIN: Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, Information and System Sciences
Series, Prentice Hall, 1989.
4. A. M. TEKALP: Digital Video Processing, Signal Processing Series, Prentice Hall, 1995.
5. J.W. WOODS: Multidimensional Signal, Image and Video Processing and Coding, 2nd ed.
Academic Press, 2012.
JIIT , Noida
Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 17B1NEC735 Semester Even Semester 5th Session 2020-21
Month from Jan 21 to July 21
Subject Name Information Theory and Applications
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Alok Joshi

(Names)
Teacher(s)
Dr. Alok Joshi
(Alphabetically)

C430-5.1 Understand the concept of probability, its relation with information, Understanding Level (C2)
entropy, and their application in communication systems.
C430-5.2 Identify theoretical and practical requirements for implementing and Analysing Level (C4)
designing compression algorithms.
C430-5.3 Analyze the relationship between bandwidth and capacity of Analysing Level (C4)
communication channels and its importance in real life communication
systems.
C430-5.4 Analyze the need for channel coding in digital communication systems. Analysing Level (C4)
C430-5.5 Generate error correcting codes for error detection and correction. Analysing Level (C4)
for the module
1. Review of Basic Probability Probability spaces. Random variables. 3

Distributions and densities. Functions of
random variables. Statistical Averages.
Inequalities of Markov and Chebyshev. Weak
law of large numbers.
2. Information Measure Discrete entropy. Joint and conditional 5
entropies. Entropy in the continuous case.
Maximization of continuous entropy. Entropy
of a bandlimited white Gaussian process.
3. Data Compression Uniquely decipherable and instantaneous 4
codes. Kraft- McMillan inequality. Noiseless
coding theorem. Construction of optimal codes.
4. Data Transmission Discrete memoryless channel. Mutual 5
information and channel capacity. Shannon’s
fundamental theorem and its weak converse.
Capacity of a bandlimited AWGN channel.
Limits to communication – Shannon limit.
5. Error Control Coding Coding for reliable digital transmission and 3
storage. Types of codes. Modulation and
coding. ML decoding. Performance measures.
6. Linear Block Codes Algebra Background, Groups, Fields, Binary 8

field arithmetic. Vector Spaces over GF(2).
Generator and parity check matrices. Syndrome
and error detection. Standard array and
JIIT , Noida
syndrome decoding. Hamming codes.
7. Cyclic Codes Polynomial representation, Systematic 6

encoding. Cyclic encoding, Syndrome
decoding.
8. Convolutional Codes Generator Sequences. Structural properties. 8

Convolutional encoders. Optimal decoding of
convolutional codes- the Viterbi algorithm.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
Total 100
Project Based Learning: Students will learn about the design and implementation of compression
algorithms as well as error-correcting codes with the help of assignments. Using MATLAB the above
concepts can be utilized for project too.
1. R.B. ASH: Information Theory, Dover, 1990.
2. R. BOSE: Information theory, coding and cryptography, Mcgraw Hill 2016.
3. R.W. YEUNG: Information Theory and Network Coding, Springer, 2010.
4. S. LIN & D.J. COSTELLO: Error Control Coding, 2nd Edn, Pearson, 2011.
5. T.K. MOON: Error Correction Coding, Wiley, 2006.
JIIT , Noida
Detailed Syllabus
Lab-wise Breakup
Course Code 18B15EC313 Semester: Odd Semester: Vth Session 2020
Month from: July-December
Course Name Embedded Systems and IOT Lab
Credits 1 Contact Hours 2 per week
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Gaurav Verma

Teacher(s)
Mr. Abhay Kumar
(Alphabetically)

Recall the basic of digital electronics and relate its use in Remembering (Level I)
CO1
microprocessors and microcontrollers.
Relate the architecture of Microprocessors and Microcontrollers and Understanding (Level II)
CO2 its requirements in the area of embedded system and IOT with the help
of algorithm.
Apply the skills and proficiency in the programming to demonstrate Applying (Level III)
CO3 the use of instructions in microprocessors, microcontrollers and IOT
Devices.
Analyze the use of assemblers, cross compilers and real time hardware Analyzing (Level IV)
CO4 to program the microprocessors, microcontrollers, IOT boards and
achieve the real time solutions to the problem.
Module No. Title of the List of Experiments CO

Module
1. MS, RA 8085 To perform addition and subtraction of two 8-bit numbers using 1,2,3
Microprocessors 8085 microprocessor.
2. MS, RA 8085 To perform multiplication & division of two 8-bit numbers 1,2,3
Microprocessors using 8085 microprocessor.
3. 8085 To find out the smallest & largest number in an array of ‘N’ 8- 1,2,3
Microprocessors bit numbers using 8085 microprocessor.
4. RS 8051 Familiarization with 8051 Software Tools through examples of: 2,4
Microcontrollers a. LED Blinking.
b. Varying square wave generation on any pin (with and
without timers).
5. RS 8051 Design a token display system that has a seven segment display 3,4
Microcontrollers and switches. Whenever any switch is pressed the corresponding
number is displayed on the segment.
6. GV 8051 Design a traffic light controller system that has three LEDs – 3,4
Microcontrollers RED, YELLOW, GREEN. The sequence in which the LEDs are
turned on is as follows: RED for 10 count, YELLOW for 5
count, GREEN for 10 count. Interface a light-dependent resistor
(LDR) to select manual and automatic mode using interrupt.
7. GV 8051 Display a) JIIT on LCD b) Sum of two 8 bit numbers on LCD. 3,4
Microcontrollers
8. 8051 Establish the serial communication between PC and 3,4
Microcontrollers microcontroller using RS232 protocol to send and receive the
data.
9. 8051 Interface a DC motor and two IR sensors with the 3,4
Microcontrollers microcontroller. The IR sensors are used to control the direction
of rotation of the motor.
10. ABY, Microcontrollers Design an IOT based system to sense the humidity and 3,4
Alok temperature using DHT11 sensor and send it to cloud.
11. ABY, Microcontrollers Design an IOT based system using microcontroller for 3,4
Alok controlling of home appliances using or ESP8266.
12. Microcontrollers Design a RFID based attendance system using LCD and 3,4
microcontroller.
13. Microcontrollers Controlling of different household devices using an Android 3,4
based application through bluetooth communication and
microcontroller.
14. Microcontrollers Design a DTMF based wireless system using microcontroller for 3,4
controlling of home appliances.
Evaluation Criteria
Attendance 15
Lab Record 15
Virtual Lab Exps. 10
Total 100
Manish k. Patel, “The 8051 Microcontroller Based Embedded Systems”, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill
1.
Education, 2014.
2. Divyah Bala, ESP8266: Step by Step Tutorial for ESP8266 IOT, Arduino Nodemcu Dev Kit, 2018.
Detailed Syllabus
Lab-wise Breakup
(specify Odd/Even) Month from Aug- Dec
Course Name Python for Signal processing and Communication
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) B. Suresh, Neetu Singh

Teacher(s) B. Suresh, Kapil Dev Tyagi, Neetu Singh, Nisha Venkatesh, Parul
(Alphabetically) Arora, Pankaj Kumar Yadav, Vivek Dwivedi
COURSE OUTCOMES:
COGNITIVE LEVELS
At the completion of the course, students will be able to:
Understand applications of Python in signal processing Understanding Level (C2)
C310.1
and communication.
Apply Python for implementing signal operations and Applying Level (C3)
C310.2 transformations on 1-D signals.
Apply Python for implementing signal operations and Applying Level (C3)
C310.3
transformations on images.
Analyze the different blocks of communication systems Analyzing Level (C4)
C310.4
using Python.

No.
1. Introduction to Python Introduction to Python and its various applications. C310.1
2. CT Signals Generating Continuous time signals. C310.1
3. DT Signals Generating Discrete time signals. C310.1
4. Signal Operations Writing codes for generating various signal operations. C310.2
5. DT Convolution To calculate the convolution sum of two discrete time C310.2
signals.
6. CT Convolution To calculate the convolution integral of two continuous - C310.2
time signals.
7. Signal Writing codes to compute DFT (Discrete Fourier C310.2
Transformations Transform) and IDFT (Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform)
for the spectral analysis of signals.
8. Image Data To read, write, display and explore image data. C310.3
9. Image Enhancement To perform image enhancement in spatial domain. C310.3
10. Image Arithmetic To perform arithmetic operations on the images. C310.3
11. Image Geometric To apply geometric transformations to the images. C310.3

Transformations
12. Sampling Analysis of sampling techniques. C310.4
13. Pulse Code To perform pulse code modulation and demodulation. C310.4
Modulation
14. Digital Modulation Analysis of digital modulation techniques. C310.4
Techniques
15. Error Control Coding Analysis of effect of various Data Encoding and Decoding C310.4
Techniques on BER of digital communication systems.
Evaluation Criteria
Attendance 15
Lab Record 15
Total 100
Project based learning: Students in group sizes of two-three will realize any one application of machine
learning using Python programming.
1. J. UNPINGCO: Python for Signal Processing, Springer International Publishing Switzerland, 2014.
M. WICKERT: Signal Processing and Communications: Teaching and Research Using IPython Notebook,
2.
In Proc. of the 14th python in science conf., (scipy. 2015).
B. P. LATHI: Modern Digital and Analog Communication System: Python textbook Companion, Oxford
3. University Press Inc.
Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 15B19EC591 Semester Odd Semester 5th Session 2020-21
Month from Aug 20 to Dec 20
Subject Name Minor Project - 1
Credits 2 Contact Hours NA
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Neetu Singh, Raghvenda Kumar Singh

Teacher(s)
NA
(Alphabetically)

Identifying, planning and initiation of the individual projects Applying Level (C3)
C350.1 in the domain selected by them, respectively.
Analyze the potential research areas in the field of Embedded Analysing Level (C4)
C350.2 Systems, Signal Processing, VLSI, Communication, Artificial
Intelligence and Machine Learning/Deep Learning etc.
Survey the available literature and gain knowledge of the Analysing Level (C4)
C350.3
State-of-Art in the chosen field of study.
Evaluate the existing algorithms of the domain selected and Evaluating Level (C5)
C350.4 improvise the algorithm so that it yields better results than
the existing metrics.
Design and implement a working model, using various Creating Level (C6)
C350.5 hardware components, which works as a prototype to
showcase the idea selected for implementation.
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Semester Evaluation 40
Final Evaluation 40
Report 20
Total 100
JIIT , Noida
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B1NHS434 Semester: Odd Semester V Session 2020 -2021
Course Name Principles of Management
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Deepak Verma ([email protected])

Teacher(s)
Dr. Deepak Verma
(Alphabetically)

Describe the functions, roles and skills of managers and illustrate how
the manager’s job is evolving.
Examine the relevance of the political, legal, ethical, economic and
C303-1.2 Analyzing Level (C4)
cultural environments in global business.
Evaluate approaches to goal setting, planning and organizing in a
C303-1.3 Evaluating Level (C5)
variety of circumstances.
Evaluate contemporary approaches for staffing and leading in an
organization.
Analyze contemporary issues in controlling for measuring
organizational performance.

the module
1. Introduction to Management an Overview: Introduction, Definition of 10
Managers and Management, Role of Management, Functions of Managers,
Management Levels of Management, Management Skills and
Organizational Hierarchy, Social and Ethical
Responsibilities of Management: Arguments for and against
Social Responsibilities of Business, Social Stakeholders,
Measuring Social Responsiveness and Managerial Ethics,
Omnipotent and Symbolic View, Characteristics and
importance of organizational culture, Relevance of political,
legal, economic and Cultural environments to global
business, Structures and techniques organizations use
as they go international.
2. Planning Nature & Purpose, Steps involved in Planning, Objectives, 8
Setting Objectives, Process of Managing by Objectives,
Strategies, Policies & Planning Premises, Competitor
Intelligence, Benchmarking, Forecasting, Decision-Making.
3. Organizing Nature and Purpose, Formal and Informal Organization, 10
Organization Chart, Structure and Process,
Departmentalization by difference strategies, Line and Staff
authority- Benefits and Limitations-De-Centralization and
Delegation of Authority Versus, Staffing, Managerial
Effectiveness.
4. Directing Scope, Human Factors, Creativity and Innovation, 6
Harmonizing Objectives, Leadership, Types of Leadership
Motivation, Hierarchy of Needs, Motivation theories,
Motivational Techniques, Job Enrichment, Communication,
Process of Communication, Barriers and Breakdown,
Effective Communication, Electronic media in
Communication.
5. Controlling System and process of Controlling, Requirements for 8
effective control, The Budget as Control Technique,
Information Technology in Controlling, Productivity,
Problems and Management, Control of Overall
Performance, Direct and Preventive Control, Reporting, The
Global Environment, Globalization and Liberalization,
International Management and Global theory of
Management.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project, Quiz, Attendance)
Total 100
1. Koontz H, Weihrich H. Essentials of management: an international, innovation, and leadership
perspective. McGraw-Hill Education; 10th Edition 2018.
2. Tripathi PC. Principles of management. Tata McGraw-Hill Education; 6th Edition 2017.
3. Principles of Management Text and Cases, Pravin Durai , Pearson ,2015
4. Robbins, S.P. & Decenzo, David A. Fundamentals of Management,7th ed., Pearson, 2010
5. Robbins, S.P. & Coulter, Mary Management; 14 ed.,Pearson , 2009
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B11CI518 Semester - ODD Semester V Session 2020 -2021

Month from July ’20 to Dec ‘20
Course Name Data Structures & Algorithms
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Manju, Ms. Shardha Porwal, Dr Himani Bansal(128)

(Names)
Teacher(s) Avinash, Himani Bansal, Manju, Potukuchi Raghu Vamsi, Shardha
(Alphabetically) Porwal, Sherry Garg

Apply fundamental operations on data structures such as linked-lists,
Apply Level
CO1 trees, binary search trees, AVL trees, heap trees, graphs, and hash-
(Level 3)
tables.
Analyze and compare different sorting algorithms - Merge Sort, Analyze Level
CO2
Quick sort, Shell sort and Bucket Sort. (Level 4)
Identify suitable data structure and develop solution for the given Apply Level
CO3
problem. (Level 3)
Formulate solutions for programming problems or improve existing
Apply Level
CO4 code using algorithms such as, Backtracking, Branch and Bound,
(Level 3)
Greedy algorithm and Dynamic programming.

the module
1. Introduction Introduction to data structures, lists, Doubly linked list, 8
circular linked list, multi linked list, Applications - sparse
matrix representation, Stack and queue (array and linked
list representation)
2. Algorithm Abstract data type, Growth of function, Space-Time 2
Complexity tradeoffs, Complexity analysis of algorithms - Asymptotic
analysis
3. Sorting & Merge Sort, Quick sort, Shell sort, Bucket Sort, Median 6
Searching search, Interpolation search
4. Trees Binary Tree, Binary Search tree, AVL Tree, B Tree, B+ 7

Tree
5. Heaps Introduction to heaps, Binary heap 2

6. Graph Introduction to graphs, Representation – adjacency list, 4
adjacency matrix, Traversal – BFS, DFS, Minimum
spanning tree – Prims and Kruskal’s algorithm,
7. Hashing Introduction to hashing, Collision resolution – open and 3
closed hashing methods
8. Algorithm Introduction to Backtracking Algorithm, Branch and 10
Bound, Greedy algorithm, Problems on Greedy algorithm
(0-1 Knapsack), Dynamic programming, Problems on
Dynamic Programming (Fractional Knapsack, Longest
Common Subsequence)
Graph Algorithms- Shortest path using Dijkstra algorithm
and Floyd–Warshall algorithm
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Attendance = 07, Class Test/Quiz= 07, Internal assessment = 05
Assignments in PBL mode = 06)
Total 100

etc.
Text Books
1. Data Structures and Algorithms in C++, Adam Drozdek, Cengage Learning; 4th edition (2012)
2. Data Structures and Algorithms Made Easy, by Narasimha Karumanchi, CareerMonk Publications; 5th
edition (2016)
3. An Introduction to Data Structures with Application, by Jean-Paul Tremblay , Paul Sorenson, McGraw
Hill Education; 2 edition (2017)
References
Yedidyah Langsam, Moshe J., Augenstein and Aaron M. Tenenbaum: Data Structures Using C and C++,
1.
2nd Edition, PHI, 2001
2. Kurt Mehlhorn: Data Structures and Algorithms 3, Springer, 1984
3. Dinesh P Mehta, Sartaj Sahani: Handbook of Data Structure and Applications, Chapman & Hall, 2004
4. Mark Allen Weiss: Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, 2nd Edition, Pearson
5. Sahni: Data Structures, Algorithms and applications in C++, Universities press, Hyderabad, 2005
Kruse, Tonso, Leung: Data Structures and Program Design in C, 2rd Edition, Pearson Education Asia,
6.
2002
Weiss, Mark Allen: Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C/C++, 2nd Edition, Pearson
7.
Education Asia, 2003
8. Cormen et al: Introduction to Computer Algorithms, 2nd edition , PHI New Delhi 2003
Aho, Hopcraft, Ullman: Data Structures and Algorithms, Pearson Education Asia (Adisson Wesley), New
9.
Delhi, 2001
10. Standish: Data Structures in Java, Pearson Education Asia (Adisson Wesley), New Delhi, 2000
Knuth: The Art of Computer programming Vol I, Vol III, 2nd edition , Pearson Education Asia (Adisson
11.
Wesley), New Delhi, 2002
Department of Computer Science and Engineering & Information Technology,
JIIT, Noida
Detailed Syllabus
Subject 15B17CI578 Semester: ODD/ Semester: 5th Session: 2020-2021

Code Special Sem Month from: Jun’21
Subject Data Structures & Algorithms Lab
Name
Credits 0-0-1 Contact Hours 2
Faculty Coordinator(s) Sarishty Gupta (62) , Akanksha Mehndiratta (128)

(Names)
Teacher(s) Anita Sahoo, Krishna Asawa, Shardha Porwal, Shikha Jain,
(Alphabetically) Sulabh Tyagi, Tribhuwan Tewari
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Demonstrate the use of basic data structure and algorithm design
Understanding
C371.1 such as Linked lists, Stacks, Queues, and others, for various
Level (C2)
applications.
Understanding
C371.2 Interpret the complexity of algorithms for given problems.
Level (C2)
Apply Searching, Sorting, and Trees and use their properties for
C371.3 abstractions and defining modules for implementing Apply Level (C3)
functionalities.
Examine case-study specific application of Heaps, Graphs, and
C371.4 Apply Level (C3)
Hashing methods.
Model algorithmic solutions for small real-life problems using
C371.5 Backtracking, Greedy algorithm and Dynamic programming, Apply Level (C3)
Branch and Bound, and others

No. Module
1. Introduction & Conversion from one number system to CO1, CO2,

Algorithm another; Manipulation with arrays and Understanding Level
Complexity strings, structures; Manipulation with a (C2)
single Linked list of integers; Stacks and
Queues
Finding Complexity: Big O, Big Omega
Cost Analysis
2. Sorting, Doubly Linked List, Circular Linked List CO1
Searching & Multi-Linked Lists; Sorting, Searching, Understanding
Trees Application based. Level(C2)
Binary Tree, Binary Search Trees, CO3
AVL Tree, Case-study: Priority Queue Apply Level (C3)
with Binary Trees, B Trees
3. Heaps, Graph Heaps, Directed and undirected graphs, CO4
weighted graphs, etc. Apply Level (C3)
4. Hashing & Hashing, Backtracking, Branch and CO5
other Bound, Greedy Algorithms, Dynamic Apply Level (C3)
Algorithms Programming.
Evaluation Criteria
Lab Test 1 20
Lab Test 2 20
Quiz 1 15
Quiz 2 15
Day-to-DayAssignments 15
Attendance 15
Total 100
Text Books
1 Data Structures and Algorithms in C++, Adam Drozdek, Cengage Learning; 4th edition
(2012)
2 Data Structures and Algorithms Made Easy, by Narasimha Karumanchi, CareerMonk
Publications; 5th edition (2016)
3 An Introduction to Data Structures with Application, by Jean-Paul Tremblay , Paul
Sorenson, McGraw Hill Education; 2 edition (2017)
References
4 YedidyahLangsam, Moshe J., Augenstein and Aaron M. Tenenbaum: Data Structures
Using C and C++, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2001
5 Kurt Mehlhorn: Data Structures and Algorithms 3, Springer, 1984
6 Dinesh P Mehta, Sartaj Sahani: Handbook of Data Structure and Applications, Chapman &
Hall, 2004
7 Mark Allen Weiss: Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, 2nd Edition, Pearson
8 Sahni: Data Structures, Algorithms and applications in C++, Universities press, Hyderabad,
2005
9 Kruse, Tonso, Leung: Data Structures and Program Design in C, 2rd Edition, Pearson
10 Weiss, Mark Allen: Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C/C++, 2nd Edition,
Pearson
11 Cormen et al: Introduction to Computer Algorithms, 2nd edition , PHI New Delhi 2003
12 Aho, Hopcraft, Ullman: Data Structures and Algorithms, Pearson Education Asia (Adisson
Wesley), New Delhi, 2001
13 Standish: Data Structures in Java, Pearson Education Asia (Adisson Wesley), New Delhi,
2000
14 Knuth: The Art of Computer programming Vol I, Vol III, 2nd edition ,Pearson Education
Asia (Adisson Wesley), New Delhi, 2002
15 Heileman: Data Structures, Algorithms and Object Oriented Programming, Tata Mc-Graw
Hill, New Delhi, 2002
16 Sorenson and Tremblay: An Introduction to Data Structures with Algorithms, 2nd Edition,
Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2003
Detailed Syllabus
.
Course Code 16B1NHS433 Semester: Odd Semester: 5th Sem Session 2020-2021
Month from August to Dec 2020
Course Name Financial Management
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Mukta Mani (Sec-62)

Dr. SakshiVarshney (Sec-128)
Teacher(s) Dr. Mukta Mani (Sec-62)
(Alphabetically) Dr. SakshiVarshney (Sec-128)
Dr. ShirinAlavi (Sec-62)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Analyze
C303-3.1 Analyze the time value of money in taking investment decisions.
(Level 4)
Contrast the various forms of business organizations and evaluate their Evaluate
C303-3.2
financialperformance. (Level5)
Evaluate
C303-3.3 Evaluate investment projects using capital budgeting techniques
(Level5)
Apply
C303-3.4 Apply the concept of cost of capital into evaluation of investment projects
(Level 3)
Evaluate the leverage capacity of a business and its application in selection of long Evaluate
C303-3.5 term sources of finance. (Level5)
Understand the practical considerations for managing working capital requirement Understand
C303-3.6
in a firm. (Level 2)
Mod Title of the Module Topics in the Module No. of

ule Lectures
No. for the
module
1. Introduction Basic financial concepts-Meaning of Accounting, Accounting 4
Concepts and Conventions, Introduction to Double Entry system
and Accounting equation, Definitionand Objectives of Financial
management, Finance functions and Role of Finance manager
2. Time value of Money Compounding, Discounting, Annuity, Perpetuity, Loan 6
Amortization
3. Analysis of Financial Understanding of Balance Sheet and Income Statements, 7
Statements Ratio Analysis, Interpretation, Importance and limitations
4. Capital Nature of Capital Budgeting, Evaluation Techniques: Discounting 5
Budgeting: (NPV, IRR etc.) and Non-discounting
Principle Techniques (payback, ARR etc)
Techniques
5. Long Term Sources of Definition, types, advantages and disadvantages 3
Finance
6. Concept and Definition, measurement of specific costs, computation of 4
measurement Overall Cost of Capital,
of cost of capital
7. Cash Flows for Identification and determination of relevant cash flows 5
Capital
Budgeting
8. Leverages and Break Even Analysis, Operating, Financial and combined leverage, 5
Capital structure Capital structure EBIT- EPS analysis, Concept
decision and ofworkingcapitalmanagement,PracticalConsiderations
Working Capital in Working capital management
Management
9. Project presentations 3
Total 42
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
End Term 35
TA 25 (Project, Class Participation)
Total 100
Khan, M.Y. and Jain, P.K., Financial Management: Text, Problems and Cases, 5th ed, Tata McGraw Hill,
1. 2007.
2. Chandra, P., Financial Management Theory and Practice, 6th ed., Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.
3. Pandey, I.M., Financial management, 9th ed, Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd, 2006
Van Horne, J.C. and Wachowicz, J.M., Fundamentals of Financial Management, 11th ed, Pearson
4. Education, 2001
5. Kishore, R.M., Financial Management, 6th ed, Taxmann, 2007.
Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 16B1NHS435 Semester : ODD Semester: V Session: 2020-21

Month: August to December
Subject Name SOCIOLOGY OF MEDIA
Credits 3 (2-1-0) Contact Hours 42
Faculty Coordinator(s) Prof. Alka Sharma

(Names)
Teacher(s) Prof. Alka Sharma
(Alphabetically)

Demonstrate a basic understanding of different concepts used in the Understanding(C 2)
C304-1.1 systematic study of Sociology of Media
Examine various sociological theoretical orientation towards media and Analyzing(C 4)
C304-1.2 society.
Analyze the key issues related to the processes of Production of Media, Analyzing(C 4)
C304-1.3 Popular Culture and consumer culture.
Critically evaluate the major methods of Cultural Consumption ,Social Class Evaluating(C 5)
C304-1.4 & the process of construction of subjectivities and audience reception in new
Media
Create positive and critical attitude towards the use of new media and Creating(C 6)
C304-1.5 understanding of threats of Digital Age

the module
1. Introduction Introduction to the Course 1
2. Concepts and • Different concepts related to Sociology of media 8

Theoretical • Functionalist Approach to the Sociology of Media
Orientation of • Critical Approach to the Sociology of Media
Sociology of Media • Symbolic Interactionist Approach to the Sociology
of Media
• Different theories of Media
3. Concept of Popular • What is popular culture? 8

Culture and its • Difference between ‘pop’ culture and ‘high’ culture
critical analysis • What distinguishes popular culture from other
kinds of culture (art, folk culture)? Is there a
distinction at all anymore?
• Visualizing Society through ‘pop’ culture/ media
• Risks and rituals that come with Popular Culture
4. • Difference between tradition media and new media 5

• New media as technology
New media • New Information Technology (brief history in case
of India)
5. • Mediatization of Society 5
• Free-speech Media
Media & State
6. • Social Actors as Audience/ Audience as market– 9
Theory
Consumption of • Media effects: Media and representations (gender,
Media and Media ethnic)- the under-representation and
reception misrepresentation of subordinate groups.
• Media and the construction of reality: media logic
and cultivation analysis theory
• Information Society vs Informed Society
• Cultural Consumption and Social Class
7. • Rise of Network Society- Manuel Castells 6

Media in Global • Global Media: impact of market & state
Age • Global Perspectives: The world on our doorstep
• Marketing and aesthetics in everyday life

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project, Presentation and attendance)
Total 100
Ritzer, George, and Steven Miles. "The changing nature of consumption and the intensification of
1.
McDonaldization in the digital age." Journal of Consumer Culture 19, no. 1, pp 3-20, 2019.
Turow, Joseph. Media today: An introduction to mass communication. Taylor & Francis, 2011.
2.
Curran, James. Media and society. Bloomsbury Publishing, 2010.

3.
JA Fisher ‘High Art v/s Low Art, in Berys Nigel Gaut & Dominic Lopes (eds.), The Routledge
4
Companion to Aesthetics. Routledge 2001
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Course Code 16B1NHS532 Semester: ODD Semester: 5th
(specify Odd/Even) Month from:
Aug to Dec2020
Course Name Planning and Economic Development

Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Akarsh Arora

(Names)
Teacher(s) 1. Dr. Akarsh Arora ([email protected])
(Alphabetically) 2. Dr. Amandeep Kaur ([email protected])
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Understand the issues and approaches to economic C2
C303-4.1
development.
Evaluate National income accounting, human development C5
C303-4.2
index and sustainable development.
Apply an analytical framework to understand the structural C3
C303-4.3
characteristics of development.
C303-4.4 Analyze the role of Macroeconomic stability & policies and C4
Inflation in the development process.
C303-4.5 Evaluate the importance of federal development and C5
decentralization.

the module
1. Economic Economic growth and development. Indicators of 5
Development and development. Approaches to economic
its Determinants development. Rostows Stages of Growth.
2. National Income National Income Accounting, Green GNP and 5
Accounting Sustainable development
3. Indicators of PQLI, Human Development Index (HDI) and 4
development gender development indices.
4. Demographic Demographic features of Indian population; Rural- 5
Features, Poverty urban migration; Growth of Primary, Secondary and
and Inequality Tertiary Sector.
5. Inflation and Inflation. Business cycle. Multiplier and 6
Business Cycles Accelerator Interaction.
6. Macro-Economic Monetary Policy. Fiscal Policy. Role of Central 6
Stability & Bank & Commercial banks in the development of
Policies the country. Balance of payments; currency
convertibility and Issues in export-import policy.
7. Federal The Federal Set-up - The Financial Issues in a 6
Development Federal Set-up, Principles for Efficient Division of
Financial Resources between Governments.
Financial Federalism under Constitution. Finance
Commissions in India, Terms of References and its
Recommendations
8. Planning and Need for planning, Decentralisation, Rural and 5
Development Urban local bodies.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignment + Quiz)
Total 100

1. Todaro, M.P., Stephen C. Smith, Economic Development, Pearson Education, 2017
2. Thirwal, A.P., Economics of Development, Palgrave, 2011
3. Ahuja, H. L., Development Economics, S Chand publishing, 2016
4. Ray, Debraj, Development Economics, Oxford University Press, 2016

Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 19B12HS311 Semester: ODD Semester V Session 2020-21

Subject Name ENTREPRENEURIAL DEVELOPMENT
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr Badri Bajaj

(Names)
Teacher(s) Dr Badri Bajaj
(Alphabetically)

Understand basic aspects of establishing a business in a competitive
C303-8.1 Understand Level (C2)
environment
C303-8.2 Apply the basic understanding to examine the existing business
Apply Level (C3)
ventures
C303-8.3 Examine various business considerations such as marketing, financial
Analyze Level (C4)
and teaming etc.
C303-8.4 Assessing strategies for planning a business venture Evaluate Level (C5)
Module Subtitle of the Module Topics in the module No. of

No. Lectures for
the module
1. Entrepreneurial perspective Foundation, Nature and development of 6
entrepreneurship, importance of entrepreneurs,
Entrepreneurial Mind, Individual entrepreneur
Types of entrepreneurs
2. Beginning Considerations Creativity and developing business ideas; Legal 10
issues; Creating and starting the venture; Building
a competitive advantage
3. Developing Marketing Plans Developing a powerful Marketing Plan, E- 8
commerce, Integrated Marketing
Communications
4. Developing Financial Plans Sources of Funds, 10
Managing Cash Flow,
Creating a successful Financial Plan
Developing a business plan
5. Leading Considerations Developing Team, Leading the growing 8
company, Resources for growth
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignment, Quiz , Oral Questions)
Total 100
1. Robert D Hisrich, Michael P Peters & Dean A Shepherd, “Entrepreneurship” 10th Edition,
McGraw Hill Education, 2018
2. Norman M. Scarborough and Jeffery R. cornwell, “Essentials of entrepreneurship and small
business management” 8th Edition, Pearson, 2016
3. Rajiv Roy, “Entrepreneurship”, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, 2011
4. Sangeeta Sharma, “Entrepreneurship Development”, 1st Edition, Prentice-Hall India, 2016
JIIT, Noida
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16B1NPH531 Semester : ODD Semester: 5th Session: 2020 -2021
Month from July to December
Course Name Quantum Mechanics for Engineers
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Anuraj Panwar

Teacher(s)
Anuraj Panwar
(Alphabetically)

C301-10.1 Remember basics of Quantum Mechanics and its applications. Remembering (C1)
Explain postulates of quantum mechanics, Dirac notation, Understanding (C2)
C301-10.2
Schrödinger Equation, Perturbation theory and Qubits.
Solve various problems related to different quantum systems and Applying (C3)
C301-10.3
construct quantum circuits using quantum gates.
Analyse the results obtained for various physical systems and to Analyzing (C4)
C301-10.4 establish the advantages of some simple protocols of quantum
information processing.

the module
1. Introduction Wave particle duality, quantum physics (Planck and 8
Einstein’s ideas of quantized light), postulates of quantum
mechanics, time dependent and time independent
Schrodinger equation, operators, probability theory,
expectation values, and uncertainty principle and its
implications, no cloning applications
2. Measurement Matrix and linear algebra, Eigen values and eigenfunctions 10
Theory with Hilbert space, Kets, Bras and Operators, Bras Kets and
Applications Matrix representations, Measurements, Stern Gerlach
Experiment, Observables and Uncertainity Relations, No-
cloning theorem, Pauli Spin Matrices.
3. Potential problems 1-D, 2-D, and 3-D potential problems (including infinite 08
and finite square well). Tunneling, harmonic oscillator,
separation in spherical polar coordinates, hydrogen atom,
etc.),
4. Approximation Time independent perturbation theory for nondegenerate 4
methods and degenerate energy levels.
5. Advanced Kronig Penny model, Basic ideas of quantum computing, 10
Applications Qubit, Gate model of quantum computing : H, CNOT, Pauli
Gates, BB84 protocol, Advantages of quantum computing,
Quantum wire, Quantum dot and realization of CNOT
using Quantum dot.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 [2 Quiz (10 M), Attendance (10 M) and Cass performance (5 M)]
Total 100
1. The new quantum universe by Toney Hey and Patrick Walters, Cambridge University Press.
2. Quantum mechanics a new introduction by Kenichi Konishi and G Paffuti, OUP., 2009
3. Quantum physics by Eyvind H Wichman (Berley Physics course Vol 4) Tata McGraw Hill 2008
4. Elements of quantum computation and quantum communication by A Pathak, CRC Press 2013.
5. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics by David J. Griffiths, Second Edition, Pearson, 2015.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16B1NPH532 Semester: ODD Semester: 5th Session: 2020 -2021
Course Name Materials Science
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Manoj Kumar and Sandeep Chhoker

Teacher(s)
Manoj Kumar and Sandeep Chhoker
(Alphabetically)

Recall variety of engineering materials for their applications in Remembering (C1)
C301-11.1
contemporary devices
Explain dielectric, optical, magnetic, superconducting, polymer and Understanding (C2)
C301-11.2
thermoelectric properties
Apply properties of dielectric, optical, magnetic, superconducting, Applying (C3)
C301-11.3
polymer and thermoelectric materials to solve related problems
Prove and estimate solution of numerical problems using physical Evaluating (C5)
C301-11.5
and mathematical concepts involved with various materials

No. Module Lectures
for the
module
1. Dielectric Materials Polarization mechanism & Dielectric Constant, Behavior of 10
polarization under impulse and frequency switching, Dielectric
loss, Spontaneous polarization, Ferroelectrics, Piezoelectric
effect; Applications of Dielectric Materials
2. Magnetic Materials Concept of magnetism, Classification – dia-, para-, ferro-, 10
antiferro- and ferri-magnetic materials, Their properties and
Applications; Hysteresis; Magnetic Storage and Surfaces.
3. Super conducting Meissner effect, Critical field, type-I and type-II 5

Materials superconductors; Field penetration and London equation; BCS
Theory, High temperature Superconductors and their
Applications
4. Polymers and Various types of Polymers and their applications; Mechanical 6
Ceramics behavior of Polymers, synthesis of polymers; Structure, Types,
Properties and Applications of Ceramics; Mechanical behavior
and Processing of Ceramics.
5. Optical Materials Basic Concepts, Light interactions with solids, Optical properties 6
of nonmetals: refraction, reflection, absorption, Beer-Lambert
law, transmission, Photoconductivity. Drude Model, relation
between refractive index and relative dielectric constant, Optical
absorption in metals, insulators and semiconductors.
Introduction to Photonic band gap (PBG) materials and its
applications
6. Thermoelectric Thermoelectric (TE) effects and coefficients (Seebeck, Peltier, 3
Materials Thompson); TE materials and devices, Heat conduction,
Cooling, Figure of Merit; TE power generation (efficiency),
refrigeration (COP), Examples and applications.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 [2 Quiz (10), Attend. (10) and Class performance (5 )]
Total 100
1. S.O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publishers.
2. B. B. Laud, Laser and Non-linear Optics, John Wiley & Sons

Van Vlack, Elements of Material Science and Engineering, Pearson Education.
3.
4. Srivastava and Srinivasan, Material Science and Engineering,
5 W.D. Callister Jr., Material Science and Engineering: An Introduction, John Wiley.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Name Laser Technology and Applications
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Navneet Kumar Sharma and Anshu Varshney

Teacher(s)
Navneet Kumar Sharma and Anshu Varshney
(Alphabetically)

Define the coherent properties, high brightness of laser, population Remember Level (C1)
C301-12.1
inversion and optical feedback to laser technology
Extend the knowledge of lasers in some applications like LIDAR, Understand Level (C2)
C301-12.2 laser tracking, bar code scanner, lasers in medicine and lasers in
industry
Apply the optical ray transfer matrix to determine the stability of a Apply Level (C3)
C301-12.3
laser resonator
Distinguish the operational principles of CW, Q-switched, mode Analyze Level (C4)
C301-12.4 locked lasers; laser rate equations for three & four level lasers;
different types of laser systems

the module
1. Fundamentals of Laser idea and properties; Monochromaticity, directionality, 12
Lasers brightness, Temporal and spatial Coherence. Interaction of
radiation with matter; Absorption, spontaneous and
stimulated emission of radiation, Rates equations, Einstein's
A and B coefficients. Laser rate equations: Four level and
three level systems. Conditions for producing laser action,
population inversion, saturation intensity, threshold
condition and gain optimization. Experimental techniques
to characterize laser beam.
2. Types of Lasers Pumping processes; optical and electrical pumping. Optical 16
Resonators; The quality factor, transverse and longitudinal
mode selection; Q switching and Mode locking in lasers.
Confocal, planar and spherical resonator systems. Types of
Lasers; Solid state Lasers; Ruby Laser, Nd:YAG laser. Gas
lasers; He-Ne laser, Argon laser, CO 2 , N 2 and Excimer
Laser. Dye (liquid) Laser, Chemical laser (HF),
Semiconductor Lasers; Heterostructure Lasers, Quantum
well Lasers. Free electron laser, X-ray laser and Ultrafast
Laser.
3. Applications of Image processing; Spatial frequency filtering and 12
Lasers Holography, Laser induced fusion; Fusion reactor, creation
of Plasma. Lightwave communications. Use in optical
reader (CD player) and writer. Nonlinear optics; harmonic
generation, self focusing. Lasers in industry; Material
processing, Cutting, welding and whole drilling. Precision
length measurement, velocity measurement, Laser
Tracking, Metrology and LIDAR. Lasers in medicines and
surgery. Lasers in defense, Lasers in space sciences, Lasers
in sensors.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
Total 100
1. Thyagarajan and Ghatak, Lasers Theory and Applications, Macmilan India.
2. W. T. Silfvast, Laser Fundmentals, Cambridge Univ-Press.
3. O. Svelto, Principles of Lasers, Springer.
4. Saleh and Teich, Fundamentals of Photonics, John Wiley & Sons.

Detailed Syllabus
Month from July 20 to December 20
Course Name NUCLEAR SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Manoj Tripathi

Teacher(s)
Manoj Tripathi
(Alphabetically)

Relate terminology and concepts of nuclear science with various Remembering (C1)
C301-14.1
natural phenomenon and engineering applications.
Explain various nuclear phenomenon, nuclear models, mass Understanding (C2)
C301-14.2 spectrometers, nuclear detectors, particle accelerators. and classify
elementary particles.
Solve mathematical problems for various nuclear phenomenon and Applying (C3)
C301-14.3
nuclear devices.
Analyze the results obtained for various physical problems and draw Analyzing (C4)
C301-14.4
inferences from the results.

the module
1. Rutherford scattering and estimation of nuclear size, 07
Constituents of the nucleus and their properties, Nuclear
Spin, Moments and statistics, Magnetic dipole moment,
Nuclear Electric quadruple moment. Nuclear forces, Two body
Constituents and problem - Ground state of deuteron, Central and non-central
their properties, forces, Exchange forces: Meson theory, Yukawa potential,
Nuclear Forces Nucleon-nucleon scattering, Low energy n-p scattering,
Effective range theory, Spin dependence, charge
independence and charge symmetry of nuclear forces,
Isospin formalism.
2. Binding energies of nuclei, Liquid drop model: Semi-
empirical mass formula, Mass parabolas, Prediction of
Nuclear stability, Bohr-Wheeler theory of fission, Shell
Nuclear Models 05
model, Spin-orbit coupling. Magic numbers, Angular
momenta and parities of nuclear ground state, Magnetic
moments and Schmidt lines, Collective model of a nucleus.
3. Alpha decay, Beta decay, Pauli’s Neutrino hypothesis-
Helicity of neutrino, Theory of electron capture, Non-
conservation of parity, Fermi’s theory, Gamma decay:
Nuclear decay and Internal conversion, Multipole transitions in nuclei, Nuclear
08
Nuclear reactions isomerism, Artificial radioactivity, Nuclear reactions and
conservation laws, Q-value equation, Centre of mass frame
in nuclear Physics, Scattering and reaction cross sections,
compound nucleus, Breit-Wigner one level formula
4. Interaction of charge particles with matters: Bohr’s
Interaction of ionization loss formula and estimation of charge, mass and
nuclear radiation energy. Interaction of electromagnetic radiation with 07
with matter matter, Linear absorption coefficient. Nuclear particle
detectors and neutron counters.
5. Different types of reactors, tracer techniques, activation
Accelerator and analysis. Radiation induced effects and their applications:
06
reactor Physics Accelerators: Linear accelerators, Van de Graff generator,
LINAC, Cyclotrons, Synchrotons, Colliders.
6. Cosmic radiation: Discovery of cosmic radiation, its sources
and composition, Latitude effect, altitude effect and east-
west asymmetry, secondary cosmic rays, cosmic ray
Cosmic radiation
shower, variation of cosmic intensity and Van Allen
and Elementary 07
radiation belt. Elementary particles: Classification of
Particles
particles, K-mesons, Hyperons, particles and antiparticles,
fundamental interactions, conservation laws, CPT theorem,
resonance particles and hypernucleus, Quark model.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 [2 Quiz (10 M), Attendance (7 M) and PBL & Cass performance (8 M)]
Total 100
1. K.S. Krane, 1987, Introductory Nuclear Physics, Wiley, New York.
2. I. Kaplan, 1989, Nuclear Physics, 2nd Edition, Narosa, New Delhi.
3. B.L. Cohen, 1971, Concepts of Nuclear Physics, TMH, New Delhi.
4. R.R. Roy and B.P. Nigam, 1983, Nuclear Physics, New Age International, New Delhi.
5. H.A. Enge, 1975, Introduction to Nuclear Physics, Addison Wesle, London.
6. Y.R. Waghmare, 1981, Introductory Nuclear Physics, Oxford-IBH, New Delhi.
7. R.D. Evans, 1955, Atomic Nucleus, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Discrete Mathematics (16B1NMA531)
Course Description
Course Code 16B1NMA531 Semester Odd Semester V Session 2020-21

Course Name Discrete Mathematics
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Anuj Bhardwaj
Teacher(s)
Dr. Anuj Bhardwaj
(Alphabetically)
COURSE OUTCOMES: After the successful completion of this course, the COGNITIVE
student will be able to LEVELS
explain partial order relations, Hasse diagram, lattices and recursive Understanding
C301-1.1
functions. Level (C2)
solve the difference equations using generating function and Z- Applying Level
C301-1.2
transform. (C3)
explain the propositional and predicate calculus to check the Understanding
C301-1.3
validity of arguments. Level (C2)
demonstrate graphs, digraphs, trees and use it to solve the different Applying Level
C301-1.4
problems of graph theory. (C3)
Understanding
C301-1.5 illustrate various algebraic structures and their properties.
Level (C2)
explain the theory of formal languages and solve the related Applying Level
C301-1.6
problems of automata. (C3)
1. Relations and Relations and their composition. Pictorial
Lattices representation, matrix and graphical representations.
5
Equivalence relations and partitions. Partial ordered
relations and Hasse diagram. Lattices.
2. Functions Functions and Recursively defined functions,
generating functions, solution of recurrence relations
8
by generating function. Z transforms, solution of
difference equations by Z transform.
3. Propositional Propositions- simple and compound. Basic logical
Calculus operators. Implication. Truth tables. Tautologies and
4
contradictions. Valid arguments and fallacy.
Propositional functions and quantifiers.
4. Graphs Graphs and related definitions, subgraphs,
isomorphism, paths and connectivity. Eulerian graph
and Konigsberg problem. Hamiltonian graph.
7
Labelled and weighted graphs. Tree Graphs-
Minimum spanning Tree (Prim’s algorithm). Graph
colorings. Four color problem.
5. Directed Graphs Trees, Digraphs and related definitions. Rooted trees.
5
Algebraic expressions and Polish notation. Sequential
representation. Adjacency matrix. Path matrix.
Shortest path. Linked representation of directed
graphs. Binary trees.
6. Algebraic Groups- definitions and examples, order of elements,
Structures subgroup, condition for subgroups. Quotient groups,
7
Lagrange theorem and applications, Rings, integral
domains and Fields- definition and examples.
7. Languages and Strings (words) and languages, grammars, types of
Grammars grammars, Finite state machines, finite state 6
automata, regular languages and regular expressions.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
Total 100

1. Lipschutz, S. and Lipson, M., Discrete Mathematics, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1997.
2. Rosen, K. H., Discrete Mathematics and its Application, 7th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2011.
3. Liu, C. L., Elements of Discrete Mathematics, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.
Kolman, B., Busby, R. C. and Ross, S., Discrete Mathematical Structures, 6th Edition, Prentice
4.
Hall, 2018.
5. Deo, N., Graph Theory, Prentice Hall, 2004.
6. Grimaldi, R.P., Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics, 5th Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.
Matrix Computations (16B1NMA533)
Course Description
Course Code 16B1NMA533 Semester - Odd Semester V Session 2020 -2021

Month from Aug 2020 - Dec 2020
Course Name Matrix Computations
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Amita Bhagat and Dr. Neha Singhal
Teacher(s) Dr. Amita Bhagat, Dr. DCS Bisht, Dr. Neha Singhal, Dr. Pato
(Alphabetically) Kumari
COURSE OUTCOMES After the successful completion of this course, the student COGNITIVE
will be able to LEVELS
explain the basics of matrix algebra and inverse of a matrix by Understanding

C301-3.1
partitioning. level (C2)
Applying Level
C301-3.2 solve the system of linear equations using direct and iterative methods.
(C3)
explain the vector spaces and their dimensions, inner product space, Understanding
C301-3.3
norm of a vector and matrix. level (C2)
apply the Gram-Schmidt process to construct orthonormal basis and Q-R Applying Level
C301-3.4
decomposition of a matrix. (C3)
construct Gershgorin’s circles and solve eigenvalue problem using Applying Level
C301-3.5
Jacobi, Givens, Housholder, power and inverse power methods. (C3)
analyze systems of differential and difference equations arising in Analyzing Level

C301-3.6
dynamical systems using matrix calculus. (C4)

Review of matrices, partitioning, block diagonal 6

Matrix
1. matrix, elementary matrices, Inverse of a matrix by
Algebra
partitioning.
Existence and uniqueness of solution for system of 6
linear equations. Partial pivoting, LU decomposition,
Linear System
2. Crout’s and Doolittle’s methods, Cholesky
of equations
factorization. Gauss Siedel, Gauss Jacobi iterative
methods.
Vector and Vector spaces, Subspaces, dimension and basis, p- 6
3. Inner Product norms of vector, Inner product, Norm using inner
Spaces product and norms of a matrix.
4. Orthogonality Orthogonal and orthonormal sets, Gram-Schmidt 4
process, QR factorization.
Eigen values and Eigenvectors, spectral radius, 12
Eigen value Greshgorin’s theorem, Jacobi method, Givens rotations
5.
Problems method and Householder’s method, Power and Inverse
power methods, Q-R algorithm.
Powers and functions of matrices, application to solve 8
Matrix discrete dynamical systems x(t+1) = Ax(t), x(0) =α and
6.
Calculus a system of differential equations of the form dx/dt =
Ax, x(0) =α.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignments, Quizzes and Tutorial)
Total 100
Recommended Reading material: Author(s), Title, Edition, Publisher, Year of Publication etc. (Text
1. Bronson, R., Matrix Methods an Introduction, Academic Press, 1991.
Golub, G. H., Loan, C. F. V., Matrix Computations, 4th Edition, Johns Hopkins University Press,
2.
2013.
3. Datta, K. B., Matrix and Linear Algebra, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2016.
4. David, W. Lewis., Matrix Theory, World Scientific, 1991.
Basic Numerical Methods (17B1NMA531)
Course Description
Course Code 17B1NMA531 Semester - Odd Semester V Session 2020-21

Course Name Basic Numerical Methods
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Lokendra Kumar and Dr. Pankaj Kumar Srivastava
(Names) Teacher(s) Dr. Lokendra Kumar, Dr. Trapti Neer, Dr. Pankaj Kumar
(Alphabetically) Srivastava, Dr. DCS Bisht
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Understanding
C301-5.1 explain the concepts of approximation and errors in computation.
level (C2)
construct numerical methods for algebraic and transcendental equations Applying
C301-5.2
and their convergence. Level (C3)
C301-5.3 outline the methods of interpolation using finite differences and divided Understanding
difference formulas. level (C2)
C301-5.4 Applying
make use of numerical differentiation and integration.
Level (C3)
C301-5.5 Applying
solve the system of linear equations using direct and iterative methods.
Level (C3)
C301-5.6 Applying
solve ordinary differential equations using different numerical methods.
Level (C3)
the module
1. Approximation Errors, relative error, absolute error, error in series 02
and Errors in approximation.
Computation
2. Algebraic and Bisection Method, Regula- Falsi Method, Secant 07
Transcendental Method, Iterative method, Newton-Raphson Method,
Equations convergence.
3. Interpolation Finite Differences, Relation between difference 08
operators, Newton’s Forward and Backward
Interpolation, Gauss Backward Interpolation,
Bessel’s and Sterling’s central difference operators,
Laplace-Everett’s formula, Newton’s divided
difference formula, Lagrange’s interpolation formula.
4. Numerical Derivatives using Newton’s Forward and Backward 11
Differentiation Interpolation, Bessel’s and Sterling’s central
and Integration difference operators, Maxima and minima of a
tabulated function. Trapezoidal, Simpson’s, Boole’s
and Weddle’s rules, Euler-Maclaurin formula.
5. System of Gauss Elimination method, LU decomposition 05
Linear method, Gauss-Seidel Method.
Equations
6. Numerical Picard’s method, Euler’s method, Modified Euler’s 09
Solution of method, Fourth order Runge-Kutta method, Milne’s
Ordinary method for first order, second order and simultaneous
Differential differential equations, Finite-Difference Method
Equations
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
Total 100
1. C. F. Gerald and P.O. Wheatley, Applied Numerical Analysis, 7th Ed., Pearson Education,
2004.
2. M. K. Jain, S. R. K. Iyengar and R. K. Jain, Numerical Methods for Scientific and
Engineering Computation, 6th Ed., New Age International, New Delhi, 2014.
3. R. S. Gupta, Elements of Numerical Analysis, 2nd Ed., Cambridge University Press, 2015.
4. S.D. Conte and C. deBoor, Elementary Numerical Analysis, An Algorithmic Approach, 3rd Ed.,
McGraw-Hill, New York, 1980.
Statistical Information Theory with Applications (17B1NMA533)
Course Description
Course Code 17B1NMA533 Semester Odd Semester V Session 2020-21

Month from Aug 2020- Dec
2020
Course Name Statistical Information Theory with Applications
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Amit Srivastava
Teacher(s) Dr. Amit Srivastava

(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
explain the notions of information, entropy, relative entropy and Understanding

C301-8.1
mutual information. Level(C2)
Analyzing
C301-8.2 explain fuzzy sets and compare the various measures of discrepancy.
Level (C4)
develop and compare Shannon-Fano and Huffman source codes using Analyzing
C301-8.3
measures of uncertainty. Level (C4)
analyse the notion of distance measure in pattern recognition generated Analyzing

C301-8.4
in Intuitionistic fuzzy environment. Level (C4)
Applying
C301-8.5 apply information theoretic concepts in encryption and decryption.
Level (C3)

the module
1. Information Review of Probability theory, Average information, 10
Theoretic Shannon and Renyi Entropy, Mutual information.
Measures Introduction to concepts of directed divergence,
inaccuracy and information improvement
2. Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Sets. Fuzzy Uncertainty and Fuzzy 10

Measures of Information Measure, Similarity Measures, Fuzzy
Fuzzy Measures of Directed Divergence, Total Ambiguity
Uncertainty. and Information Improvement, R-Norm Fuzzy
Information Measure and its Generalizations.
3. Source Coding Data compression, Kraft-Mcmillan Equality and 10

Compact Codes, Encoding of the source output,
Shannon-Fano coding, Huffman coding, Lempel-Ziv
(LZ) coding, Shannon-Fano-Elias Coding and
Introduction to Arithmetic Coding. rate distortion
theory, Lossy Source coding.
4. Applications of Basic concepts of cryptography and secure data, 12

information Mathematical Overview and Shannon theory of
theory in Cryptography, perfect secrecy and the one time pad,
Cryptography Spurious Keys & Unicity Distance, Classical and
Product Cryptosystems. semantic security and Stream
ciphers, Characteristics for perfect security,
Limitations of perfectly secure encryption, Block and
Stream ciphers, Cipher Modes, Substitution Ciphers,
Mono-alphabetic Substitution and Poly-alphabetic
Substitution, Polygram, Transposition Ciphers, Rail
Fence, Scytale, Book cipher, Vernam cipher,
Vigenere Tabluae, Playfair, Hill Cipher,
Cryptanalysis of Classical Cryptosystems,
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Quiz , Assignments, Tutorials, PBL)
Total 100
1. Bose, R., Information Theory Coding and Cryptography, 3rd Ed, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2016.
2. Jain, K. C., and Srivastava, A., Information Theory & Coding, 3nd Ed, Genius Publications, 2009
3. Stallings, W., Cryptography and Network Security Principles and Practices, Prentice Hall, 2003
4. Cover, T.M. and Thomas, J. A., Elements of Information Theory, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2006.
5. Haykin, S., Communication Systems, John Willey & Sons, Inc, Newyork, 4th Ed, 2006
Behrouz, A. F., Introduction to Cryptography and Network Security, McGraw-Hill International

6.
Edition, 2008
Logical Reasoning and Inequalities (18B12MA312)
Course Description
Course Code 18B12MA312 Semester Odd Semester V Session 2020-21

Course Name Logical Reasoning and Inequalities
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Lakhveer Kaur
(Names) Teacher(s)
Dr. Lakhveer Kaur
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Understanding
C301-9.1 interpret the mathematical foundation of various inequalities.
level(C2)
examine inequalities in the field of information theory and Analyzing
C301-9.2
cryptography. level(C4)
apply the concepts of permutation and combination of multi sets in Applying
C301-9.3
combinatorics. level(C3)
Applying
C301-9.4 apply special numbers in combinatorial and number theoretic problems.
level(C3)
explain the basic concepts of logical reasoning and solve related Understanding
C301-9.5
problems. level(C2)
1. Inequalities Basic Inequalities, Inequalities between means with 12
special reference to AGM inequality, Jensen
inequality for concave and convex functions,
Hermite hadamard inequality, Karamata's
inequality, Popoviciu's inequality, Weighted AGM
inequality and Young’s inequality with applications
in information theory. Bounds on Shannon entropy
function and their generalizations. Perfect secrecy
in cryptography.
2. Basics of Pigeon Hole Principle, Binomial Theorem, 12
Counting Properties of binomial coefficients, combinatorial
identities, Permutation of Multisets, Multinomial
Theorem, Combinations of Multisets, Sterling’s
Formula, Generalization of Binomial coefficients,
Inclusion exclusion principle.
3. Special numbers Catalan numbers, Partition numbers, difference 10
sequences, Sterling Numbers, Perfect numbers.
4. Logical Clocks, calendars, binary logic, seating 8
Reasoning arrangement, blood relations, logical sequence,
assumption, premise, conclusion, linear and matrix
arrangement, Syllogism, Binary Logic, Logical
sequence & Matching, Mathematical Puzzles with
applications.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
Total 100
1. Cerone, P. and Dragomir, S. S., Mathematical Inequalities, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 2011
2. Praveen, R. V., Quantitative Aptitude and Reasoning, Second Edition, Prentice Hall India, 2013.
Rosen & Kenneth H, Discrete Mathematics and its Applications, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi,
3.
2007.
Kolman, B., Busby, R. C. and Ross, S., Discrete Mathematical Structures, 6th Edition, Prentice
4.
Hall, 2018.
5. Simmons, G. J., The Great Book of Puzzles & Teasers, 1999.
Detailed Syllabus
Subject 16B1NHS434 Semester : ODD Semester V Session 2020-21

Code
July - December
Subject Introduction to Contemporary Forms of Literature

Name
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Monali Bhattacharya ( Sector 62)

(Names)
Teacher(s) Dr. Monali Bhattacharya
(Alphabetically)
Course Outcomes:
Course Outcome COGNITIVE
LEVELS
C303- Interpret & relate with the genres, periods, and conventional as well as CL-2
6.1 experimental forms of literature as current ethical, technological and Understand
cultural reflections of society.
C303- Apply literary and linguistic theories on the texts to identify them as CL-3
6.2 cultural constructs inculcating human values in the society. Apply
C303- Analyze social, cultural, moral and linguistic changes in contemporary CL-4
6.3 world through cloze study of select representative texts of different Analyse
cultures thematically and stylistically.
C303- Determine the reciprocal relationship between the individual and culture CL-5
6.4 individually and/or through a research based paper/poster presentation Evaluate
with an aim to analyze social, cultural and moral fibre of youth in
multidisciplinary environment, giving holistic solutions for sustainable
development of society.
C303- Create literary, non-literary write-up with proper applied grammar CL-6
6.5 usage, having moral and cultural significance for today’s world Create
individually and in a team.
.
Module No. Subtitle of the Module Topics in the module No. of Hours
for the
module
1. Introducing Literary  From Formalism to Reader 12
Theories Response Theory: Major Terms &
Concepts
 Narrative Art & Narratology
 Language & Style: An
Introduction
2. Introducing New 6
 New Fiction: Graphic Novels,
Forms & Sub Genres
Cyberpunk
Today: Features &
 Non Fiction: Memoirs &
Portions
JIIT, Noida Page 1

Autobiographies,
Biographies & Personal Narrative
3. Siddhartha- Hermen Hesse (novella) 4

Spiritual Literature
4. Eat, Pray & Love (Travelogue & 4
Travel Literature cinematic adaptation)
5. Written 4
Communication
Diary, Blog, Travelogue
Through Non-Fiction
6. Commonwealth / Post 4
Hayavadana (Short Play)- Girish Karnad
Colonial Literature
7. Brave New World – Aldous Huxley 4
European Literature
(Science Fiction)
8 4
Canadian Literature The Penelopiad- Margaret Atwood
Evaluation Criteria

T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignment, Project, Class Interaction)
Total 100
1. Margaret Atwood, ‘The Penelopiad’, 1st Edition, Canongate Series, Knopf, Canada,
2005.
2. M.H. Abrams, ‘A Glossary of Literary Terms’.7th Edition, Hienle & Hienle: Thomson
Learning, USA, 1999.
3 Mark William Roche, ‘Why Literature matters in the 21st Century’, 1st Edition, Yale
University Press, 2004.
4 Girish Karnad, ‘Hayavadana’, 1st Edition, Oxford University Press, Delhi, 1975 (30th
Impression, 2012).
5 Aldous Huxley, ‘Brave New World’, 1st Edition, Harper Collins, 2004.
6 Hermen Hesse, ‘Siddhartha’, 1st Edition. New Directions, US, 1951.

For online version: https://www.gutenberg.org
7 Elizabeth Gilbert, ‘Eat, Pray & Love. 1st Edition, Penguin,US, 2006.
JIIT, Noida Page 2

Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 17B1NHS531 Semester ODD Semester V Session 2020 -2021

Month from July - Dec
Course Name Technology and Culture
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr Swati Sharma

Teacher(s)
Dr Swati Sharma
(Alphabetically)

C303-5.1 Understand the main theories in cultural management, Applying (C 2)
Appraise technological convergence and cultural divergence, relate the Evaluating(C 5)
C303-5.2
differences to the literature and suggest solutions
Interpret and communicate effectively in physical and virtual teams by Evaluating (C5)
C303-5.3
evaluating appropriate concepts, logic and selecting the apt IT tools.
Evaluation of the theoretical knowledge to adapt to cultural differences Evaluating(C 5)
C303-5.4
in global work environment.

the module
1. Introduction  Genealogy of the concept 7
 The Information Technology Revolution
 The concept of Network societies
2. Dimensions of  Evolution of Culture 12

Culture
 Principal theories of Culture: Kluckholn and
Strodtbeck, Hofstede, Trompenaars and Schwartz
 Cultural Diversity and cross cultural literacy
3. Cross cultural  The Communication Process 7

communication in
 Language and Culture
physical and virtual
teams  Non Verbal Communication
 Barriers to Cross Cultural Understanding
4. Negotiation and  Theories of Negotiation 8

Decision Making
 Negotiation and Intercultural Communication
 Decision making in cross cultural environment
5. Cross Culture and  Leadership and Culture 8

Leadership  Theories of Culture centric leadership and their Global
Relevance
 Developing Competencies for Global citizens
 Women as International Leaders
 Cross Cultural Training
 Ethical Guidelines for Global Citizens

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project and Oral Viva)
Total 100
Cateora, P. R., Meyer, R. B. M. F., Gilly, M. C., & Graham, J. L. (2020). International marketing.
1.
McGraw-Hill Education.
2. Coyle,D., The Culture Code: The Secrets of Highly Successful Groups, Bantam, 2018
Fletcher, R., & Crawford, H. (2013). International marketing: an Asia-Pacific perspective. Pearson Higher
3.
Education AU.
Gerard Bannon, J. (red.). Mattock, Cross-cultural Communication: The Essential Guide to International
4.
Business.2003
Maidenhead.Riding the Waves of Culture: Understanding Cultural Diversity in Business (2012).3rd
5.
edition. McGraw Hill.
6. Madhavan,S., Cross Cultural Management: Concepts and Cases(2nd Ed),Oxfor University Press 2016.
7. Robertson, Ronald. Globalization: Social theory and global culture, London: Sage, 1992.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 20B13HS311 Semester: Odd Semester: V Session: 2020-21

Month: JULY-DECEMBER
Course Name Indian Constitution and Traditional Knowledge
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Chandrima Chaudhuri

(Names)  Dr. Chandrima Chaudhuri
Teacher(s)
(Alphabetically)  Dr. Praveen Sharma
 Dr. Santosh Dev
 Ms. Shikha Kumari
 Dr. Swati Sharma
COGNITIVE
CO COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Code
Demonstrate an understanding about the early Indian traditional
political thought and the current Indian political scenario by Understand(C2)
C305.1 knowing about the structure of government in place
C305.2 Demonstrate an understanding of the role of Indian President,
Prime Minister, Governor, other members of the legislature and Understand (C2)
local governments as representatives of the common masses
C305.3 Analyze the working of Indian federalism with reference to
Analyze(C4)
centre-state relations
C305.4 Analyze the impact of the contemporary challenges such as caste
Analyze(C4)
and gender to the working of Indian democracy

the module
1. The Indian  Historical Background to the Indian 8
Constitution Constitution
 Salient features of the Indian Constitution
 Fundamental Rights (Part III of the Indian
Constitution)
 Fundamental Duties (Part IVA of the
Indian Constitution)
 Directive Principles of the State Policy
(Part IV of the Indian Constitution)
2. Organs of the  The Executive: President, Prime Minister 8

Government and Governor- appointment, powers and
functions
 The Legislature: Parliament and its
components- Lok Sabha and Rajya Sabha
(composition and functions)
 The Judiciary: Supreme Court-composition,
functions, appointment and jurisdiction
3. Nature of  Centre-State Legislative Relations 8

Federalism in  Centre-State Administrative Relations
India
 Centre-State Financial Relations
 Special Provisions of some state and the 5th
and 6th schedule
4. Local Governance 8
in India  Urban local governance: Municipality-
Structure & Functions
 Rural Local governance: Panchayat-
Organization and Powers
 Civil Society: the participation of the
people in local governance
5. Traditional  Kautilya- Theory of state 6

knowledge  Mandala theory
 Saptanga theory
6. Challenges to  Caste as a critical factor in the Indian 4

Indian Constitution
Democracy  Gender as critical to the process of
Constutionalization

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Attendance, Quiz, Project)
Total 100
1. A.A. George, Important Judgements that transformed India, New Delhi: McGraw Hill, 2020
B. Chakraborty, Indian Constitution: Text, Context and Interpretation, New Delhi: Sage
2.
Publications, 2017
3. B.K.Sharma, Introduction to the Constitution of India, New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India, 2002
4. M.Laxmikanth, Indian Polity, 6th edition, Noida: McGraw Hill, 2019
M.P.Singh and R. Saxena, R, Indian Politics: Contemporary Issues and Concerns, New Delhi:
5.
PHI Learning, 2008
6. R. Kangle, Arthashashtra of Kautilya, New Delhi: Motilal Publishers, 1997

Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 15B11EC611 Even-Semester Semester: 6th Session 2020-21

Subject Name Telecommunication Networks
Faculty Teacher(s) 1. Dr. Pankaj Kr. Yadav

(Names) (Alphabetically) 2. Dr. Juhi Gupta
3. Dr. Sajal Agarwal
COURSE OUTCOMES COGNITIVE

LEVELS
C315.1 Understand the basic concepts of Telecommunication network model, Understanding
Traffic Engineering and Switching technologies. (Level II )
C315.2 Understand the concepts of OSI model and analyze the various error Analyzing
and flow control mechanisms introduced by data link layer. (Level IV )
C315.3 Understand the TCP/IP protocol, routing algorithm and apply the Apply (Level
concept of subnetting to allocate and distribute the logical addresses in III)
a network.
C315.4 Understand concept of LAN access protocols, ISDN, B-ISDN and Understanding
ATM, their implementation and performance issues. (Level II)
for the module
1. Telecommunication network Telecommunication network model, Different 2

model networks types
2. Switching technologies Switched Communication Networks, Circuit 12

Switching networks, Time Division Switching-
Time Division Space Switching, Time Division
Time Switching, Time Multiplexed Time
Switching and TSI, Packet Switching
Principles-Datagram and Virtual Circuit
Approach, Message switching. Traffic
engineering.
3 Computer Networks Seven layered OSI model, Functions of 2

different layers, primitives and services.
Physical layers.
JIIT , Noida
4 Detailed working of data link Data link Control, Flow Control, Stop and Wait 6
flow Control, Sliding Window Flow Control,
Error Control, Go-Back-N ARQ, Selective-
Reject ARQ, Performance Analysis, HDLC.
5. Network Layer and Internet Basic Principles of Network layer, IPv4, IPv6, 6
Protocol (IP) IP Addressing, Subnetting, Supernetting,
Routing Schemes-Distance Vector routing,
Link-State routing, Hierarchical routing.
6 Transport and TCP/UDP Basic Principles of Transport Layer and 6

description TCP/UDP description. Congestion control and
Quality of Service (QoS)
7 Local area networks LAN Protocols-ALOHA, CSMA, CSMA-CD, 4

Implementation and performance issues.
8 ISDN, B-ISDN, ATM. Introduction to ISDN, B-ISDN and ATM. 2
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
a) Attendance and Performance = 10
b) Class Test/Quiz = 10
c) Assignment =5
Project based learning: Here, students will learn the basic concepts of circuit switched Telephony and packet
switched data networks (TCP/IP). These concepts are utmost importance for designing, implementing and
testing of telecommunication networks. Students will be will doing assignments on different topics of switching
systems and different TCP/IP layers.
1. W. Stallings, Data & Computer Communication, PHI
2. B. A Forouzan, DATA COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORKING, 4th Edition TMH
3. A.S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, PHI
4. John C. Bellamy, Digital Telephony, 3rd Edition, Wiley.
5. Thiagarajan Viswanathan, Telecommunication Switching Systems and Networks, PHI
JIIT , Noida
Detailed Syllabus
Lab-wise Breakup
Course Code 15B17EC671 Semester VI (Even) Semester 6th Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month from Jan.-June 2021
Course Name TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKS LAB
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Juhi Gupta

Teacher(s) Ajay Kumar, Juhi Gupta, Neetu Singh, Pankaj K. Yadav, Ruby
(Alphabetically) Beniwal, Shradha Saxena

Learn about network simulator, and building/installing NS2 for Level-2
CO375.1
conducting network simulation and summarizing OSI, TCP & UDP (Understanding)
Set up and anlaysis of the wired and LAN networks and understanding Level- 4
CO375.2
UDP/TCP agents with CBR/FTP traffic source respectively (Analyzing)
To create and analyze the mobile ad-hoc network and heterogenous Level-4
CO375.3
networks and routing algorithm. (Analyzing)
To label and explain data trace file (.tr) of Wired, Wireless and LAN
Level-5
CO375.4 Networks and evaluating throughput in Wired networks (with and
(Evaluating)
without errors).
Module No. Title of the List of Experiments CO

Module
1. Introduction to 1. (a) To learn about network simulator, and use NS2 for CO1
NS2 and Linux conducting network simulation including LINUX
commands.
(b) To learn installing NS2 in Fedora.
2. OSI Model 2. (a) Introduction to OSI, TCP & UDP. CO2
(b) To set up a network with two nodes; link them with
duplex link, 10ms propagation delay, 1Mbps rate and
DropTail procedure. Use Agent UDP with CBR
traffic source.
3. To set up a network with two nodes; link them with
duplex link, 10ms propagation delay, 1Mbps rate and
DropTail procedure. Use FTP over Agent TCP.
3. Ethernet 4. To implement wired LAN connection in NS2 CO2

4. Mobile Networks 5. To create a mobile ad-hoc network with 3 nodes in CO3
500*400 topography with following initial positions
and movements:
Node 0 (5, 5) Node 1 (490,285) Node 2 (150,240)
At t = 10, 0 moves towards (250,250) at 3m/sec.
At t =15, 10 moves towards (45,285) at 5m/sec.
At t =110, 100 moves towards (480,300) at 5m/sec.
5. Wired-cum- 6. To create a Heterogeneous Network (wired cum CO3
Wireless Networks wireless network).
6. Interpretation of 7. To interpret data trace file (.tr) of Wired, Wireless and CO4
Trace Files LAN Networks.
7. Throughput 8. Throughput calculation for TCP or UDP in Wired CO4
Calculation and network.
Error Analysis 9. To create a network with 4 nodes 0-2, 1-2, 2-3 with
TCP from 0-3 and UDP from 1-3. Apply an error model
on link 2-3 with error rate 0.2 and uniform distribution.
Apply queue monitor on 2-3 link and interpret any five
lines of qm.out file.
10. To create a network with 5 nodes, and apply uniform,
exponential and constant error model with error rate 1%
on 3 different links.
Project-Based Learning: NS2 provides an interactive and graphical platform for the simulation of wired-cum-wireless
networks. The TCL programming to generate any telecommunication networks is taught to the students, allowing further to
analyze the performance of the network in the presence and absence of any error due to the channel fading or interference.
Evaluation Criteria
Mid-Sem Viva 20
Final Viva 20
Day-to-Day 60
Total 100
The ns Manual (formerly ns Notes and Documentation),
1. http://www.isi.edu/nsnam/ns/ns-documentation.html
2. W. Stallings, Data & Computer Communication, PHI
3. B. A Forouzan, DATA COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORKING, 4th Edition TMH
4. A.S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, PHI
Detailed Syllabus
Subject 18B11EC315 Semester Semester 6 Session 2020-21
Code (Even) Month from Jan to May
Subject VLSI Design

Name
Credits 4 Contact 4
Hours
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Satyendra Kumar, Dr. Garima Kapur

(Names)
Teacher(s) Dr. Kirmender Singh, Mr. Vinay A. Tikkiwal
(Alphabetically)
Course Objectives: This course aims to convey knowledge of basic concepts of circuit design using
CMOS with emphasis on the design, optimization and layout. Special attention will be devoted to the
most important challenges facing digital circuit designers today and in the coming decade, being the
impact of scaling, deep submicron effects and timing.
S. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive Levels/

Blooms Taxonomy
CO1 Understand VLSI design flow, VLSI design styles, digital Understanding
systems modeling using Verilog-HDL (Level II)
CO2 Demonstrate the operation of MOSFET, understanding Analyzing

technology scaling and its effects
(Level IV)
CO3 Develop the concepts of static and dynamic characteristic of Analyzing
MOS inverters, combinational and sequential circuits
(Level IV)
CO4 Understand the dynamic logic circuits, stick diagram, layout Analyzing
and working principle of different types of semiconductor
memories (Level IV)
Module No. Subtitle of the Module Topics No. of

Lectures
1. Introduction to VLSI Overview of VLSI design 3

methodologies, VLSI design flow,
Design hierarchy, VLSI design styles.
2. MOS Transistor Theory MOS structure and operation, 9

MOSFET I-V characteristics, Scaling
and small-geometry effects, MOSFET
capacitances, MOSFET models for
circuit simulation
3. MOS Inverters Static and switching characteristics, 9

Delay-time definitions, calculation of
delay times, Inverter design with
delay constraints, Static and switching
power dissipation of CMOS inverter
4. MOS Logic Circuits CMOS logic circuits, Complex logic 13

circuits, Pass transistor logic, CMOS
transmission gates, Sequential logic
circuits, Dynamic logic circuits, Stick
diagram, Layout, Layout design rules
5. Semiconductor Memories Working of Dynamic and Static 4

Random Access Memory (DRAM,
SRAM)
6. System Design using HDL Language fundamentals, Different 4

modeling techniques using Verilog-
HDL

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
PBL Component: Knowledge of VLSI Design industry, Basic of CMOS technology, CMOS circuits, power
and delay calculations, CMOS technology layout and design rules, designs of memory and HDL language, all
these topics develop designing and analysis ability in students.
Recommended Reading (Books/Journals/Reports/Websites etc.: Author(s), Title, Edition,

Publisher, Year of Publication etc. in IEEE format)
1. Sung-Mo Kang, ; Yusuf Leblebici ; Chulwoo Kim, “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits:
Analysis and Design”, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Higher Education, Indian Edition,2019.
2. J. M. Rabaey, A. Chandrakasan, B. Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design

Perspective”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education Inc., 2016.
3. Neil Weste and David Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems
Perspective”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education India, 2015.
4. M.Morris Mano, Michael D.Ciletti, “Digital Design: With an Introduction to the Verilog
HDL,VHDL, and System Verilog”, 6th Edition, Pearson , 2018.
Detailed Syllabus
Lab Breakup
Semester VI Session 2020-2021
Course Code 18B15EC315 Semester Even
Month: June
Course Name VLSI Design Lab-II
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Satyendra Kumar, Dr. Shruti Kalra

(Names)
Teacher(s) Atul Srivastava, Priyanka Kwatra, Satyendra Kumar, Saurabh Chaturvedi,
(Alphabetically)
Shamim Akhter, Shruti Kalra
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Relate the concepts of basic electronics circuits and recall the
C374.1 Remembering (Level I)
use/working of circuit simulation tools.
Understand and explain the current-voltage characteristics of NMOS Understanding (Level
C374.2
and PMOS transistors and extraction of MOSFET parameters II)
Apply the MOSFET theory in MOS-based circuits, e.g. MOS
C374.3 Applying (Level III)
inverters, combinational and sequential MOS logic circuits.
Analyze the static and switching characteristics of MOS inverters and
examine the delay times Analyze and simulate the schematic and
C374.4 Analyzing (Level IV)
layout of CMOS Combinational and sequential logic circuits and
examine their responses.
Exp Title of the Module Description CO

No.
Introduction to CAD/EDA tool Introduction to Tanner tools: T-Spice, S-Edit and L-

1 C374.1
Edit.
To study the I-V characteristics of NMOS and PMOS

2 MOS Transistors C374.2
transistors.
Layout design and simulation of NMOS and PMOS
3 MOS Layout C374.4
transistors.
Experiments related to CMOS inverter:
-Simulation of CMOS inverter with arbitrary value of
W/L
-Analysis of VTC
4 MOS Inverter
-Observe the effect on VTC by changing the W/L of C374.3
NMOS and PMOS transistors
-Observe the effect on VTC by changing the supply
voltage
MOS Inverter (Transient To analyze and calculate the propagation delay, rise
5
Characteristics) time and fall time of a CMOS inverter. C374.4
Simulate the logic gates and verify the truth tables:
MOS combinational logic
6 Two-input NAND, two-input NOR
circuits C374.3
Due to Corona Virus pandemic, the number of experiments has been reduced to 6 from 10.
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Sem Viva 20
End Sem Viva 20
D2D 60
Total 100
Project Based Learning: Students will learn EDA/CAD tools, MOS/CMOS logic layout design, which is the
utmost requirement to design a VLSI chip. Therefore, students with the knowledge of CMOS combinational
logics, can design and analyze VLSI system/sub-system based projects.
Recommended Reading material: (Books/Journals/Reports/Websites etc.: Author(s), Title, Edition, Publisher,

Year of Publication etc. in IEEE format)
1. S -M Kang and Y. Leblebici, "CMOS digital integrated circuits: Analysis and design," 3rd
edition, TMH, 2003 TMcGraw-Hill, 2003.
2. N. H. E. Weste and D. M. Harris, "CMOS VLSI design: A circuits and systems perspective,"
3rd edition, Addison-Wesley, 2005.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B11EC613 Semester: Even Semester: 6th Session: 2020-21

Month from: Jan-Jun
Course Name Control Systems
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Ruby Beniwal, Mr. Varun Goel

Teacher(s)
(Alphabetically)

Classify the open loop and closed loop control systems and Applying (Level III)
CO1 construct mathematical model for physical systems.
Solve complex systems through block diagram reduction Applying (Level III)
CO2 method and signal flow graph technique.
Determine transient response and steady state response of the Evaluating (Level V)
CO3 systems using standard test signals.
Analyze the stability of the system and select suitable Analyzing (Level IV)
CO4 controllers and compensators for linear time invariant system.
Apply time domain and frequency domain techniques to Applying (Level III)
CO5 identify the stability of control systems.
Solve continuous time and discrete time systems using state Applying (Level III)
CO6 variable approach.
Module Title of the Module Topics in the Module No. of

No. Lectures
for the
module
1. Introduction to Development of control systems, non feedback and 3

Control System feedback systems, negative feedback a means of
automatic regulation, basic classification of control
systems
2. Modelling and Block diagram simplification of continuous-time systems, 8
Mathematical Classification of system models, input – output description
Representation of of systems, signal flow graph representation
Systems
3. Time Domain Time domain response, steady state error and error 7
Analysis and coefficients, design considerations for second order
Design systems, time domain response considerations for higher
order systems. PID Controller
4. Stability Analysis Basic stability concept of linear systems, absolute stability 5
for continuous- criteria for continuous-time systems, relative stability
time systems Concepts
5. Root Locus Fundamentals of Root Locus, construction of root loci, 6

Method and root contour diagram
Design in Time
Domain
6. Frequency Bodes plot and Nyquist plot , Gain Margin & Phase 7
Response Analysis Margin, stability analysis
and Design
7. State Variable State variable representation of continuous-time 6
Approach to Time systems; System Response and State Transition Matrix
Domain Analysis (STM); Applications of STM.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Attendance : 5 Marks, Quiz:10 Marks, Assignment: 10 Marks)
Total 100
Project Based Learning: Students will design simplify the continuous time systems. By determining
time response of continuous time systems, application ability will be enhanced in students.
Understanding of stability concept for continuous time systems, System Response and State Transition
Matrix (STM) with applications of STM, provide basic concept of designing of control systems.
I. J Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control Systems Engineering, Fifth edition, New age International, 5th
1. Edition, 2009.
2. Normal S. Nise,, Control Systems Engineering, 7th Edition, John Wiley,2014
3. K.Ogata, Modern Control Engineering, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2010

Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 15B19EC691 Semester Even Semester 6th Session 2020-21
Month from January 21 to June 21
Subject Name Minor Project - 2
Credits 2 Contact Hours NA
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Neetu Singh, Raghvenda Kumar Singh,

Teacher(s)
(Alphabetically) NA

Identifying, planning and initiation of the individual projects
in the domain selected by them, respectively.
Analyze the potential research areas in the field of Embedded
C351.2 Systems, Signal Processing, VLSI, Communication, Artificial Analyzing Level (C4)
Intelligence and Machine Learning/Deep Learning etc.
Survey the available literature and gain knowledge of the
State-of-Art in the chosen field of study.
Evaluate the existing algorithms of the domain selected and
C351.4 improvise the algorithm so that it yields better results than Evaluating Level (C5)
the existing metrics.
Design and implement a working model, using various
C351.5 hardware components, which works as a prototype to Creating Level (C6)
showcase the idea selected for implementation.
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Semester Evaluation 40
Final Evaluation 40
Report 20
Total 100
JIIT, Noida
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16 B19EC691 Semester- Even Semester -6 / Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month from Jan to June
Course Name Renewable Energy
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Shivaji Tyagi

Teacher(s)
(Alphabetically) Shivaji Tyagi

Explain the need of renewable sources of energy, impact of renewable
energy on environment, challenges in the electric grid, Smart Grid.
Analyze basics of Solar radiation and Solar photovoltaics, Balance of

PV systems
Analyze wind energy resource and designing of Wind Energy

Generators
Illustrate different biomass energy resources, and extraction of biomass

energy

the module
Overview of energy use and related issues, major energy

1. Introduction options, issues of supply and demand, energy conversions, 4
global climate change issues, effects on ecology and
biodiversity, status of renewable energy in India.
Fundamentals of Solar radiation, Solar Resource

2. Solar Energy Assessment, Solar Photovoltaics, Balance of PV Systems, 10
and Solar Thermal.
Wind resource, Basics of aerodynamics, Maximum power

extraction from wind resource fundamental power
3. Wind Energy 8
equations, Basic design concepts of Wind Energy
Generators
Biomass resource, extracting biomass energy, landfill gas,

4. Biomass Energy 6
waste to energy, energy balances and economics.
Electric Grid Basic operations, performance related issues, new 2
5.
developments and challenges in the electricgrid.

Project Based Learning: Students will be asked to do the analysis and designing of the solar cell for high
efficiency using industry standard simulation tools and the development of the complete system.
Evaluation Criteria
Components MaximumMarks
Mid-Term 30
EndSemesterExamination 40
TA 30
Total 100
Solanki, C.S., Solar Photovoltaics: Fundamental, technologies and applications, 3rd ed., Delhi: Prentice
1.
Hall of India, 2015
2. Momoh, J., Smart Grid: Fundamentals of Design and Analysis, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2012.
3. Ahmed S., Wind Energy: Theory and Practice, 3rd ed., Delhi: Prentice Hall of India, 2016
4. Earnest J., Wind Power Technology, 2nd ed., Delhi: Prentice Hall of India, 2015
Kothari, D.P., Singal, K.C. and Ranjan, R., Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies, 2nd
5.
ed., Delhi: Prentice Hall of India, 2016.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 17B1NEC734 Semester EVEN Semester VI Session 2020 -2021

Month from Jan to June
Course Name RF and Microwave Engineering
Credits 3 Contact Hours 3L
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Monika

Teacher(s)
Monika, Prof. Shweta Srivastava
(Alphabetically)

C332-3.1 Explain the concepts of microwave circuits and scattering parameters. Understanding (C2)
Evaluate the performance of several waveguide components and
C332-3.2 determine their responses and applications. Evaluating (C5)
Analyze the behaviour of microwave sources based on solid state

C332-3.3 devices and tubes at microwave frequencies. Analyzing (C4)
Determine mearurent parameters of microwave components and

C332-3.4 Applying (C3)
understand the ISM applications of Microwave Energy.

the module
1. Introduction to RF History of Microwaves, applications of Microwaves, 2
and Microwave Maxwell’s Equations.
Engineering
2. Microwave Review of Transmission lines, Line Equations. Microwave 3
Transmission Lines Integrated Lines: Microstrip line, Strip line, CPW line.
3. Impedance λ/4 Transformer, Tapered Lines :Exponential 3

matching
4. Scattering S-parameters: definition, properties, 2-port, 3-port and 4- 4
Parameters port.
5. Microwave H-plane, E-plane and Magic Tee, Isolator, Circulator, 10
Components Directional Coupler, Cavity Resonators, Q of Cavity
Resonator, Rectangular waveguide cavities.
6. Microwave Devices Microwave semiconductor devices, Schottky diode, Gunn 7
and Sources diode, Microwave Tubes.
7. Microwave Impedance and Power Measurement Vector Network 4
Measurements Analyzer, Spectrum analyzer.
8. RF Filters Classification of filters, Filter Design by Insertion loss 3
method
9. Microwave Industrial, Scientific and Medical applications of 4
Propagation and Microwave Energy, Biological effects of microwave
Applications energy.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 20
PBL 05
Total 100
Project Based Learning:
Microwave Engineering is a fundamental course in Electronics and Communication Engineering. In this course,
a brief introduction about basics of RF and Microwave Engineering is presented, which can be utilized to impart
knowledge to design various microwave circuits at high frequencies. The project based exercises using RF
basics can be used for filter designing.
1. D.M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering (2nd Ed.), John Wiley, 1998.
2. S.Y. Liao, Microwave Devices and Circuits (3rd Ed.), Pearson, 2003.
3. Peter A. Rizzi, Microwave Engineering, Pearson, 1998.
B. R. Vishvakarma , R. U. Khan and M.K. Meshram , Microwave Circuit Theory and Applications, Axioe
4.
Books, 2012.
Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code Semester EVEN Semester-6 Session 2020-21
17B1NEC741
Month Jan to May
Subject Name
Digital Hardware Design
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Shamim Akhter

(Names)
Teacher(s) Ms. Priyanka Kwatra, Dr. Shamim Akhter
(Alphabetically)
Course Outcomes Cognitive Levels

C332-1.1 Design synchronous circuits using Finite State Machine Analyzing Level (C4)
approach
C332-1.2 Design and analyze asynchronous circuits Analyzing Level (C4)
C332-1.3 Understand the advanced adders and multiplier circuit Understanding
Level (C2)
C332-1.4 Apply the concept of different ways of pulse or pattern Analyzing Level (C4)
generation
C332-1.5 Design digital circuits using VHDL Analyzing Level (C4)
Module No. Subtitle of the Module Topics No. of

Lectures
1. Finite State Machine FSM Design methodology, State 9

(FSM) Reduction, State Assignment,
Implementation, and State Diagram
partitioning, Mealy to Moore
Conversion and vice-versa.
2. Pulse Generation Sequence generation using Direct and 5

Technique Indirect Approach, Shift Register
Based Approach, Clock Dividers
(Integer/Non-Integer)
3. Advanced Topics in Different Types of Adders, Parallel 9

Digital Circuits Prefix Adders, Multipliers,
4. VHDL based Digital Importance of HDL, Basic Language 10

Circuit Design elements, VHDL syntax, entities, and
architectures, concurrent and
sequential constructs, hierarchical
design and test benches, FSM
modeling and simulation
5. Asynchronous Finite State Asynchronous Analysis, Design of 9

Machines Asynchronous Machines, Flow table
realization, reduction, state
assignments and design, Cycle and
race analysis. Hazards, Essential
Hazards, and its removal
Total Number of Lectures 42

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Project Based Learning: Student will design and synthesize combinational and sequential circuits
using VHDL.
Recommended Reading (Books/Journals/Reports/Websites etc.: Author(s), Title, Edition, Publisher,

1. William Fletcher: An Engineering approach to digital design, PHI, 2012
2. Z.Kohavi: Switching and Finite Automata Theory, 2nd Edition, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2001
3. A. Anand Kumar : Fundamental of Digital Circuits, PHI, 4th Edition 2016
4. J. M. Rabaey, A. Chandrakasan, B. Nikolic: Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design

Perspective, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education Inc., 2016.
5. Volnei A. Pedroni: Circuit Design with VHDL, 2nd Edition, MIT Press 2020
Detailed Syllabus
Semester Even Semester 6th Session 2020 -2021

Course Code 18B12EC311
Course Name Advanced Radio Access Networks
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Bajrang Bansal

Teacher(s)
Dr. Bajrang Bansal
(Alphabetically)

Recall the basic concepts of Digital Communication, Antenna and Remembering
CO1
Wave Propagation, and Wireless Communication. (Level I)
Identify the different components of wireless network based on the Applying
CO2
3GPP reference network model. (Level III)
Analyze the architecture and channel structure of LTE and also Analyzing
CO3
examine the LTE call flow. (Level IV)
Explain the importance of Optimization and Pre-Launch Optimization Evaluating
CO4
in radio access network. (Level V)
No. of
Module Title of the
Topics in the Module Lectures for
No. Module
the module
Introduction Overview and evolution of Mobile Telephony, Telecom
1. team structure, Generic network architecture, RAN network 6 [CO2]
components, RAN life cycle.
RF Basics Concepts related to baseband signal processing, Microwave
2. theory fundamentals, Concepts of radio propagation, 6 [CO1]
Antenna Concepts, Fading in wireless communication.
Radio Access Introduction to cellular concepts, Link adaptation, Power
3. Networks- control, Generalized macro site overview, Generalized call 6 [CO2]
Overview flow, Introduction to KPI, Protocol layers, Standardization.
Radio Access Architecture of LTE, LTE Bearer, LTE QoS, LTE Radio
Network- LTE Interface, Channel structure, Scheduling in LTE, Idle mode
4. 18 [CO3]
behavior, Power control in LTE, LTE mobility, LTE call
flow.
Radio Access Optimization basics,RAN tuning and RAN optimization,
5. Network Introduction to KPIs and Counters, Pre-launch 6 [CO4]
Optimization optimization, Post-launch optimization.
Evaluation Criteria
T120
T220
End Semester Examination35
TA 25 (Attendance, PBL/Assignment)
Total 100
Project based learning: Here, students will learn the process of radio network planning as it is of the
utmost importance to plan the radio network as efficiently as possible. Radio network planning comprises
of services relevant to network operators, regulatory organizations, and system suppliers, including:
coverage analysis, frequency planning, network design, network implementation, network optimization in
terms of coverage or capacity. By using propagation tools (like TEMS that is widely used by telecom
operators) or some simulation tool like MATLAB, students will learn to measure, analyze, and optimize
the mobile networks. In particular, they will learn the simulations for RF coverage predictions, field-
strength measurements in wireless propagation.
1. Advanced Radio Access Network, Student Book, Ericsson AB 2018.
T. S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice. Piscataway, NJ, USA: IEEE Press,
2.
1996.
3. TEMS Investigation, User Guide, ARAN Program-2018, Ericsson.
4. Online resource material from NPTEL, Research Papers.

Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B13EC314 SemesterEven Semester VISession 2020 -2021

Month Jan to Jun 21
Course Name Machine Learning for Signal Processing
Faculty Coordinator(s) Neetu Singh

(Names)
Teacher(s) Neetu Singh
(Alphabetically)

C331-3.1 Illustrate various machine learning approaches. Understanding Level (C2)
Experiment with the different techniques for feature extraction Applying Level (C3)
C331-3.2 and feature selection.
Apply and analyze various classifier models for typical Analyzing Level (C4)
C331-3.3 machine learning applications.
Applying Level (C3)
C331-3.4 Make use of deep learning techniques in real life problems.
Module No. Title of the Module Topics in the Module No. of Lectures
for the module
1. Introduction and Basic Linear algebra, Probability distributions, 8

Concepts Representing signals, Types of Features and
Proximitymeasures
2. Linear Models for Regression: Linear Basis Function Models, The 12
Regression and Feature Bias-Variance Decomposition, Types of Feature
Selection Selection: Mutual Information (MI) for Feature
Selection, Goodman– Kruskal Measure,
Laplacian Score, SVD, Ranking for Feature
Selection,FeatureSelection for Time Series Data
3. Linear Models for Discriminant Functions,Probabilistic 6

Classification GenerativeModels, ProbabilisticDiscriminative
Models,TheLaplaceApproximation
4. Decision Tree Learning Decision Tree Representation, Hypothesis space 7

search, Inductive bias, Issues in decision tree
learning
5. Support Vector Machines Linear maximum margin classifier for linearly 6

separable data, Linear soft margin classifier,
Kernel induced feature spaces, Nonlinear
classifiers, Regression by SVM, SVM variants
6. Introduction to Deep Convolutional NeuralNetworks and its 4
Networks Applications
Evaluation Criteria
Components MaximumMarks
T1 20
T2 20
EndSemesterExamination 35
TA25 (Attendance, Performance, Assignments/Quiz, Project)
Total 100
Project based learning: Students will apply machine learning frameworks for the classification problems with
the help of programming assignments. Additionally, students in group sizes of two-three will prepare a review
of the one CNN application using current research papers.
1. Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning, C.M. Bishop, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2011.
2. Deep Learning, I. Goodfellow, Y, Bengio, A. Courville, MIT Press, 2016.
3. The Elements of Statistical Learning, T. Hastie, R. Tibshirani, J. Friedman., 2nd Edition, 2008.
4. Machine Learning, T. Mitchell, McGraw Hill, 1997.

Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 17B11EC731 Semester Even Semester 6th Session 2020 -2021
Month from Jan to May 2021
Subject Name Mobile Communication
Faculty Coordinator(s) Kuldeep Baderia, Ankur Bhardwaj

(Names)
Teacher(s) Ankur Bhardwaj, Kuldeep Baderia
(Alphabetically)

Explain the evolution of mobile communication and basics of all the wireless Understanding Level (C2)
C331-2.1
standards currently being employed.
Perform mathematical analysis of cellular systems and cellular capacity Analyzing Level (C4)
C331-2.2
improvement designs.
Analyze large and small scale propagation models and their design both Analyzing Level (C4)
C331-2.3
mathematically and conceptually. Analysis of various fading models.
Analyze architecture of 2G, 3G and 4G systems and issues associated with Analyzing Level (C4)
C331-2.4 them. Formulate research problems based on the issues associated with 4G
systems.
for the module
1. Mobile communication Evolution of mobile communication systems. 3

system evolution 2G, 3G, and 4G systems. Block diagram of
mobile communication system. Problems of
mobile communication: spectrum, propagation.
Near far problem.
2. The cellular Concept – System Introduction, Frequency reuse, Channel 8

Design Fundamentals assignment strategies, Handoff strategies,
Interference and system capacity, Improving
coverage & capacity in cellular system
3. Mobile Radio Propagation Free Space Propagation Model, Ground 12

Reflection Model, Small scale Propagation,
Impulse Response model of a multipath
channel, Parameters of mobile multipath
channels, Types of small scale fading, Rayleigh
and Ricean distributions, Level crossing rates
and Average fade duration.
4. Multiple Access Techniques FDMA, TDMA, CDMA and OFDMA 5

techniques and their performance. Number
of channels.
5. Mobile communication network GSM: GSM standards and architecture, GSM 8

architectures Radio aspects, typical call flow sequences in
GSM, security aspects. GPRS, UMTS.
6 Introduction to 4G systems Long Term Evolution (LTE) and Worldwide 4
JIIT, Noida
Interoperability for Microwave Access
(WiMax).
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25(Attendance, Performance. Assignment/Quiz)
Total 100
Project based Learning Component: Here, students will learn frequency planning in mobile communication and
designing the network in such a way so as to maximize the system capacity. System capacity is used to characterize the
total number of users that can be supported by the system. As an alternate to measurements, different propagation models
will be analyzed. Using some simulation tool (like MATLAB) performance of different propagation models (like Okumura,
Hata, SUI, etc.) will be analyzed to find the best suited model for a particular wireless generation. Further to characterize
the fading scenarios in wireless communication, simulations will be performed for different fading distributions like
Rayleigh or Ricean. Summarizing, students will learn the simulations required to analyze the different aspects of wireless
communication like system capacity, signal strength, and fading.
1. T. S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications (principle and practice), PHI/Pearson, 2002.
2. William C.Y. Lee, Mobile Cellular Telecommunications- Analog & Digital Systems, Mc.Graw Hill,
1995
3. Andrea Goldsmith, Wireless Communications, Cambridge University Press, 2005
4. V.K.Garg, Principles and Applications of GSM, Pearson Education, 1999
5. V.K.Garg, IS-95 CDMA and CDMA 2000, Pearson Education, 2000
JIIT, Noida
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 20B16CS324 Semester Even Semester VI Session 2020 -2021

Month from Jan 2021 to Jun 2021
Course Name Non-linear Data Structures & problem solving

Credits Contact Hours 1- 0 - 2
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Manju
Teacher(s) Dr. Aparajita Nanda, Dr. Manish Ku. Thakur, Dr. Manju
(Alphabetically)
COURSE OUTCOMES
COGNITIVE LEVELS
At the completion of the course, Students will be able to
C305-10.1 Demonstrate operations on different data structures. Understand Level (C2)
C305-10.2 Use critical thinking skills and creativity to choose the appropriate Apply Level (C3)
data structure and solve the given problem.
C305-10.3 Identify the correctness and efficiency of the solution by constructing Apply Level (C3)
different test cases.
C305-10.4 Develop solutions to real world problems by incorporating the Create Level (C6)
knowledge of data structures

No. Lectures for
the module
1. Review of Problem Concepts of Problem Solving, Performance metrics 1
Solving and Data for Algorithm Analysis, Why study Data structures
Structures and Abstract Data Types.
Practice problems on Sparse Matrix
2. Practice problems Multi-list, skip list, XOR linked list, self organizing 2
on advanced list list, unrolled linked list
structures
3. Practice problems Suffix array and suffix tree, Trie and persistent trie, 4
on point and range Segment tree and persistent segment tree, Interval
queries using tree tree, K dimensional tree, Binary indexed tree, Splay
structures tree, Treap (randomized BST), Order statistics tree
4. Practice problems Tournament tree, Decision tree, Cartesian tree 2
on optimization
problems using tree
structures.
5. Practice problems Sparse set, Disjoint set, Leftist heap, K-ary heap 2
on heaps and sets
6. Problem solving Social graphs, Transportation system graphs, 3
using graphs Resource allocation graphs
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Tern Evaluation 30
TA 30 (Attendance – 10, Quizes/Mini Project – 20)
Total 100
Project based Learning: Each student in a group of 3-4 will develop a simulator with the help of various
advanced data structures. Students will be able to understand and apply algorithms and advanced data
structures properly; know how to evaluate, choose appropriate algorithms or data structures; know how to
design and implement algorithms or data structures to serve the purpose of designing solution. Selecting the
appropriate data structure is an integral part of the programming and problem-solving process. The project
typically incorporates various advanced data structure concepts to enable the synthesis of knowledge from
real-life experiences.
Text Books
1. Data structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++, Mark Allen Weiss, Pearson Education. Ltd., Fourth
Edition.
Handbook of Data Structures and Applications, 2nd Edition by Sartaj Sahni, Dinesh P. Mehta, CRC
2.
Press
References
Data structures and Algorithms in C++, Michael T.Goodrich, R.Tamassia and .Mount, Wiley student
3.
edition, John Wiley and Sons.
4. Data structures, Algorithms and Applications in C++, S.Sahni, University Press (India) Pvt.Ltd, 2nd
edition, Universities Press Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd.
5. Data structures and algorithms in C++, 3rd Edition, Adam Drozdek, Thomson
6. Data structures using C and C++, Langsam, Augenstein and Tanenbaum, PHI.
7. Problem solving with C++, The OOP, Fourth edition, W.Savitch, Pearson education
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16B1NHS 531 Semester : Even Semester : VI Session: 2020 -

(specify Odd/Even) 2021
Month from: Jan- June 2021
Course Name Sociology of Youth
Faculty Coordinator(s) Ms Shikha Kumari

(Names)
Teacher(s)
Ms Shikha Kumari
(Alphabetically)

C304-13.1 Demonstrate an understanding of Youth and youth culture in Understanding (C 2)
sociological perspectives
C304-13.2 Explain the ethical, cultural& social issues concerning Youth Evaluating(C 5)
C304-13.3 Examine the relative importance of structure and agency in shaping Analyzing(C 4)
young people’s experiences and life opportunities
C304-13.4 Evaluate youth experience in a context of social change Evaluating(C 5)

the module
1. Introduction to Meaning and characteristics of youth, demographic profile 2
Youth of youth in India, Challenges faced by Youth, Youth’s
roles and responsibilities in society
2. Youth Culture Concept of Youth Culture, role of Popular culture in 2
shaping youth culture,
3. Perspectives on Functionalist, Conflict, Interactionist and Feminist 3
Youth Culture Perspective on Youth Culture, Youth and Gender
4. Youth and Identity Social divisions: sexuality, urban and rural youth, social 6
identities: subcultural, digital, Experiences of youth to
negotiate identities in contemporary societies
5. Socialization of Concept and processs of socialization, Internalization of 7
Youth norms, types of socialization, conditions of learning,
internalized objects, theories of socialization, stages of
socialization, adult socialization, agents of socialization,
role of culture in socialization, socialization and cultural
differences, importance of socialization, Failure of the
socialization process
6. Problems of Youth Role and Value conflicts, Generation Gap, Career decisions 6
and Unemployment, Emotional adjustment, Coping with
pressures of living, Unequal Gender norms, Crime (Social
Strain theories),
7. Changing involvement of youth in major decision making institutions, 2
perceptive of Youth Post-modernity and Youth, Youth Unrest
and Youth Culture
in 21st century
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20 (Project based)
T2 20
TA 25 (Presentation, Assignment, attendance, Quiz and Participation in Tutorial)
Total 100
Tyyskä, V. Youth and Society: The long and winding road, 2nd Ed., Canadian Scholars’ Press, Inc.
1. (2008).
White, Rob, Johanna Wyn and Patrizia Albanese. Youth & Society: Exploring the Social Dynamics of
2. Youth Experience. Don Mills, ON: Oxford University Press, 2011.
Bansal, P. Youth in contemporary India: Images of identity and social change. Springer Science &
3. Business Media, 2012.
4. Furlong, Andy. Youth studies: An introduction. Routledge, 2012.

Blossfeld, Hans-Peter, et al., eds. Globalization, uncertainty and youth in society: The losers in a
5. globalizing world. Routledge, 2006.
Ruhela, Satya Pal, ed. Sociology of the teaching profession in India. National Council of Educational
6. Research and Training, 1970.
Frith, S. "The sociology of youth. Themes and perspectives in sociology." Ormskirk, Lancashire:
7.
Causeway Books , 1984.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16B1NHS631 Semester Even Semester 6th Session 2020 -2021
Month from January 2021to June 2021
Course Name PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Swati Sharma, Dr. Deepak Verma

Teacher(s)
Dr. Deepak Verma
(Alphabetically)

Apply the basic concepts of project management such as features,
C304-5.1 Apply Level (C3)
objectives, life cycle, model and management, in a given context
Analyze projects and their associated risks by understanding the
C304-5.2 various theoretical frameworks, non-numerical and numerical models Analyze Level (C4)
in order to make correct selection decisions
Evaluate the stages of project management and identify and determine
C304-5.3 Evaluate Level (C5)
correct techniques for planning and scheduling
Evaluate management processes for budgeting, controlling and
C304-5.4 Evaluate Level (C5)
terminating projects in order to achieve overall project success

the module
1. Project Characteristics of project; Life Cycle of Project; Project 4
Management: Model; Project Management as discipline; Contemporary
Introduction aspects of Project Management
2. Project Selection Theoretical Models; Non-numeric models; Numeric 6
Models; Financial Models; Project Portfolio process,
Significance and applicability of Monte Carlo simulation
3. Project Pure Project organization; Functional Organizations; Mixed 4
Organization, organizations; Matrix organizations; Role, Attitudes and
Manager and Skills of Project Manager, Project Coordination, Systems
Planning Integration, Work Breakdown Structure, Linear
Responsibility Charts.
4. Risk Management Theoretical Aspects of risk, Risk Management process, 4
Numeric Techniques, Hillier model,Sensitivity Analysis,
Certainty Equivalent approach and Risk adjusted discount
rates, Game theory.
5. Project Scheduling Theoretical aspects-Importance, Focus Area-PERT/CPM, 6
and Resource AOA and AON charts, Probability Analysis, Gantt Charts,
Allocation Crashing of Projects- Time and Cost tradeoff, Basics-
Resource Leveling and Loading.
6. Budgeting, Control Estimating Project Budgets, Improving the process of cost 4
and Project estimation, Basics, Importance, Purpose of control, Types
Termination of Control, Desirable features of Control, Control Systems,
Critical Ratio Method, Control of creative activities,
Control of change and scope creep, Why Termination,
Types of termination, typical termination activities.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignment, Project, Oral Questions)
Total 100
Project Based Learning: Students are supposed to form a group (Maximum 5 students in each group) and identify
a real-life project. They are supposed to do the in-depth study of this project and assess it in terms and Time, cost,
performance and client satisfaction. They are supposed to do the detailed study of project planning, organizing,
scheduling, leading and controlling. They must highlight the various tools and techniques which are used in their
chosen project. The project provides understanding to students that how organizations are managing their projects
and what is the relevance and appropriate usage of the concepts, tools and techniques that they are studying in this
subject. The fundamentals of Project management are very important in today’s corporate world and certainly this
subject enhances student’s employability in every sector.
1. Meredith, Mantel, Project Management-A Managerial Approach, 10th Edition, Wiley Publications,2017
2. Timmothy Kloppenborg, Contemporary Project Management, 5tht Edition, Cengage Learning, 2017
Harold Kerzner,Project Management: A Systems Approach to Planning, Scheduling, and Controlling,12th

3.
Edition,Wiley Publications,2017
Wysocki,R.K., Effective Project Management: Traditional, Agile, Extreme, Hybrid, 8th Edition,Wiley
4.
Publications,2018
Vohra, N. D., Quantitative Techniques in Management, 5thEdition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
5.
Company, 2017
Detailed syllabus
Subject Code 16B1NHS632 Semester: EVEN Semester 6th Session 2020-21

Month from Jan to June
Subject Name COGNITIVE PSYCHOLOGY
(Names)
(Alphabetically)

Understand and apply the concepts of cognitive psychology in
C304-4.1 Applying Level (C3)
everyday life
C304-4.2 Analyze the different models of various cognitive processes Analyzing Level (C4)
Evaluate cognitive psychology issues and recommend possible
solutions
Evaluate interventions/solutions for self-development through
cognitive processes
for the module
1. Introduction to Cognitive Historical Background: Emergence of 3
Psychology modern cognitive Psychology;
Approaches: Information Processing and
PDP Model; Research Methods
3. Perceptual Processes Perceptual learning and development; 4

perception of shape, space, and movement.
3. Attention Selective Attention and Divided Attention: 4

Meaning, Definition, and Theories.
4. Memory Short Term Memory 3
5. Imagery Properties of mental images; 3

Representation of images and cognitive
maps.
6. Language Structure of language and its acquisition, 4

speech perception, factors affecting
comprehension.
7. Thinking and Problem Types of thinking; Classification of 4

Solving problems; Problems solving approaches,

Problems space theory by Newell and
Simon, Creativity
8. Decision Making Logical reasoning types and errors in 3
reasoning processes.
Concept formation and categorization;
Judgment and decision making
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project, Assignment, Oral Questions)
Total 100
Project based learning: Students in a group will choose a research topic from the syllabi of cognitive
psychology. Students will cover the following points to prepare project reports: Understanding of concept,
related theories and perspectives; Describe the relevance of the chosen concept for personal growth; Discuss the
application of chosen topic for your professional life; Elaborate the relevance of the topic at group level and
societal level. Discussions on these practical aspects will enhance students’ understanding & application of
concepts of cognitive psychology in everyday life.
1. Ronald T. Kellogg, Fundamentals of Cognitive Psychology, 2nd Ed., Sage Publishing, 2012
2. Robert Solso, Otto Maclin, M. Kimberly Maclin, Cognitive Psychology, 8th Ed., Pearson
Education, 2013
3. Kathleen M. Galotti, Cognitive Psychology, 5th Ed., Sage Publishing, 2014
4. Michael W. Eysenck, Mark T. Keane, Cognitive Psychology: A Student's Handbook , 7th Ed,
Psychology Press, 2015
5. Robert Sternberg, Karin Sternberg, Cognitive Psychology, 6th Ed, Wadsworth/Cengage

Learning, 2011
6. Edward E. Smith, Stephen M. Kosslyn, Cognitive Psychology: Mind and Brain, Ist Ed,
Pearson Education India; 2015

Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16B1NHS635 Semester: Even Semester: VI Session: 2020 -2021

Month: Jan 2021 to June 2021
Course Name Organizational Behavior
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr Anshu Banwari

Teacher(s) Dr Anshu Banwari
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
C304-6.1 Identify dynamic human behavior through an insight into relationships between
Apply
individuals, groups and organizations
(C3)
C304-6.2 Analyze individual management style as it relates to influencing and managing
Analyze
behavior in the organization.
(C4)
C304-6.3 Decide and justify set of strategies for meeting the special challenges in the 21st
Evaluate
century competitive workplace
(C5)
C304-6.4 Assess the potential effects of important developments in the external environment
Evaluate
on behavior in organizations
(C5)

the module
1 Introduction to OB: Interdisciplinary Field, Concepts, Approaches, Responding 3
Challenges and to Globalization; Improving Quality & Productivity;
Opportunities Improving Customer Service; Improving People Skill;
Empowering People; Stimulating Innovation & Change;
Coping with Temporariness; Positive Organizational
Behavior, Working in Networked Organizations; Balancing
Work-Life Conflict
2 Managing Major forms of Workplace Diversity, Valuing Diversity, 4
Workforce Role of Disabilities, Discrimination, Diversity Initiatives,
Diversity Diversity Awareness and Affirmative Action, Diversity
Management and strategies to implement it Competitive
Advantage of Diversity Management
Generational Workforce
3. Job Design and Job Design & its uses; Flexible Job Environment; Job 2
Flexible Job Enrichment Model
Environment
4. Leadership: Inspirational Approach to Leadership: Authentic, Ethical & 6
Authentic Servant Leadership Defining Authentic Leadership through
Leadership Intrapersonal, Interpersonal and Developmental Aspects;
Basic Model of Authentic Leadership; Practical Approach to
Authentic Leadership through the research of Terry and Bill
George; Authentic Leadership: Trust and Ethics, Dimensions
of Trust, Counseling & Mentoring
5. Power & Politics Concept of Power; Sources of Power 5
Contingencies of Power; Power Tactics; Measuring Power
Bases: Power Authority Obedience
Organizational Politics: Types
Factors contributing to Political Behavior; Consequences &
Ethics of Politics
6. Employee Creating a Culture of Engagement, Models of engagement, 2
Engagement Benefits of Employee Engagement, Gallup Study, Methods
of engaging employees – from entry to exit, Managers Role
in Driving Engagement
7. Organizational Creating Organizational Culture 3
Culture & Approaches to Organizational Culture; How employees learn
Workplace culture; Measuring Organizational Culture; Spirituality &
Spirituality Organizational Culture
8. Organizational Organizational Change: Meaning & Types; Technology & 3
Change & Change; Resistance to Change v/s Inviting Change;
Development Approaches to Organizational Change; Planning &
Implementing Change;
Organizational Development; OD Interventions & Change
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignment, Project)
Total 100
Project: To Identify the behavioral strategies adopted by a specific corporate/ business leader for his
organization to meet the challenges of the 21st century competitive workplace and achieve the tangible
outcomes of productivity and employee wellness within his organization
1. S. Robbins, T. Judge, S. Sanghi, Organizational Behavior, 13th Ed, Prentice-Hall India, 2001
nd
P.Subba Rao, Organizational Behavior: Text Cases & Games, 2 Edition, Himalaya Publishing House ,
2.
2015
John R. Schermerhorn, Richard N. Osborne, Mary Uhl-Bien; James G. Hunt, Organizational
3. th
Behavior, 12 Edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2012
4. Debra L.Nelson and James C. Quick, Organizational Behavior, Cengage Learning, India Edition, 2009
5.
Steven L. McShane and Mary Ann Von Glinow, Organizational Behavior Essentials, Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing Company Ltd, 2007
th
6. Jerald Greenberg, Behavior in Organizations, 10 Ed, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16B1NHS636 Semester : Even Semester VI Session 2020 -2021

Month: January 2021 to June 2021
Course Name Literature & Adaption
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Ekta Srivastava (Sector 128)

Teacher(s)
Dr. Ekta Srivastava
(Alphabetically)

C304-3.1 Understand and outline the elements and theories of adaptation and its Understanding Level
various forms, and relate with the texts reflecting the cultural, moral (C2)
and linguistic changes in the contemporary society.
C304-3.2 Utilize visual literacy to analyze the language and style adopted in Applying Level
filmed texts and examine them as reflections of Readers’ and (C3)
Audience’ values and perceptions in the context of myriad cultures and
multidisciplinary settings individually and in groups.
C304-3.3 Analyze texts and their adaptations beyond the surface level of Analysing Level
narrative or character as reflections of value systems of various (C4)
cultures and times individually and in a team.
C304-3.4 Evaluate, interpret and document source texts and adaptations Evaluating Level
thematically and stylistically to learn the nuances of language, culture (C5)
and values of the society.
C304-3.5 Compose and make an effective presentation of a literary/non literary Creating Level
piece in any genre and design an ethical adaptation of any literary/non (C6)
literary piece in another form individually and in groups.

the module
1. Introduction Figures of speech, Character, Plotline, Conflict, Point of 2
Literary Devices View
2. Understanding Cultural Contexts 4
Literature & Forms of Adaption
Adaptation Cinematography & Narratology
3. Adaptation Theories; Reader Response & Audience 7

Response Theories
Framework Case study of the Classic Fairy Tale The Sleeping and its
contemporary adaptation Maleficent
4. The Pygmalion: George Bernard Shaw 6

Play & adaptations
Hamlet : William Shakespeare
5. Pride & Prejudice: Jane Austen 9
Novel &
The Giver: Lois Lowry
Adaptations
The Godfather: Mario Puzo
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project, Presentation, Quiz, Attendance)
Total 100

1. Linda Hutcheon, A Theory of Adaptation, Routledge, 2006
2. Mark William Roche, Why Literature matters in the 21st Century, 1st edition, Yale University Press 2004
3. George Bernard Shaw, Pygmalion, Electronic Version, Bartleyby.com, New York, 1999
Stanley Wills & Gary Taylor, The Complete Works. The Oxford Shakespeare (Compact ed.). Oxford:
4.
Clarendon Press. , 1988.
5. https://www.sparknotes.com/film/sleepingbeauty/
6. Jane Austen, Pride & Prejudice, Reprint, Thomas Egerton, 2013
7. Mario Puzo, The Godfather, 1st Edition, G. P. Putnam's Sons, USA, 1969
8. Lois Lowry, The Giver, 1st Edition, Houghton Mifflin Harcourt Publishing Company, USA, 1993
SYLLABUS AND EVALUATION SCHEME
Course Code 19B12HS611 Semester : EVEN Semester: VI Session 2020-21
(specify Odd/Even) Month from: January- June
Course Name Econometric Analysis
Faculty Coordinator(s) Manas Ranjan Behera

(Names)
Teacher(s) Manas Ranjan Behera
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Demonstrate the key concepts from basic statistics to understand Understanding Level -
CO1
the properties of a set of data. C2
Apply Ordinary Least Square method to undertake econometric Apply Level - C3

CO2
studies.
Examine whether the residuals from an OLS regression are well- Analyze Level - C4
CO3
behaved.
CO4 Evaluate different model selection criteria for forecasting. Evaluation Level - C5
CO5 Create models for prediction from a given set of data. Creation Level - C6

the module
1. Statistical Point and interval estimation; ;The Z distribution ;The 3

Inference Null and Alternate hypotheses ;The chi-square
distribution; The F distribution; The t distribution
2. Regression Two variable regression model; The concept of the 7

Analysis PRF; Classical assumptions of regression; Derivation
of the OLS estimators and their variance; Properties of
OLS estimators under classical assumptions; Gauss-
Markov Theorem; Tests of Hypothesis, confidence
intervals for OLS estimators; Measures of goodness of
fit: R square and its limitations; Adjusted R square and
its limitations
3. Econometric Identification: Structural and reduced form; Omitted 5

Model Variables and Bias; Misspecification and Ramsay
Specification RESET; Specification test; Endogeneity and Bias
4. Failure of Multi-collinearity and its implications; Auto- 2

Classical correlation: Consequences and Durbin-Watson test
Assumptions ;Heteroskedasticity: Consequences and the Goldfeld -
Quandt test
5. Forecasting Forecasting with a)moving averages b) linear trend c) 5

exponential trend CAGR; Forecasting with linear
regression; Classical time series decomposition;
Measures of forecast performance: Mean square error
and root mean square error; Limitations of
econometric forecasts
6. Time Series Univariate Time Series Models: Lag Operator, ARMA 3

Analysis , ARIMA models, Autoregressive Distributed Lag
Relationship
7. Linear Linear programming; Dual of a linear programming 3

Programming problem; Simplex method Transportation
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Quiz+ Project+Viva -Voce)
Total 100
Project based Learning: Students have to form a group (maximum 5 students in each group)
and have to do an econometric analysis on the topic assigned. Students will use the different
statistical methods using quantitative data to develop theories or test existing hypothesis.
Students will also be encouraged to forecast future economic trends.
1. Gujarati, D.N. (2002), Basic Econometric (4th ed.), New York: McGraw Hill.
2. Greene, W.H. (2003), Econometric Analysis, New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
3. Madala, G.S. (1992), Introduction to Econometrics (2nd ed.), New York: Macmillan.
Wooldridge,J (2010), Econometric Analysis of Cross Section and Panel Data(2nd ed.),
4.
Cambridge, The MIT Press.
Stock, J. H., and M. W. Watson. (2015). Introduction to Econometrics, (Third Update), Global
5.
Edition. Pearson Education Limited.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 20B12HS311 Semester Even Semester VI Session 2020-21

(specify Odd/Even) Month from Jan - July
Course Name Global Politics
Credits 3(2-1-0) Contact Hours 3
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Chandrima Chaudhuri

Teacher(s)
Dr. Chandrima Chaudhuri
(Alphabetically)
CO Code COURSE OUTCOMES COGNITIVE LEVELS

Demonstrate an understanding of the meaning and nature of Understanding (C2)
globalization by addressing its political, economic, cultural and
C304-9.1 technological dimensions
Analyzing the significance of contemporary global issues Analyze (C4)
C304-9.2
Analyze how the global politics shapes domestic politics Analyze (C4)
C304-9.3
Demonstrate an understanding of the working of the global economy, Understanding (C2)
C304-9.4 its anchors and resistances offered by global social movements

the module
1. Political Dimension of globalization
Globalization and Culture
Technological Dimensions
Globalization:
Debates on territoriality and sovereignty
Conceptions and
Perspectives 6
2. Global Economy Its Significance and Anchors of Global Political Economy: 8
IMF- history and India’s benefit from its membership of IMF
WTO- History and India’s experience with WTO and reform
proposals
World Bank- history and role of world Bank in India
Rise of TNCs and role of TNCs in globalization
Global resistances (Global Social Movement and NGOs)-
their nature and characteristics , prominent movements and
their impact
3. Contemporary Ecological Issues: historical overview of international 8

Global Issues-I environmental agreements-UNSCD, Paris agreement, climate
change- Copenhagen summit to post Copenhagen summit
policies of India, climate change and global initiatives
global commons debate
Proliferation of Nuclear Weapons-history of nuclear
proliferation, threat of proliferation with increase in
globalization
4. Contemporary International Terrorism: globalization and global terrorism, 6

Global Issues-II impact of terrorism on globalization, role of non-state actors
and state terrorism; the US and war on terrorism
Migration and Human Security- globalization, violent
extremism and migration; new global regime

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Attendance, Quiz, Project)
Total 100
C. Hay, Ed. New Directions in Political Science: Responding to the Challenges of an Interdependent
1.
World. New York, USA: Palgrave Macmillan Education, 2010
D.Held& A. McGrew, Globalization/Anti-globalization: Beyond the Great Divide. Cambridge, UK: Polity
2.
Press, 2007
F. Halliday, “Terrorism in Historical Perspective”., Open Democracy. 22 April, 2004 [Online] Available:
3.
http://www.opendemocracy.net/conflict/article_1865.jsp
J. Baylis and S. Smith, Ed.The Globalization of World Politics: An Introduction to International
4.
Relations. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 2017
L.Gordon and S. Halperin, “Effective Resistance to Corporate Globalization” in Contesting Global
5. Governance, R.O’Brien, A.M. Goetz, J.C. Scholte &M.Williams. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University
Press,2000
Java Programming (20B16CS322)
Detailed Syllabus
Course Description with CO

Month from Jan to Jun
Course Name Java Programming

Credits Audit Contact Hours [1- 0 - 2]
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Mr. Mahendra Kumar Gurve
Teacher(s) Mr. Mahendra Kumar Gurve

(Alphabetically)
COURSE OUTCOMES
COGNITIVE LEVELS
C305-8.1 Write basic Java programs using Java constructs – loops, switch- Understand Level (C2)
case and arrays.
C305-8.2 Define all basic concepts related to OOP concepts Remember Level (C1)
C305-8.3 Develop java programs using Java collection framework Apply Level (C3)
C305-8.4 Create or design an application based on Java programming Create Level (C6)
constructs

No. Lectures for
the module
1. Overview of OOA Classes, Objects, OOPs concept using JAVA, 3
(Object Oriented Packages and Interfaces.
Analysis) and Java
basics
2. JVM Internals Memory management, Garbage Collection 1
3. String Handling Using String and StringBuilder class. String 2
Immutability(toString())
4. Exception Fundamentals, Exception types, Java built-in 2
Handling in JAVA exceptions, Custom Exceptions, Chained Exceptions.
5. Collections Collection Overview, List, Map (hashCode & 4
Framework Equals), Set, Queue & other collections
6. Multithreading in Multithreading overview and requirement, Thread 2
Java state diagram, Java multithreading implementation
(Thread/Runnable), Challenges in
multithreading/Mutual Exclusion, Java handling of
mutual exclusion (synchronization), Communication
between threads (wait/notify)
Evaluation Criteria
TA 30 (Attendance = 07, Quizzes = 08, Internal assessment = 07,
Assignments in PBL mode = 08.)
Total 100
Project based learning: Assignments on different topics are given to each student. They utilize the java
concepts and try to solve different problems given as assignments.
The course emphasized on the Skill development of students in Java Programming. Topics like inheritance,
classes, exception handling, multithreading, collection frameworks, etc. are taught to enhance the
programming skills of the students for making them ready for employability in software development
companies.
Text Books
1. Schildt, H. (2014). Java: the complete reference. McGraw-Hill Education Group.
2. Bloch, J. (2016). Effective java. Pearson Education India.
Referenc Books
1. Sierra, K., & Bates, B. (2005). Head First Java: A Brain-Friendly Guide. " O'Reilly Media, Inc.".
Mughal, K. A., & Rasmussen, R. W. (2003). A programmer's guide to Java certification: a
2.
comprehensive primer. Addison-Wesley Professional.
Detailed Syllabus

(specify Odd/Even) Month from January to June
Course Name Problem Solving using C and C++
Credits 2 Contact Hours [1- 0 - 2]
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Mradula Sharma
Teacher(s) Mradula Sharma, Dr. Alka , Dr. Ashish Mishra

(Alphabetically)
COURSE OUTCOMES [NBA Code: C305-9]

COGNITIVE LEVELS
C305-9.1 Apply and use library functions, pointer arithmetic, arrays, and regular Apply Level (C3)
expressions and secure coding practices in programs.
C305-9.2 Use critical thinking skills and creativity to choose the appropriate Apply Level (C3)
containers, iterators and algorithms for a given problem.
C305-9.3 Demonstrate the use of concurrency principles, input and output Apply Level (C3)
streams and defensive techniques in programs.

No. Lectures for
the module
1. Review and Functions, all function syntax, Function return type 1
practice problems deduction, static, const and inline functions, default
on Functions in parameters, overloaded functions- operator and
C/C++ members, friends, overriding functions.
2. Practice problems Smart pointers, pointers and dynamic memory 2
on Arrays and allocation, type inference, array and pointers and
Pointers and their arithmetic and indirections
Indirections
3. Secure Coding Common String, Integer and dynamic memory 2
practices in C/C++ allocation Errors, Integer and dynamic memory
allocation and String vulnerabilities their mitigation
strategies.
4. String Localization Localization and working with regular expression, 1
and Regular Programming with Regex library
Expression
5. Practice problems Errors and Exceptions, Exception Mechanisms, 1
on Exception Exceptions and Polymorphism, Stack unwinding and
Handing and Cleanup, Common error handling issues
Assertions
6. Applications with Using streams, Input and Output with Streams, 1
Disk Files and String Streams, File Streams and Bidirectional I/O
other I/O
7. Generic Class templates, Function templates, variable 2
Programming with templates, Template parameters, Specialization of
Templates templates, template recursion, variadic templates,
Meta-programming
8. Working with Understanding and working with containers, 2
Standard Template container adapters and iterators, Lambda expressions,
Library Function objects, STL algorithms, Customize and
extend STL
9. Programming using Working with dynamic memory, array-pointer 1
Dynamic Memory duality, low level memory operations, smart pointers
Allocation Model and common memory pitfalls
10. Problems on Introduction, Threads, Atomic operations library, 1
Concurrency in Mutual Exclusion, Conditional variables
Programming
14
Evaluation Criteria
TA 30 (Attendance – 10, Quizes/Mini Project – 20)
Total 100
Project based leaning: Each student in a group of 3-4 will develop a simulator with the help of various advanced
C and C++ topics. In a team, they will learn how to apply the concepts for problem solving in a meaningful
way. The project typically incorporates various advanced C and C++ concepts to enable the synthesis of
knowledge from real-life experiences.
1. C++: The Complete Reference, 4th Edition H. Schildt Tata MacGrawhill

Object-Oriented Programming in C++, Fourth Edition Robert Lafore
2.
3. C++ How to Program Dietel and Dietel
4. Advanced C Peter D. Hipson.

5. Data structures and algorithms in C++, 3rd Edition, Adam Drozdek, Thomson
6. Data structures using C and C++, Langsam, Augenstein and Tanenbaum, PHI.
7. Problem solving with C++, The OOP, Fourth edition, W.Savitch, Pearson education
8. Secure C and C++ Robert C. Seacord

Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 20B16CS326 Semester EVEN Semester VI Session 2020 -2021

Month from JAN-JUN
Course Name Front End Programming
Credits Contact Hours 0-0-2 (2 hrs per week)
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Shailesh Kumar

Teacher(s)
Ms. Kritika Rani, Dr. Shailesh Kumar
(Alphabetically)

C305-11.1 Demonstrate new technologies by applying foundation paradigms Understanding [Level 2]
Build strong foundations for basic front end tools & technologies
C305-11.2 thereby making them understand the application development Apply [Level 3]
lifecycle.
Develop elegant and responsive Front-end by leveraging latest
C305-11.3 Apply [Level 3]
technologies
C305-11.4 Explain activity creation and Android UI designing Understanding [Level 2]
Develop an integrated mobile application to solve any complex real
C305-11.5 Create [Level 6]
time problem

the module
1. Object Oriented Objects, Classes, Abstraction, Encapsulation, Inheritance, 1
Programming Polymorphism
Concepts
2. Introduction to HTML 5, CSS 3, Javascript, jquery, bootstrap 3

basic front end
techniques
3. Java Fundamentals Decision Making, Loop Control, Operators, Array, String, 2
Overloading, Inheritance, Encapsulation, Polymorphism,
Abstraction
4. Advanced Front Storing and retrieving data, Python Programming Concepts, 2
End Programming Python for developing Android Application.
Concepts
5. Designing Android Android development lifecycle, Learning UI and layout, 3

Application controller, component, Directives, Services & views.
6. Android with Data base Application Development 2
Database
7. Privacy & Security Security Issues with Android Platform 1
Issues
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Semester Examination 30
TA 30 (Attendance-10, Assignments/ Class Test/ Quiz/ LAB Record -05,
Project -15)
Total 100
Project based learning: In this subject students will learn the latest front end technology. After completing the
subject, each student in a group of 3-4 will be able to create a mobile application.
Reference Books:
1. Schildt, H. (2014). Java: The Complete Reference. McGraw-Hill Education Group.
Mughal, K. A., & Rasmussen, R. W. (2016). A Programmer's Guide to Java SE 8 Oracle Certified
2.
Associate (OCA). Addison-Wesley Professional.
3. Gaddis, T., Bhattacharjee, A. K., & Mukherjee, S. (2015). Starting out with Java: early objects. Pearson.
Text Books:
4. Duckett, J. (2014). Web Design with HTML, CSS, JavaScript and jQuery Set. Wiley Publishing.
5. Shenoy, A., & Sossou, U. (2014). Learning Bootstrap. Packt Publishing Ltd.
6. Lee, W. M. (2012). Beginning android for application Development. John Wiley & Sons.
Hardy, B., & Phillips, B. (2013). Android Programming: The Big Nerd Ranch Guide. Addison-Wesley
7.
Professional.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 21B12CS311 Semester: odd Semester VI Session 2020 -2021

(specify Odd/Even) Month from Jan21 to May21
Course Name Software Development Principles and Practices
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Aparajita Nanda

Teacher(s)
NA
(Alphabetically)

Explain software engineering principles and software process models Understand Level
CO1
for project development. (Level 1)
Analyze software requirements and document software requirements Analyze Level
CO2
specification. (Level 4)
Apply Level
CO3 Design and develop the system models for software development.
(Level 3)
Apply risk management principles and processes to determine risk and its Apply Level
CO4
mitigation plans. (Level 3)
Evaluate Level
CO5 Assess software quality using various metrics
Level 5

the module
1. Introduction to Introduction to software engineering principles, Software 7
Software process models(build and fix model, waterfall model,
Engineering Incremental process model, Evolutionary- Prototype and
Spiral models.
Introduction to Agile Methodologies , Project planning, and
Project Scheduling.
2. Requirement Balancing Development Needs with Organizational 7
Engineering Expectations, Writing Requirements and Requirements
Specifications, Quality Assurance of Requirements, Types
of requirement, Prioritizing Requirements, SRS.
3. Software Design Use case diagram, State diagram, Activity Diagram, Class 8
Diagram, Sequence diagram, Collaboration diagram,
Deployment Diagram, Component Diagram and Package
diagram.
Design Modularity: Coupling Cohesion.
4. Risk Assessment Task Analysis, Accident Theory, Accident Investigation 5

and management and Reporting, Accident Statistics, Safety Inspection
Procedures, Disaster Planning, Risk Management Systems,
Analysis of risk at various stages of SDLC, Tools and
techniques
5. Software Metrics Size-Oriented Metric, Functional Point metric, Function- 6
oriented Metric, Halstead’s Software Metric, Information
Flow Metric, Objectoriented Metric, Class-Oriented Metric,
COCOMO Model.
6. Software Testing White-Box Testing, Basis Path Testing, Control Structure 9

and Debugging Testing: Condition Testing, Data Flow Testing, Loop
Testing, Black-Box Testing: Equivalence class partitioning,
Boundary Value Analysis, Decision table testing, Cause
effect graphing, Mutation Testing and regression Testing.
Debugging and its types.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Attendance-05, Assignments/Quiz/Mini Project-20)
Total 100
Project based learning: Each student in a group of 4-5 will choose an application or problem Software Development
Principles to understand the software engineering lifecycle by demonstrating competence in communication,
planning, analysis, design, construction, and deployment. To make subject application based, the students
demonstrate an understanding of current theories, models, and techniques that provide a basis for the software
lifecycle. Expose students to current technologies and issues that provide ability to use the techniques and tools
necessary for engineering practice and employability into software industries.
1. Roger S. Pressman and Bruce R Maxim, “Software Engineering: A practitioner approach”, 8thEdition-
McGraw-Hill - ISBN: 978-0-07-802212-8
2. Sommerville , “Software Engineering” , Seventh Edition - Addison Wesley
Other Reference books
3. GRADYBOOCH, JAMES RUMBAUGH, IVAR JACOBSON, The Unified Modeling Language User Guide,
Addison Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts.
4. Richard Thayer , “Software Engineering Project Management”, Second Edition - Wiley-IEEE Computer
Society Press.
5. B. Bezier, “Software Testing Techniques”, Second Edition- International Thomson Computer Press.
6. Pankaj Jalote, “An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering” Third addition , Springer Press
DETAILED SYLLABUS AND EVALUATION SCHEME
Course Code 21B12HS311 Semester: EVEN Semester: VI Session:2020-21
(specify Odd/Even) Month from: Jan-June
Course Name Development Issues and Rural Engineering

Coordinator(s) Dr. Amandeep Kaur
Faculty (Names) Teacher(s)

Dr. Amandeep Kaur ([email protected])
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
C304-10.1 Understand the concept, philosophy and determinants of rural Understanding
development Level- (C2)
C304-10.2 Assess public policies related to rural development Analyze Level
–(C4)
C304-10.3 Explain the role of local self-governance in planning and development Understanding
of rural areas. Level- (C2)
C304-10.4 Analyze the impact of recent policy changes and schemes on rural Analyze Level
development. –(C4)
C304-10.5 Evaluate the issue and challenges of through possible determinants of Evaluation
rural development. Level- (C5)

No. Lectures for
the module
1. Rural Development: An Rural Development Philosophy, Concepts,

Introduction Principles, Traditional and Modern Concept of
Development, Trends and Pattern of micro as well 4
as macro indicators of Rural Development.
2. Public Policies and Policies related to Employment Generation,

Rural Development Poverty Reduction, Skill Development and,
Infrastructure such as MGNGEGA, DDUGKY, 6
Atam Nirbhar Bharat rojgar yojna and schemes
related to MSMEs etc.
3. Rural Development Rural Development administration: Panchayat Raj

Administration and System (73rd Amendment Act), functions of
Panchayat Raj Panchayat Raj System, Financial Distribution of
Institutions Resources in Rural India through Panchayat Raj 6
System, merits and demerits of Panchayat system,
Ways to strengthen the existing system by
overcoming the flaws.
4. Rural Development Issues and challenges of Rural development:
Issues and Challenges Employment in line with sectoral distribution (GDP
and Employment), Poverty and Migration Issue, 7
Rural and Urban Consumption and Production
Linkages.
5. Recent Advancements Recent packages and schemes implemented in

and changes Rural India, Budget Allocation for Rural
Development -2019-20 and 2020-21: For 5
Employment Generation, poverty reduction,
infrastructure and MSMEs.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignment, Quiz, Project)
Total 100
Project-based Learning: Students are required to collect the data related to different indicators of rural
development (related to agriculture, health and education infrastructure, literacy levels, population density,
poverty, employment etc.). They also need to check the compatibility of data (data mining and data refining
process) and then analyse the contribution of these indicators in rural development of particular state/country
as whole. Moreover, they are required to analyse the extent of progress and failure of programmes/schemes
implemented in rural areas for poverty reduction, employment generation and MSMEs. Collecting
information and analysing the data related to development indicators and policies will upgrade students'
knowledge regarding the development issues and strengthen their skills to tackle multiple data handling and
measuring issues.
1. Singh, Katar. Rural Development: Principles, Policies and Management (3e).2009
2. Coke, P., Marsden, T. and Mooney, P. Handbook of Rural Studies. Sage Publications, 2006
3. Todaro, M.P., Stephen C. Smith, Economic Development, Pearson Education, 2017
3. Ahuja, H. L., Development Economics, S Chand publishing, 2016
Musgrave, R. A., Musgrave, P. B., Public Finance in Theory and Practice, McGraw Hill
4.
Education,2017
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B12HS611 Semester EVEN Semester VI Session 2020-2021

(specify Odd/Even) Month from: Jan - June
Course Name Marketing Management
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr Swati Sharma

(Names)
Teacher(s)
Dr Praveen Sharma, Dr Swati Sharma
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
C304-7.1 To illustrate the fundamentals of marketing, marketing Understanding Level
environment and market research (C2)
C304-7.2 To model the dynamics of marketing mix Applying Level (C3)
C304-7.3 To demonstrate the implications of current trends in social Understanding Level
media marketing and emerging marketing trends. (C2)
C304-7.4 To appraise the importance of marketing ethics and social
Evaluating(C5)
responsibility
C-304-7.5 To conduct environmental analysis, design business portfolios
and develop marketing strategies for businesses to gain Creating (C6)
competitive advantage.

the module
1. Understanding Defining Marketing For 21st Century 5
The importance of marketing and marketing’s role
New Age
in business and society.
Marketing
Introduction to Digital Marketing.
Online Communication Tools.
The Social Media-Conversations, Community and
Content.
Affiliate Marketing and Mobile Engagement.
The Digital Campaigns
2 Marketing Internal and external forces impacting marketers. 3
Environment Marketing and Customer Value.
and Market Gathering Information and Scanning the
Research and environment.
insights Company’s Micro and Macro Environment
Responding to the Marketing Environment
3 Strategic Explore the impact of social forces on marketing 5
Planning and the actions.
marketing Describe how technological change affects
Process marketing.
Designing the business Portfolio
Discuss the Strategic Planning Process and
Strategic Marketing Process.
4 Consumer and Consumer Markets and consumer buyer behaviour. 5
Business Buyer The buying decision process.
Behaviour Business Markets and business buyer behaviour.
Discuss the modern ethical standards.
5 Branding Brand Image, Identity and Association. 4
Product brands and Branding decisions.
Product line and mix decisions.
Consumer Brand Knowledge.
New Product Development and Product life cycle
strategies.
6 Pricing Factors to consider when setting prices. 4
products: New product pricing strategies.
Pricing
Product mix pricing strategies.
considerations
and strategies Price adjustments and changes.
7 The New Age Ethics and social responsibility in marketing. 2

Social Marketing Ethical behavior in business.
Ethical decision making.
Social forces affecting marketing.
Impact of culture on marketing.
Discuss modern ethical standards.
Importance of marketing in CSR and business
sustainability.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project, Viva, Oral Quiz)
Total 100
1. Kotler, Philip and Gary Armstrong, Principles of Marketing, 10th Edition, New Delhi, Pearson
Education, 2004.
2. Darymple, Douglas J., and Leonard J. Parsons, Marketing Management: Text and Cases, 7th
Edition, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pte. Ltd., 2002.
3. Kotler, Philip., and Kevin Lane Keller, Marketing Management, 12th Edition, New Delhi,
Pearson Education, 2006.
4. Winer, Russell S., Marketing Management, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall,2003.
5. Hollensen, S. (2019). Marketing management: A relationship approach. Pearson Education.

Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 19B12HS612 Semester: Even Semester VI Session 2020 -2021
Course Name Social Media and Society
Teacher(s) Dr. Shirin Alavi

(Alphabetically)

C304-1.1 Infer the implications of digital change, and the concept of social Apply Level(C3)
media and e-marketing in the context of the changing marketing
landscape
C304-1.2 Elaborate the implications of cyber branding and digitization on Create Level (C6)
online marketing mix decisions
C304-1.3 Develop specific models related to social media and social media Create Level (C6)
analytics
C304-1.4 Evaluate concepts related to Search Engine Marketing, Customer Evaluate Level(C5)
Centric Web Business models and Web Chain Analysis
C304-1.5 Illustrate the new age marketing practices Understand Level (C2)
Mod Title of the Module Topics in the Module No. of

ule Lectures for
No. the module
1. Introduction, Individuals What is social media marketing, the importance of 4
Online and Rules for social media for influencing target audience, Patterns
engagement for social media of internet usage, Internet user demographics, The
Behavioural Internet, E-Marketing, The Virtual world,
the changing Marketing Landscape, E -Marketing-
Strengths and Applications, Online Marketing
Domains, Digital Marketing Optimization, The Need
for Digital Engagement
2. The Online Marketing Mix The Online Marketing Mix, Consumer Segmentation, 3
Consumer Traits, Consumers and Online Shopping
Issues, E-Product, E-Place, E-Price, E-Promotion,
Website Characteristics affecting online purchase
decision.
3. The Online Consumer and The Digital Ecosystem, Online Consumer Behavior, 4
Social Media Cultural Implications of key web characteristics,
Models of website visits, Web 2.0 and Marketing, The
collaborative web, Network evolution, Network
science, Marketing with networks, Metcalfe’s law,
Netnography, Social Media Model by McKinsey,
Social Media Tools-Blogs, Wikis, Online
Communities, Facebook, Twitter, You Tube, Flickr,
Microblogging.
4. Online Branding and Traffic Cyber branding, Online brand presence and 4
Building enhancement, The Digital Brand Ecosystem, Brand
Experience, Brand Customer Centricity, Brands and
Emotions, The Diamond Water paradox, Internet
Traffic Plan, Search Marketing Methods, Internet
Cookies and Traffic Building, Traffic Volume and
quality, Traffic Building Goals, Search Engine
Marketing, Keyword Advertising, Keyword value,
Internet Marketing Metrics, Websites and Internet
Marketing.
5. Web Business Models, The value of a Customer Contact, Customer Centric 4
Social Media Strategy, Social Business Management, Web Chain of Events,
Media Marketing Plan Customer Value Analysis and the Internet, Business
Models, Revenue Benefits, Value Uncertainty,
Purchase Importance, Define a social media plan,
explain the social Media marketing planning cycle, list
the 8C’s of strategy development.
6. Market Influence analytics in Engagement Marketing through Content Management, 4
a Digital Ecosystem Online Campaign Management, Consumer
Segmentation, Targeting, and Positioning using Online
Tools, Market Influence Analytics in a Digital
Ecosystem, The Digital Ecosystem, Knowledge as a
value proposition, CGM and Consumer behavior, The
value of the power of influence, Amplifying Social
Media Campaigns.
7. The Contemporary Digital Online Communities and Co-creation, The 3
Revolution and its impact on fundamentals of online community management
society strategies, The World of Facebook, The Future of
Social media Marketing—Gamification and Apps,
Game based marketing The world of Apps, Apps and
the Indian Diaspora
8. Integrating Mobile into Types of Mobile Marketing, Progression of the mobile 2
Social Media Marketing as a Marketing channel, some Indian mobile marketing
campaigns, Impact of Social Media on government, the
economy, development, and education
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project, Viva and Attendance)
Total 100
1. Digital Marketing, Chaffey, D., & Ellis-Chadwick, F, Seventh Edition, Pearson (U.K) 2019.
2. Digital Marketing, Seema Gupta, First Edition, Mc Graw Hill Education (India) Private Limited ,2018
Social Media Marketing A Strategic Approach, Melissa Barker, Donald Barker, Second Edition Cengage
3.
Learning ,2017.
4. Internet Marketing: A Practical Approach in the Indian Context, Maity, Moutusy, First Edition Oxford
5. Fundamentals of Digital Marketing, Puneet Singh Bhatia, Second Edition, Pearson,2017.
6. Digital Marketing, Vandana Ahuja, First Edition, Oxford University Press, 2015
7. Social Media Marketing, Liana “Li” Evans, First Edition, Pearson, 2011.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B13HS612 Semester Even Semester VI Session 2020-2021
Course Name Effective tools for Career Management and Development
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr Kanupriya Misra Bakhru

Teacher(s)
Dr Kanupriya Misra Bakhru
(Alphabetically)

C305-2.1 Assess ones personal priorities, skills, interests, strengths, and values Evaluate Level (C 5)
using a variety of contemporary assessment tools and reflection
activities.
C305-2.2 Apply knowledge of all the Career Stages in making informed career Apply Level (C 3)
decisions.
C305-2.3 Develop and maximize ones potential for achieving the desired career Create Level (C6)
option.
C305-2.4 Analyze the processes involved in securing and managing career by Analyze Level (C 4)
employees of different organizations.

No. Module Lectures and
Tutorial for
the module
1. Introduction to Introduction to Career Life Cycle of an individual-Role and 3
Career Life cycle importance of human resource in an organization, Evolution
of Strategic Human Resource Management.
2. Self Branding and Introduction to complete cycle of Recruitment and 3

strategies to do well Selection, Introduction to various tools used for assessment
in Recruitment and and testing candidates-aptitude test, personality test,
Selection graphology test etc. Introduction to Workforce planning,
Importance and practical application of Job Analysis, Job
Description and Job Specification.
3. Personnel Introduction to various learning and development, 3

Development and Introduction to various techniques used for learning and
your career development, measure of training effectiveness, Training
techniques / delivery, Kirkpatrick Model, Introduction to
Succession Planning, Transactional Analysis.
4. Human Resource Performance Management: Measurement Approach, 3

Evaluation and Developing Job Descriptions, Key Result Areas, Key
Compensation Performance Indicators, Assessment Centre, 360 Degree
feedback, Balanced Scorecard, Effective Performance
Metrics. Compensation Strategy and trends- Compensation
package, ESOPs, Performance based pay, Recognition,
Retrial benefits, Reward management, Team rewards.
5. Human Resource Human Resources Audit, The Human Resource Information 2
Control System (HRIS), Human Resources Accounting,
and special topics Competency Management, Human Resource Management
Practices in India, Internationalization of Human Resource
Management Commonly Used Jargons.
Module Title of the List of Experiments/Activities CO

No. Module
1. Introduction to Practical Sessions on Resume and Cover Letter CO1, CO2
Career Life cycle Writing
2. Self Branding and Practical Sessions on Job Description, Job Specification CO3, CO4
strategies to do well and Self-Branding, Psychometric self-reflection tools on
in Recruitment and
Selection Personal Orientation and behavior-Personal Efficacy,
Personal effectiveness, Locus of Control, Emotional
Intelligence and Assertiveness.
3. Personnel Practical Sessions on Johari Window-Knowing Thyself, CO1, CO3

Development and Transaction Analysis-Parent, Child, Adult Ego State for
your career effective interpersonal communication.
4. Human Resource Practical Sessions on HR Interview and Mock HR CO2, CO4

Evaluation and Interview
Compensation
5. Human Resource Practical Sessions on Group Discussions and Mock Group CO2, CO4
Control Discussions
and special topics
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Term 30 (Project)
End Term 40 (Written)
TA 30 (Class Mock Activities, Assignment, Quiz)
Total 100
Students, in groups of 3-4, are required to select a company that has come for Campus placement at
JIIT, Noida. Students have to study the Recruitment and Selection process of the Company selected. The
information can be collected with the help of an interview or some kind of questionnaire pertaining to
the Recruitment and Selection process from seniors who have been placed in the given company.
1. Joshi, Campus to Corporate, Your Roadmap to Employability, Sage Publications India Pvt. Ltd., 2015
Mathur, Mastering interviews and group discussions, CBS Publishers& Distributors Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2.
2018
3. Mitra, Personality Development and soft skills, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2011
4. Pareek and Purohit, Training Instruments in HRD and OD, Sage Publications India Pvt. Ltd., 2018
5. Pande and Basak, Human Resource Management- Text and Cases, Pearson, 2012
6. Dessler and Varkkey, Human Resource Management, Pearson, 2011
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 21B13HS311 Semester Even Semester VI Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month from Jan 2021-June 2021
Course Name Poverty, Inequality and Human Development
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr Akarsh Arora

Teacher(s)
Dr Akarsh Arora
(Alphabetically)

C305- Understand the concepts and dimensions of Poverty, Inequality and Understand
13.1 Human Development (Level 2)
C305- Evaluate different approaches to measure Poverty, Inequality and Evaluate
13.2 Human Development (Level 5)
C305- Apply an analytical framework to understand the factual or Apply
13.3 proximate causes or determinants of Poverty and Inequality (Level 3)
C305- Analyze the role of public policy and affirmative action to tackle Analyze
13.4 Poverty and Inequality and strengthen Human Development. (Level 4)

the module
1. Concepts and Concepts and Dimensions of Poverty, Inequality and 3
Dimensions Human Development
2. Measurement Measurement of Poverty and Inequality: Steps and Axioms. 4
Steps to calculate Human Development
3. Census Data, Unit level Household Data, Geospatial Data, 2
Data Sources
Satellite Image Data
4. Determinants/ Factors: Demographics, Household, 3
Individual, and Macroeconomic variables
Determinants
Introduction to Stata, Regression- Linear and Binary
models
5. Public Policies and Review of different public policies of GOI to eradicate 2
Affirmative poverty. Role of education and health care policies to
Actions strengthen human development

No. Module
1. Concepts and Practical sessions on different dimensions of poverty and CO1, CO2
Dimensions inequality.
2. Measurement Practical sessions on STATA software to measure CO1, CO2
poverty, inequality, and human development.
3. Practical sessions on key survey issues and problems CO2, CO3
Data Sources while collecting data on poverty, inequality and human
development.
4. Practical sessions on STATA software to find and CO2, CO3
Determinants interpret the determinants of poverty using regression
analysis.
5. Practical sessions on the impact of different Government CO3, CO4
Public Policies and
of India policies and programmes on poverty, inequality
Affirmative Actions
and human development.
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Term 30 (Project)
End Term 40 (Written)
TA 30 (Class Mock Activities, Assignment, Quiz)
Total 100
1. A. V. Banerjee and E. Duflo, Poor Economics: A Radical Rethinking of the Way to Fight Global Poverty.
New York: Public Affairs, 2011
2. J. Haughton and S. R. Khandker, Handbook on Poverty and Inequality. Washington, DC: The World
Bank, 2009.
3. A. Tarozzi and A. Deaton, "Using census and survey data to estimate poverty and inequality for small
areas," The review of economics and statistics, vol. 91, no. 4, pp. 773-792, 2009.
4. D. Ray, Development Economics, 19 ed. New Delhi, India: Oxford University Press, 2012
5. A. Sen, On Economic Inequality. Oxford: Clarenson Press, 1997.
S. Alkire and M. E. Santos, "Acute Multidimensional Poverty: A New Index for Developing Countries,"
6.
OPHI WORKING PAPER. 2017.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16B1NHS634 Semester Even Semester Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month from Jan 2021 to June2021
Course Name Theatre and performance(Value added)
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr Nilu Choudhary

(Names)
Teacher(s) Dr Nilu Choudhary
(Alphabetically)

C304- Demonstrate problem solving ability and effective life skills through Understanding level(C2)
14.1 theatre performances.
C304- Develop awareness of the role of these arts in human life Understanding level(C2)
14.2
Applying level(C3)
C304- Apply skills of listening, articulation, awareness and collaboration
14.3 through the creation of performance.
C304- Design and present an original performance alone or in collaboration Creating level(C6)
14.4 with other artists.

the module
1. Introduction of History of theatre: role of theatre in human culture with 2
Theatre special reference to India
2. Characterization Tips for developing character, thinking about thoughts, 2
Flash –back, Performance
3. Script Writing Turning a story into a play , How to write a one Act , 3
setting the scene ,character , stage direction , Dialogues
4. School of Drama Natya-Shastra, Stanislavsky and Brecht 3
5. Text and its Mother Courage ,Galileo , Aadhe Adhure (any one) 3
interpretation
6. Back-stage work Management, planning, execution 1

No. Module
1. Moving in Space. Students will be moving around the room, filling up the C304-
space, changing pace, changing direction, being aware of 14.1
other people but not touching them. Find new ways of
moving, with a different emphasis each time – smooth,
jagged, slow, fast, heavy, light, high up, low down and so
on. Every now and again Teacher will shout “Freeze! And
Students need to freeze every muscle in your body.
Absolutely NO LAUGH, LOOKING AROUND, OR
MOVING. You will be out.
2. Mirror Activity A great way to get students aware of body movement and C304-
working together.
14.1
3. Characterization Developing and analyzing characters to reveal the special C304-
qualities and personalities of the characters in a story, 14.2
making character believable.
4. Script Writing The more passionate you feel about your idea, the more C304-
attractive your play will be. Divide the idea into a 14.3
beginning, middle and end.
5. Role Assignment No acting or movement at this point – just sit together to C304-
speak and hear the script carefully. Discuss and clarify any 14.3
confusing aspects of the script and any apparent challenges
in bringing the script to the stage. Division of script into
small “units” and rehearsed separately
6. Turning story into a Read thru each episode or unit separately “on its C304-
play feet”.Actors moving around the stage space. Set blocking 14.3
for each episode. Use ideas generated from Mini-Episodes,
and Staging with Images. Make sure the gestures,
movements, and stage pictures tell the story clearly.
7. Stage blocking Practice the blocking and the lines so that everyone knows C304-
what happens when and what their performance 14.3
responsibilities are. Memorize lines. Work on making
characters, relationships, and dialogue clear. This is a good
place in which to use the Creating the Character lessons. Pay
attention to vocal projection and articulation. Generate
ideas about any technical elements you want to incorporate
using the Transformation of Objects.
8. Script to performance Finalize and run the entire play from beginning to end C304-
without stopping to check any additional rehearsal required 14.4
to get everything running smoothly or not. Finally Perform!!
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Term 30
End Term 40
TA 30 (Script writing, End term stage performance)
Total 100
Eric Bentley, ed., The Theory of the Modern Stage: An Introduction to Modern Theatre and Drama,
1.
Penguin Books, 1968
Mark Fontier, Theory/ Theatre: An Introduction, New York: Routledge, 2002
2.
3. Michael Holt, Stage Design and Property, Oxford: Phaidon, 1986

Michael Holt, Costume and Make-up, Oxford: Phaidon, 1988
4.
5. Natyashastra, tr. by Adya Rangacharya, New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 2006,

Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16B1NPH632 Semester EVEN Semester 6th Session 2020 -2021
Month from January to May
Course Name SOLID STATE ELECTRONIC DEVICES
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Dinesh Tripathi
(Names)
Teacher(s) (Alphabetically) Anuj Kumar
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
CO1 Define terminology and concepts of semiconductors with solid state Remembering
electronic devices. (C1)
CO2 Explain various electronic, optical and thermal properties of Understanding
semiconductors; various techniques used in device fabrication. (C2)
CO3 Solve numerical problems based on solid state electronic devices. Applying(C3)
CO4 Examine the impact of various parameters on semiconductor Analyzing
devices and their performances. (C4)
Mod Title of the Topics in the Module No. of
ule Module Lectures for
No. the module
Bonding forces and energy bands in solids, charge carriers in
Energy band
semiconductors, carries concentrations, drift of carriers in
and charges
1. electric and magnetic fields, Invariance of the Fermi level at 12
carriers in
equilibrium, optical absorption, Luminescence, Carrier
conductors
lifetime and photoconductivity, diffusion of carriers
Fabrication of p-n junctions, equilibrium conditions, steady
state conditions, reverse bias breakdown, recombination and
2. Junctions 10
generation in the transition region, metal semiconductor
junctions, heterojunctions,
Field effect transistor (FET), Metal-insulator FET, Metal-
3. Transistors insulator-semiconductor FET, MOS FET, Bipolar junction 08
transistors
Photodiodes, solar cell, light emitting diodes, semiconductor
4. Devices lasers, Negative conductance Microwave devices: Tunnel 10
diode, IMPATT diode, Gunn diode
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 [2 Quiz (7), Attend. (7), PBL (6) and Class performance (5 )]
Total 100
Project based learning:To make a better understanding about the subject, groups of 4-5 students will
be formed and a project on semiconductor devices viz. Gauss meter, Photodiode, Light Emitting
Diode, Solar cell, Tunnel Diode, FET, MOSFET etc. will be allotted to each of the groups. The
students will collect all the information’s and understand about the basic principle, fabricationprocess
and current research activities going on in the particular field. The students will also be encouraged to
explore the field and create interactive simulations based on these devices.
Donald A Neamen&Dhrubes Biswas, Semiconductor Physics and Devices, McGraw Hill
1.
Education
2. S. M. Sze, Physics of Semiconductor devices, Wiley-Interscience
3. Streetman and Banerjee, Solid State Electronic devices, PHI
4. Umesh Mishra and Jasprit Singh, Semiconductor Device Physics and Design,
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16B1NPH633 Semester:Even Semester: VI Session:2020 -2021
Month: January to June
Course Name Photovoltaic Techniques
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. B. C. Joshi -JIIT 62

Dr. Prashant Chauhan – JIIT 128
Teacher(s) Dr. B. C. Joshi
Dr. Prashant Chauhan

Understand Level
Classify various type of renewable energy sources and explain working
CO1 (Level 2)
of photovoltaic device.
Understand Level
CO2 Demonstrate the use of basic principles to model photovoltaic devices (Level 2)
Identify challenges and apply strategies to optimize performance of Apply Level

CO3
various type of solar cells (Level 3)
Analyze Solar PV module, mismatch parameter and rating of PV Analyze Level
CO4
module (Level 4)
Evaluate the performance of various stand-alone PV systems with Evaluate Level
CO5
battery and AC and DC load (Level 5)

the module
Energy issues, conventional energy sources, Renewable
1. Review 02
energy sources, Solar Energy
Fundamental of semiconductor, charge carriers and their
motion in semiconductors, carriers generation and
recombination, p-n junction diode, introduction to solar cell, p-
Solar cell
2. n junction under illumination, Current-Voltage (I-V), open 10
fundamentals
circuit voltage (V OC ), short circuit current (I SC ) Maximum
power, current and voltage and Efficiency, Quantum
Efficiency
Design of solar cells Upper limits of cell parameters, loses in solar cell, solar cell
3. 08
design, design for high I sc , V oc , FF, solar simulators
Production of Si, Si wafer based solar cell technology, thin
film solar cell technologies (CIGS, microcrystalline and
Solar cell polycrystalline Si solar cells, amorphous Si thin film solar
4. technologies cells), multijunction solar cells, Emerging solar cell 12
technologies: organics solar cells, Dye-sensitized solar cell
(DSC), GaAs solar cell
PV system: Introduction, Stand-alone system, Grid connected

Photovoltaic system system, Hybrid system, Designing of PV system, Balance of
5. 08
system- BOS (Inverters, Controllers, Wiring, Batteries)
Photovoltaic Cells, Estimating PV system size and cost,
Photovoltaic safety.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Quiz+Attendance+PBL+class performance)
Total 100
PBL: Students are given the task to design a PV system for the water pump and home appliances.
This design can help students in understanding the basic knowledge of PV systems, wiring, load
calculation, battery sizing, PV panels, etc. This can help students in getting jobs in the renewable
energy sector.
Recommended Reading material: Author(s), Title, Edition, Publisher, Year of Publication etc. (Textbooks,
1. Tom Markvart and Luis Castaner, “Solar Cells: Materials, Manufacture and Operations,” Elsevier, 2006
Stuart R. Wenhem, Martin A. Green, M.E. Watt, “Applied Photovoltaics,” Earthscan, 2007
2.
3. Jenny Nelson, “The Physics of Solar Cells” Imperial college press,” 003.Aatec publications, 1995.
4. C S Solanki, Solar Photovoltaics, PHI
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16B1NPH636 Semester: Even Semester: VI Session 2020 -2021

Course Name Medical & Industrial applications of nuclear radiation

Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr Manoj Tripathi
Teacher(s) Dr Manoj Tripathi
(Alphabetically)
Define nuclear structure, properties and reactions; Nuclear magnetic Remembering (C1)
CO1
resonance process.
Explain models of different nuclear imaging techniques; CNO cycle; Understanding (C2)
CO2
principle of radioactive decays.
Apply knowledge of nuclear reaction mechanisms in atomic devices, Applying (C3)
CO3 dosimetry, radiotracers, medical imaging, SPECT, PET, tomography
etc.
CO4 Analyze different radiocarbon dating mechanisms and processes. Analyzing (C4)

the module
1. Nucleus, Structure of matter; Nucleus:Nuclear Size, Structure and 17
Radioactivity & forces; Binding energy and Nuclear stability, mass
Dating defect;Nuclear reaction: Fission, Fusion, chain reaction.
Nuclear fusion in stars, Formation of basic elements:
proton-proton chain, CNO cycle, Hydrostatic equilibrium;
Applications: atom bomb, hydrogen bomb, nuclear power
plants, Nuclear reactor problems, precautions.
ii)Radioactive decay, kinetics of radioactive decay, Types
of radioactive decay and their measurement, Half-life,
decay constant, Population of states, Production of
radionuclides. Radioactive dating, Radiocarbon dating:
Formation, mechanism of dating, carbon cycle, radiocarbon
clock and applications, advantages, disadvantages,
precautions; Other dating techniques, protein dating,
accuracy in dating;
2. Radiation and Dosimetry and applications: Interaction of Radiation of 09
matter interactions matter: Biological effects of radiations; dosimetry, working
principles, Tools and radiotherapy, Doses, Radioisotopes,
Radiotracers;
3. NMR and MRI Nuclear Magnetic Resonance: General Introduction to 09
Magnetic Resonance, Reference Frame; RF Pulses, Larmor
precision, Basic principles of NMR & ESR Spectroscopy,
Nuclear shielding, Chemical shifts; Couplings, Nuclear
Imaging; 1D,2D, 3D Images, Application of NMR in
medical industry as MRI, working MRI, Types of differen
MRI, Applications of NMR in quantum computation;
4. Nuclear Medicine Nuclear Medicine and Nuclear imaging techniques, 05
and Nuclear preclinical imaging, detector designing, photon counting,
Imaging Medical imaging using β+γ coincidences, SPECT AND
PET: Radiation tomography, applications;
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Project Bad Learning: Different groups of students with 5-6 students in each group may be formed and these
groups may be given to complete a task like identifying common applications to
nuclear science, recent developments in medical applications, etc. These problem
domains (elemental and content analysis, materials modification, radiation gauging,
solid/liquid Interface, and heart imaging) may be also chosen because of their
potential interest to students. Within each of these problem domains, the students will
learn to work in a team. It will improve their analytical skills and the students will
learn to achieve their common goal through mutual discussion and sharing of
knowledge, information & understanding.
1. Basic Sciences of Nuclear Medicine; Magdy M K halil, Springer
2. Physics and Radibiology of Nuclear Medicine; Gopal B Saha, Springer

4. Radionuclide Techniques in Medicine, JM McAlister (Cambridge University Press, 1979).
5. Nuclear Physics; S.N.Ghosal

Statistics (16B1NMA633)
Course Description
Course Code 16B1NMA633 Semester: Even Semester VI Session 2020-21

Month from Jan 2021 - June 2021
Course Name Statistics
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Himanshu Agarwal
Teacher(s) Dr. Himanshu Agarwal, Dr. Anuj Bhardwaj, Dr. Pinkey
(Alphabetically) Chauhan
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
make use of measures of central tendency, dispersion, skewness and, Applying Level
C302-1.1
kurtosis for description and visualization of population data. (C3)
Applying Level
C302-1.2 apply correlation and regression in statistical analysis of data.
(C3)
Understanding
C302-1.3 explain sampling theory and its distributions.
Level (C2)
Understanding
C302-1.4 explain the concepts and properties of estimation theory.
Level (C2)
Applying Level
C302-1.5 apply sampling and estimation theory to find the confidence interval.
(C3)
Analyzing Level
C302-1.6 analyze small and large sample data by using the test of hypothesis.
(C4)
1. Descriptive Graphical representation such as histogram, 8
Statistics frequency polygon, AM, GM, HM, median,
mode, measures of dispersion, skewness and
kurtosis such as central and non-central
moments, population variance, β, γ coefficient,
Box and Whisker plot.
2. Correlation and Scatter diagram. Karl Pearson’s and Spearman’s 5
Regression rank correlation coefficient, regression lines,
Analysis regression coefficient and their properties.
3. Sampling and Populations and Sample, random sample, 7
Sampling statistics, sample moments, law of large
Distributions numbers, central limit theorem, distribution of
sample mean and sample variance, MGF, Chi-
square distribution, F-distribution, Student’s t
distribution.
4. Parametric Point General concept of point estimation, methods of 10
Estimation moments and maximum likelihood for finding
estimators, unbiasedness, consistency,
efficiency, UMVUE, Cramer-Rao inequality,
sufficiency, factorization theorem, completeness,
Rao-Blackwell theorem.
5. Parametric Interval definition of confidence interval, pivotal 5
Estimation quantity, confidence interval for mean, variance,
difference of means and difference of variances
for small and large samples.
6. Hypothesis Testing The basic idea of significance test. null and 7
alternative hypothesis, type-I and type II errors,
testing of small and large samples for mean,
variance, difference in means, and difference in
variances.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
Total 100
Project based learning: Students in a group of 4 will collect sample data set and make simple
regression models. They will validate the model by hypothesis testing. By this students will be able to
make simple linear regression models and validate it.
Biswas and Srivastava, A Textbook, Mathematical Statistics Ist Edition, Narosa Publishing
1.
House, New Delhi.
W. Feller, Introduction to Probability Theory and its Applications Vol. I and II. Wiley Eastern-
2.
Ltd, 1971
V. K.Rohatgi, An Introduction to Probability Theory and Mathematical Statistics Wiley Eastern,
3.
1984
4. R. V. Hogg, A. T. Craig, Introduction to Mathematical Statistics, McMillan, 1971
AM. Mood, F. A. Graybill, and D. C. Boes, Introduction to the Theory of Statistics McGraw
5
Hill, 1974
6. Des Raj & Chandak, Sampling Theory, Narosa Publishing House, 1998.
7. Sheldon Ross, A First Course in Probability, 10th edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2018.
Meyer, P.L, Introductory Probability and Statistical Applications Addison-Wesley Publishing
8.
Company, 1965.
Applicational Aspects of Differential Equations (20B12MA311)
Course Description
Course Code 20B12MA311 Semester Even Semester VI Session 2020-21

Course Name Applicational Aspects of Differential Equations
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Lakhveer Kaur
Teacher(s) Dr. Lakhveer Kaur

(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
C302-2.1 solve ordinary differential equations in LCR and mass spring Applying Level
problems. (C3)
C302-2.2 explain orthogonality of functions and apply it to solve Sturm- Applying Level
Liouville boundary value problems. (C3)
C302-2.3 apply matrix algebra to find the solution of system of linear Applying Level
differential equations. (C3)
C302-2.4 formulate and solve first and second order partial differential Applying Level
equations. (C3)
C302-2.5 evaluate solution of differential equations arising in engineering Evaluating
applications. Level (C5)
Module No. of Lectures
Title of the Module Topics in the Module
No. for the module
Basic Theory of Existence and uniqueness of solutions,
1. Ordinary Differential applications to ordinary differential 10
Equations equations in LCR and mass spring
problem.
Sturm-Liouville Sturm-Liouville problems, orthogonality
2. Boundary Value of characteristic functions, the expansion 10
Problem of a function in a series of orthogonal
functions, trigonometric Fourier series.
Matrix Methods to solve Matrix method for homogeneous linear
3. 4
ODE’s systems with constant coefficients.
Solution of first order equations:
Basic Theory of Partial Lagrange’s equation, Charpit’s method,
4. 4
Differential Equations higher order linear equations with
constant coefficients.
Fourier integrals, Fourier transforms,
Applications of solution of partial differential equations
5. by Laplace and Fourier transform 14
Differential Equations
methods, applications of differential
equations in mechanics.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Quiz , Assignments, Tutorials)
Total 100
1. Ross, S.L., Differential Equations, 3rd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
2. Jain, R.K. and Iyengar, S.R.K., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 3rd Ed., Narosa
Publishing House, 2012
3. Chandramouli, P.N., Continuum Mechanics, Yes Dee Publishing India, 2014.
4. Kreysizg, E., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10th Edition, John Wieley & Sons, Inc. 2013.
Operations Research (18B12MA611)
Course Description

Course Name Operations Research
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Neha Singhal
(Names) Teacher(s)
Dr. Neha Singhal, Dr. Pato Kumari, Dr. Amita Bhagat
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
construct mathematical models for optimization problems and solve
Applying Level
C302-3.1 linear programming problems (LPP) using graphical and simplex
(C3)
method.
apply two-phase, Big-M and dual simplex method for linear Applying Level
C302-3.2
programming problems. (C3)
Applying Level
C302-3.3 make use of sensitivity analysis to linear programming problems.
(C3)
Applying Level
C302-3.4 solve transportation, assignment and travelling salesman problems.
(C3)
apply cutting plane and branch & bound techniques to integer Applying Level
C302-3.5
examine optimality conditions and solve multivariable nonlinear Analyzing
C302-3.6
problems. Level (C4)
1. Preliminaries Introduction, Operations Research Models, 3
Phases and Scope of O.R. Studies.
2. Linear Convex Sets, Formulation of LPP, Graphical 8
Programming Solutions, Simplex Method, Big-M Method,
Problems (LPP) Two Phase Method, Special Cases in Simplex
Method.
3. Duality and Primal-Dual Relationship, Duality, Dual 8
Sensitivity Analysis Simplex Method, Sensitivity Analysis.
4. Transportation Introduction, Matrix Form, Applications, Basic 5
Problems Feasible Solution- North West Corner Rule,
Least Cost Method, Vogel’s Approximation
Method. Degeneracy, Resolution on
Degeneracy, Optimal Solution, Maximization TP
Model.
5. Assignment Definition, Hungarian Method, Traveling 4
Problems Salesmen Problems.
6. Integer Linear Pure and Mixed Integer Linear Programming 6
Programming Problems, Cutting Plane Method, Branch and
Problems Bound Method.
7. Non Linear Introduction to NLP, convex functions and 8
Programming graphical solution, Unconstrained Problem,
Constrained Problems - Lagrange Method for
equality constraints, Kuhn-Tucker Conditions
for inequality constraints, Quadratic
Programming -Wolfe’s Method
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
Total 100
Project based learning: Each student in a group of 4-5 will collect literature on transportation,
assignment and integer programming problem to solve some practical problems. To make the subject
application based, the students analyze the optimized way to deal with afore mentioned topics.
1. Taha, H. A. - Operations Research - An Introduction, Pearson Education, 2011.
2. Hadley, G. - Linear Programming, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1962.
3. Hiller, F.S. and Lieberman, G. J. - Introduction to Operations Research, San Francisco, 1995.
Wagner, H. M. - Principles of Operations Research with Applications to Managerial Decision,
4.
PHI, 1975.
5. Vohra, N. D., Quantitative Techniques in Management, Second Edition, TMH, 2003.
Numerical Aptitude (16B19MA691)
Course Description

Month from Jan 2021 - Jun 2021
Course Name Numerical Aptitude
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Trapti Neer

(Names)
Teacher(s) Dr. Trapti Neer, Dr. Neha Ahlawat, Dr. Sarfaraz
(Alphabetically)
LEVELS
Understanding
C305-5.1 explain basics of mathematical aptitude.
Level (C2)
Understanding
C305-5.2 explain set, functions and representation of numbers.
Level (C2)
solve problem on probability theory, quadratic equations and complex Applying Level
C305-5.3
numbers. (C3)
Understanding
C305-5.4 explain inequalities, mensuration, data interpretation and errors. Level (C2)

1. Mathematical Fractions, simplification, HCF and LCM, ratio and 10

Aptitude proportion, percentage, partnership, age, average,
profit and losses, simple interest and compound
interest, time and work, time and distance.
2. Set Theory and Basics, identities, Venn diagram, addition principle, 08
Representation Pigeon hole principle, Functions-types of functions,
of Numbers some special functions, hashing function,
characteristics function, Ackermann’s function,
Representation of numbers in binary, octal,
hexadecimal, floating point representation of
numbers.
3. Probability Probability, binomial theorem, linear equations, 06
quadratic equations, complex numbers, logarithms.
4. Geometry and Surds and indices, inequalities, mensuration, 06
Data geometry, data interpretation, errors- types of
Interpretation errors, error propagation, errors in series
approximation.
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Term Examination 30
TA 30 (Assignments)
Total 100
Project based learning: Students are divided in a group of 4-5 to do a survey on the questions that are
available in the GMAT or GATE exams. The student can recognize the problems that appear in
competitions and do good practice to the said problems as learned in this course.
1. Aggarwal, R.S., Quantitative Aptitude, S. Chand & Co., 2008
2. Praveen, R. V., Quantitative Aptitude and Reasoning, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall India, 2016.
3. Prakasa Rao, B.L.S., A First Course in Probability and Statistics, World Scientific, 2009.
4. Rosen & Kenneth H, Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New
Delhi, 2007.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16B19BT692 Semester Even Semester VI Session 2020-21

(specify Odd/Even) Month from Jan - May
Course Name Applied Mushroom Biology
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Manisha Singh

(Names)
Teacher(s)
Dr. Manisha Singh
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
CO692.1 Define mushroom biology Remembering Level
(C1)
CO692.2 Experiment with mushroom cultivation Applying Level (C3)
CO692.3 Explain environmental and medicinal aspects of mushroom Understanding Level
(C2)
CO692.4 Analyze economics of mushroom cultivation Analyzing Level (C4)

the module
1. Principles of Introduction, concepts, types, uses of mushrooms, 2
Mushroom Edible and poisonous mushrooms
Biology
2. Global production Agribusiness involving mushrooms, global status, 2
opportunities, and constraints
3. Mushroom Cultivation: Culturing, preservation methods, spawn 8
cultivation production, quality attributes, storage, transport of
commercially important mushrooms
Lab: Bed preparation, use of different types of
substrates (straw, cotton mill waste, water hyacinth
etc.) for cultivation of oyster, white button, shiitake,
and caterpillar mushrooms
4. Mushroom Constraints in transformation, production of new 4
biotechnology varieties, genomic and proteomic approaches
5. Environmental & Bioremediation using mushrooms, Production of 8

Medicinal aspects nutraceuticals & value-added products.
Lab: Quality checks in cultivation process, processing,
and preservation
6. Economics Economics of setting up a commercial mushroom 4
production unit.
Lab: Report on economics of production
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Term Examination 30

TA 30
Total 100
The course is designed and aimed to train the students about mushroom production for Self or industrial -
employment and they succeed in acquiring knowledge after exposure to training on mushroom production
and its varied use in different sectors. The students get to know the in-depth concept for utilising modern
technologies in mushroom cultivation to ensure high yield, low cost of production and round the year
production. Many mushroom culture industries have been setup in India where good employment
opportunities exists for persons trained in mushroom culture and employment can be created for self and
other persons by establishing mushroom cultivation units, cottage / small scale industry with limited
resources. Hence, equips the students to venture in this industry that has remarkably high employment
generation and foreign exchange earning potential.
SHU-TING CHANG , PHILIP G. MILES: MUSHROOMS: Cultivation, Nutritional Value,
1.
Medicinal Effect, and Environmental Impact, SECOND EDITION, CRC Press, 2011
R. Gogoi, Y. Rathaiah, T.R. Borah, Mushroom Cultivation Technology, Scientific Publishers,
2.
2019
T.R Borah et al, Spawn Production and Mushroom Cultivation Technology, ICAR manual, 2018,
3.
India
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B1NEC733 Semester ODD Semester 7th Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month from July 20 to Dec 20
Course Name Fundamentals of Embedded Systems
Credits 4 Contact Hours 3L+ 3T
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Mr. Ritesh kumar Sharma (62)

Teacher(s)
Dr. Gaurav Verma, Mr. Ritesh kr Sharma
(Alphabetically)

Understanding of the fundamental concepts for embedded
C431-4.1 systems design and complete architecture of the Understand [Level 2]
ATMEGA16/32 microcontroller.
Identify various on chip peripherals of the ATMEGA16/32
C431-4.2 microcontroller and make use of them for designing Apply [Level 3]
embedded applications.
Experiment the basic concepts of embedded ‘C’
C431-4.3 programming and make use of them in designing embedded Analyzing [Level 4]
system applications around various sensors and actuators.
Understanding of the basic concept of RTOS, detailed study
C431-4.4 of ARM7 architecture (32 bit) and study of wireless Understand [Level 2]
protocols.
the module
1. Fundamental for Embedded System and its applications, Future Trends of 4
Embedded Embedded System, Design Parameters of Embedded System and
Developers. its significance, Microprocessor Versus Microcontrollers,
Microcontrollers for Embedded Systems, Embedded Versus
External Memory Devices, CISC Versus RISC Processors, and
Harvard Versus Von-Neumann architecture.
2. Detailed Study of ATmega16/32 Microcontroller (Basic architecture, Pin 10

AVR configuration, Memory organization (registers and i/o
Microcontroller ports), Embedded C programming, Timers, on chip PWM,
on chip ADC, Interrupts and Serial Communication.
3. Concept of Introduction to C, Difference between C and Embedded C, 6

Embedded ‘C’ Data Types used in Embedded C, Arithmetic & Logical
programming Operators, Control Flow, If & If – else, While & Do – while,
For, Switch & Case, Continue & Break, Array & String,
Functions and Header files, Pointers.
4. Real World Interfacing of single LED, Blinking of LED with timer and 12
Interfacing with without timer, Interfacing of push-button and LED,
Microcontroller Interfacing of 7-segment display, Interfacing of 8 push-
buttons to control 7-segment display, Intelligent LCD
Display, Interfacing of intelligent LCD display, Interfacing
of Matrix Keyboard to control 7-segment display, ADC and
DAC Modules, Interfacing of ADC0804, Interfacing with
DAC0808, Different wave generation through DAC0808,
Stepper Motor & DC Motor, Interfacing with stepper &
DC motor, Different Sensor Interfacing, (IR Sensor,
DTMF, Temperature Sensor)
5. Concept of RTOS Real Time Operating System (RTOS), Types of real time 10
and Advanced tasks, Task Periodicity, Process state diagram, Kernel and
Microprocessor Scheduler, Scheduling algorithms, Shared data (Resource)
and Mutual Exclusion, Semaphore, Introduction to ARM,
Features, ARM Pipeline, Instruction Set Architecture (ISA),
Thumb Instructions, Exceptions in ARM, Embedded
Wireless Protocols (Infrared Data Association (IrDA),
Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11).

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignments & Quiz)
Total 100
Project Based Learning Component: This course teaches embedded system design using a building block
approach, which allows one to visualize the requirement of an embedded system and then to design it efficiently.
Learning out Embedded Systems will give the skills to design and manufacture embedded system products of
the future which will help participants towards better employability. The course will teach embedded system
design using a microcontroller, namely ATMEL Corporation ATmega16/32 microcontroller and also introduced
the concept of advanced microprocessor of ARM family. The course will introduce various interfacing
techniques for popular input devices including sensors, output devices and communication protocols. It will also
teach effective embedded programming techniques in C and RTOS. It will have a significant practical
component, which will be achieved by distributing different minor projects to group of students.
1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, “The AVR microcontroller and Embedded Systems using Assembly and C”, 2nd Edition,
Pearson Education, 2008.
2. Frank Vahid / Tony Givargis, “Embedded System Design”, Willey India, 2002.
3. Santanu Chattopadhyay, “Embedded System Design”, 1st Edition, PHI Learning, 2010.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B19EC793 Semester -: Odd Semester-: 7th Session 2020-21

(specify Odd/Even) Month- : July - December
Course Name Summer Training Viva
Credits 2 Contact Hours Six weeks
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Bajrang Bansal, Mrs. Smriti Bhatnagar

Teacher(s)

C455.1 Extend theoretical knowledge to real time Industry Understanding Level (C2)
C455.2 Demonstrate the capacity for critical reasoning and independent Understanding Level (C2)
learning
C455.3 Make use of Industrial Training experience to prepare a Applying Level (C3)
scientific report
C455.4 Develop greater clarity about career goals in present condition Applying Level (C3)
Evaluation Criteria
Viva 25
Real world idea and knowledge of Industry 25
Report 25
Diary 25
Total 100
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 17B1NEC734 Semester Odd Semester VII Session 2020 -2021
Month from August to December
Course Name RF and Microwave Engineering
Credits 3 Contact Hours 3L+1T
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Monika

Teacher(s)
Abhay Kumar, Monika, Prof. Shweta Srivastava
(Alphabetically)

C332-3.1 Explain the concepts of microwave circuits and scattering parameters. Understanding (C2)
Evaluate the performance of several waveguide components and
C332-3.2 determine their responses and applications. Evaluating (C5)
Analyze the behaviour of microwave sources based on solid state

C332-3.3 devices and tubes at microwave frequencies. Analyzing (C4)
Determine mearurent parameters of microwave components and

C332-3.4 Applying (C3)
understand the ISM applications of Microwave Energy.

the module
1. Introduction to RF History of Microwaves, applications of Microwaves, 2
and Microwave Maxwell’s Equations.
Engineering
2. Microwave Review of Transmission lines, Line Equations. Microwave 3
Transmission Lines Integrated Lines: Microstrip line, Strip line, CPW line.
3. Impedance λ/4 Transformer, Tapered Lines :Exponential 3

matching
4. Scattering S-parameters: definition, properties, 2-port, 3-port and 4- 4
Parameters port.
5. Microwave H-plane, E-plane and Magic Tee, Isolator, Circulator, 10
Components Directional Coupler, Cavity Resonators, Q of Cavity
Resonator, Rectangular waveguide cavities.
6. Microwave Devices Microwave semiconductor devices, Schottky diode, Gunn 7
and Sources diode, Microwave Tubes.
7. Microwave Impedance and Power Measurement Vector Network 4
Measurements Analyzer, Spectrum analyzer.
8. RF Filters Classification of filters, Filter Design by Insertion loss 3
method
9. Microwave Industrial, Scientific and Medical applications of 4
Propagation and Microwave Energy, Biological effects of microwave
Applications energy.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 20
PBL 05
Total 100
Microwave Engineering is a fundamental course in Electronics and Communication Engineering. In this course,
a brief introduction about basics of RF and Microwave Engineering is presented, which can be utilized to impart
knowledge to design various microwave circuits at high frequencies. The project based exercises using RF
basics can be used for filter designing.
1. D.M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering (2nd Ed.), John Wiley, 1998.
2. S.Y. Liao, Microwave Devices and Circuits (3rd Ed.), Pearson, 2003.
3. Peter A. Rizzi, Microwave Engineering, Pearson, 1998.
B. R. Vishvakarma , R. U. Khan and M.K. Meshram , Microwave Circuit Theory and Applications, Axioe
4.
Books, 2012.
Detailed Syllabus
Subject 17B1NEC736 Semester: ODD Semester: 7th Session 2020 -21
Code
Month: Aug 2020 to December 2020
Subject Essentials of VLSI Testing
Name
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Shamim Akhter

(Names)
Teacher(s) Dr. Shamim Akhter, Dr Vikram Karwal
(Alphabetically)
C430-4.1 Understand the fundamental of Digital System testing Analyzing Level (C4)
Analyze Stuck-at faults model and Fault Simulation

C430-4.2 algorithms Analyzing Level (C4)
C430-4.3 Perform Combinational and Sequential ATPG Evaluating Level (C5)
Analyze Controllability and Observability of Combinational

and Sequential circuits
Understand Design for Testability (DFT), Built-In-Self-
C430-4.5 Test(BIST), and Test Vector Compression
Module Subtitle of the Module Topics in the module No. of

No. Lectures for
the module
1. Introduction to VLSI Testing Types of tests, Test Process and 5
Equipments, Automatic Test Equipment,
Fault coverage, Defect level
2. Fault Modeling Stuck-at faults, Fault equivalence & 8
dominance, Logic and Fault Simulation
3. Testability measures Controllability & Observability for 7
Combinational and Sequential circuits,
SCOPE algorithm
4. Testing algorithms for Combinational ATPG, D-algorithm, 12
Combinational & sequential PODEM, FAN, Sequential ATPG
circuits algorithms
5. Design For Testability and Introduction to Design for Testability 11
BIST Architecture (DFT), Scan Test, Built-In-Self-Test,
Test Compression Techniques
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Project Based Learning: Students will learn about implementation of different ATPG algorithms for
combinational and sequential circuit with the help of assignments.
1. M.L. Bushnell and V.D. Agrawal, Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and
Mixed-Signal VLSI Circuits, 1st Edition, Springer, 2013, [TEXTBOOK]
2. Alexander Miczo, Digital Logic Testing and Simulation, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
2003
3. Laung-Terng Wang, Cheng-Wen Wu, Xiaoqing Wen, VLSI Test Principles and
Architectures, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2006.
Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 17B1NEC742 Semester: Odd Semester 7thSession 2020-2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month from Aug.20 to Dec. 20
Subject Name Introduction to data analysis with R
Faculty Coordinator(s) Kapil Dev Tyagi

(Names)
Teacher(s) Kapil Dev Tyagi
S. NO. DESCRIPTION COGNITIVE LEVEL

(BLOOMS TAXONOMY)
Identify continuous/discrete probabilistic models for a Applying
C430-2.1
given random variable distribution Level (C3)
Test for hypothesis using statistical tests like z-test, t- Analyzing
C430-2.2 test ANOVA etc. Level (C4)
Explain unsupervised and supervised machine learning Understanding
C430-2.3
algorithms Level (C2)
Utilize software in Matlab/R languages for Applying
C430-2.4 implementation of ANOVA, Regression, and Machine Level (C3)
learning techniques
No. of Lectures
Module No. Subtitle of the Module Topics in the module
for the module
Introduction to R and MATLAB

1. Software 4
programming for data analysis.
Probabilistic models: Events and their
probabilities, Rules of probability,
Conditional probability and
2. Probabilistic models independence, Distribution of a random 10
variable, Expectation and variance,
Families of discrete distributions,
Families of continuous distributions
Descriptive statistics, Inferential statistics,
Hypothesis testing and estimation (z-test,
t-test, proportional z-test) ANOVA,
3. Statistics 12
Regression
Implementation of these algorithms in R
language
Introduction to Unsupervised and
Supervised machine learning algorithms
4. Machine Learning 8
like ordinary least squares method, k-NN
technique, Logistic regression etc.
Detailed simulation of ANOVA,
Simulations of data analysis
5. Regression, and Machine learning 5
techniques
techniques in Matlab/R languages.
Introduction to smoothing functions.
Nonparametric smoothing, functional
6. Data smoothing (optional) 3
linear models, dimensional reduction
functional principle components analysis.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Practicalimplementation of theory based learning: Each one of the student is assigned to write
the codes for implementation of the algorithms covered in theory in various languages like R,
MATLAB etc.This method of learning will help students to better understand the theory and
its practical implementation. Practical knowledge acquired by the students in this course will
boost their confidence and clarity on various topics and this ultimately help them in
placement interviews and further motivate to start their own startup company.
1. Anil Maheshwari, Business Intelligence and Data Mining Made Accessible, Createspace
Independent Pub, 2014.
2. Eric Siegel, Predictive Analytics: The Power to Predict Who Will Click, Buy, Lie, or Die,
Revised and Updated, John Wiley & Sons, 2016.
3. Shai Shalev-Shwartz and Shai Ben-David,Understanding Machine Learning: From Theory to

Algorithms, Cambridge University Press, 2014.
4. https://www.datacamp.com/courses/free-introduction-to-r
5. https://onlinecourses.science.psu.edu/statprogram/r
6. http://www.iiserpune.ac.in/~ayan/MTH201/Sahoo_textbook.pdf
Detailed Syllabus
Subject 17B11EC733 Semester: ODD Semester: 7th Session : 2020-21

Code Month : from July to December
Subject OPTICAL COMMUNICATION

Name
Credits 4 Contact Hours 3(L)+1(T)
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Rahul Kaushik

(Names)
Teacher(s) Dr. Rahul Kaushik
(Alphabetically)
S. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive Levels

C412.1 Develop an understanding of optical fiber, its structure, types, Remembering
and propagation and transmission properties. (C1)
C412.2 Identify and examine the different kinds of losses and signal Analyzing
distortion in optical Fibers. (C4)
C412.3 Classify the Optical sources and detectors and their principle of Understanding
operation. (C2)
C412.4 Design a fiber optic link based on budget analysis. Evaluating
(C5)
Module No. Subtitle of the Module Topics No. of Lectures
1. Overview of Optical fiber Electromagnetic Spectrum, Historical 3

Communications development and advantages of optical
fiber communication, Elements of
optical fiber transmission link, Optical
laws and definitions, optical fiber modes
and configurations.
2. Optical fibers Structures Optical fiber wave guides, Ray theory 4

transmission, Total Internal Reflection,
Acceptance angle, Numerical Aperture,
Skew rays. Cylindrical fibers Modes, V
Number, Mode Coupling, Step Index
fibers, Graded Index fibers. Single mode
fibers- Cut off wavelength, Mode Field
Diameter, Effective Refractive Index.
3. Signal Degradation in Signal distortion in optical fibers- 7

Optical fibers Attenuation, Absorption, Scattering and
Bending losses, Core and Cladding
losses. Information capacity, Group
delay, Types of Dispersion - Material
dispersion, Wave-guide dispersion,
Polarization mode dispersion,
Intermodal dispersion, Pulse broadening.
Optical fiber Connectors- Connector
types, Single mode fiber connectors,
Connector return loss.
4. Optical Sources Light emitting diode (LEDs)-structures, 6

materials, Figure of merits, Quantum
efficiency, Power, Modulation, Power
bandwidth product. Laser Diodes -
Modes & threshold conditions, resonant
frequencies, structures, characteristics
and figure of merits, single mode lasers,
Modulation of laser diodes, temperature
effects, external quantum efficiency, and
laser diode rate equations. Reliability of
LED & ILD.
5. Power Launching and Source to fiber power launching: - 6

Coupling Output patterns, Power coupling, Power
launching, Equilibrium Numerical
Aperture, Laser diode to fiber coupling,
LED coupling to single mode fiber.
Fiber Splicing- Splicing techniques,
splicing single mode fibers. Multimode
fiber joints and single mode fiber joints.
Fibre alignment and joint loss.
6. Photo detectors& Optical detectors- Physical principles of 7

Receivers PIN and APD, Detector response time,
Temperature effect on Avalanche gain,
Comparison of Photo detectors. Optical
receiver operation:- Fundamental
receiver operation, Digital signal
transmission, error sources, Receiver
configuration, Digital receiver
performance, Probability of error,
Quantum limit, Analog receivers.
7. Optical System Design Considerations, component choice, 7

multiplexing.Point-to- point links,
System considerations, Link
considerations. Overall fiber dispersion
in multi mode and single mode fibers.
Rise time considerations. Distance
consideration in optical transmission
system. Line coding in Optical links,
WDM Principles & Types of WDM,
Measurement of Attenuation and
Dispersion, Eye pattern.

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Project Based Learning: Students will learn about the constituents of an optical link and
their suitability/choice for any application. Understanding of various losses incur in an optical
link provide requisite skills in design, analysis and evaluation of the performance of analog
and digital optical fiber link. Students will be able to design an optical link with the given
specifications. Designing based questions given in the assignments built-up the thought
process of the students in the field applications.
Recommended Reading(Books/Journals/Reports/Websites etc.: Author(s), Title, Edition,

1. Gerd Keiser, Optical Fiber Communications, 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill

International edition, 2000.
2. John M. Senior, Optical Fiber Communications, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2002.
3. D.K. Mynbaev,S.C. Gupta and Lowell L. Scheiner,Fiber Optic

Communications,Pearson Education, 2005.
4. Govind P. Agarwal, Fiber Optic Communication Systems, 3rd Edition, John

Wiley, 2004.
5. Joseph C. Palais,Fiber Optic Communications, 4th Edition, Pearson Education,

2004
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B12EC412 SemesterOdd Semester 7th Session 2020 -2021

(specify Odd/Even) Month from July to Dec
Course Name Multimedia Communications
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Richa Gupta
Teacher(s)
(Alphabetically)
COURSE OUTCOMES
COGNITIVE LEVELS
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
familiarize with basics of data compression used in the development of
C430-7.1 C3
various construction algorithms for source codes.
identify theoretical and practical requirements for implementation and
C430-7.2 C3
designing of Error Resilient Codes.
learn fundamentals of transform coding, digital image processing and
C430-7.3 C3
its applications.
analyse the need of image compression & video compression and
C430-7.4 C4
distinguish between different image CODECs.
familiarize with psychoacoustic principle used in the development of
C430-7.5 C4
audio codec standards.

the module
1. Review of Introduction, Information Measure, Discrete entropy. Joint 3
Information Theory and conditional entropies.
2. Data Compression Uniquely Decipherable Codes and Instantaneous Codes. 8

Kraft - McMillan inequality. Noiseless coding Theorem.
Data Compression: Lossless Compression and Lossy
Compression. Optimal codes. Construction algorithms of
source codes – Huffman Codes, Shannon - Fano codes,
Arithmetic Codes, Lempel Ziv Welch Code and Run
Length Coding.
3. Error Resilient Reversible Variable Length Codes: Introduction, Types of 8
Codes RVLCs, Construction Algorithms of Symmetrical and
Asymmetrical RVLCs. Applications of RVLCs in
Multimedia Communications.
4. Multimedia Introduction, Digital Principles, Representations of text, 3
Information image, audio and video data. Transform Coding, Discrete
Representation and Cosine Transforms – 1 D and 2D. Energy compaction.
Transform Coding
5. Digital Image Basics of digital image processing, Structure of the Picture 12
Processing Information, luminance and chrominance components,
RGB components. Image Enhancement, Image
segmentation, Image Restoration and Morphological Image
Processing.
6. Image Compression Basics of Image Compression, Joint Photographic Expert 3
Group (JPEG) compression.
7. Video Compression Basic principle of video processing, I, P and B pictures in 4

video content, Structure of video frame, Macroblock,
Motion Estimation and Compensation, Compression on the
block level, Video Coding Standards.
8. Audio Compression Basics of Audio Signal Processing, Principle of 4
Psychoacoustic and its applications, Audio Compression
and Standards for Audio codec.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Research Assignment, Assignment, Quiz, Class Tests)
Total 100
Project Based Learning: Students are required to prepare a consolidated summary (including approach,
limitations, pros and cons, applications, scope etc.) of any recent research paper published in reputed
International Conference or International Journal related to Multimedia Communications. They will submit this
research assignment towards the end of the semester.
M. Bosi and R. Goldberg, Introduction to Digital Audio Coding and Standards. Kluwer
1.
Academic, Boston, 2003.
R. C. Gonzalez and R. E. Woods, Digital Image Processing Using MATLAB, Prentice Hall,
2.
2009.
3. K. Sayood, Introduction to data compression, Elsevier, 4th edition.
4. A. K. Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, Prentice Hall, 1989.

Detailed Syllabus
Course Code Semester Odd Semester 7th Session 2020 -2021

18B12EC420
(specify Odd/Even) Month from July to Dec
Course Name Smart and Sustainable Systems
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Vinay Anand Tikkiwal

Teacher(s)
Vinay Anand Tikkiwal
(Alphabetically)

Explain the motivation for sustainable systems; implementation
challenges and policy initiatives. Understand the basics of smart
C431-6.1 systems including sensors, sensor network integration, Internet of Understanding (C2)
Things (IOT). Illustrate the role of smart technologies in implementing
sustainable systems.
Understand the basics of renewable sources of energy and
C431-6.2 fundamentals of smart grids. Analyzing the role of renewable energy in Analyzing (C4)
sustainable systems.
Illustrate the concept of sustainable urban infrastructures. Application
C431-6.3 of electronic and digital technologies to urbanization issues, smart Analyzing (C4)
urban transportation: electric vehicles (EVs).
C431-6.4
Understand the role of ICTs in reducing GHG emissions, green data
Understanding (C2)
centers, and energy efficient wireless and wired communications.

the module
Motivation for sustainable systems, requirements,
1. Introduction implementation challenges. Introduction to smart systems 3
and their role in implementing sustainable systems.
Basics of Sensors, Actuators and Controllers, Sensor
2. Smart Systems 6
network integration, IOT, Smart Integrated systems.
Fundamentals of renewable energy. Hybrid Energy
3. Green Energy Systems: configurations, design and optimization 8
techniques.
Communication in power systems, smart grid technologies,
4. Smart Grids grid integration, issues in grid integration, smart grid policy 7
and regulation.
Basics of Electric Vehicles, Vehicle Types, EV
infrastructure: Hardware; Specifications, Policies,
5. e-Mobility 7
Feasibility analysis, Infrastructural Issues, Economics of
EV, Prospects in India.
6. Smart Cities Green Construction, Zero-Energy buildings, Smart urban 6
transportation and Smart urban energy systems, Electronic
and Digital Technologies, Instrumentation intelligence,
Transition issues, Policies, Smart Cities Mission, India.
ICTs for sustainable development, Introduction to Green
ICT Strategies, Green data centers, Energy efficient
7. Green ICT 5
wireless and wired communications, recycling of ICT
equipment, energy harvesting and CO 2 capturing methods.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
1. Lin, Y.-L., Kyung, C.-M., Yasuura, H., Liu, Y (Eds.), Smart Sensors and Systems, Springer, 2015.
Kamal, R., Internet of Things Architecture and Design Principles, 1st. Ed., Chennai, McGraw Hill
2.
Education (India), 2017.
Kothari, D.P., Singal, K.C. and Ranjan, R., Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies, 2nd
3.
ed., Delhi: Prentice Hall of India, 2016.
4. Momoh, J., Smart Grid: Fundamentals of Design and Analysis, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2012.
Sharma, P., and Rajput, S. (Eds.), Sustainable Smart Cities in India: Challenges and Future Perspectives,
5.
Springer Nature, 2017.
McClellan, S., Jimenez, J.A., Koutitas, A. (Eds.), Smart Cities: Applications, Technologies, Standards,
6.
and Driving Factors, Springer Nature, 2018.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B12EC421 Semester Odd Semester 7th Session 2020-2021

Course Name Image Analysis and Feature Extraction
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Abhishek Kashyap

Teacher(s)
Dr. Abhishek Kashyap, Dr. Megha Agarwal
(Alphabetically)

Understanding the facts and ideas of Image Processing and Understanding
C431-1.1 demonstrate the review of Signal processing, Matrix algebra and Level
Probability. (C2)
Develop the basic understanding of Sampling and Quantization of the Applying

C431-1.2
processed Image and its Transforms. Level
(C3)
Examine the result in the processed image by applying Edge detection, Analyzing
C431-1.3
Segmentation, Registration, Tracking and Reconstruction. Level
(C4)
Determine the object recognition, Image compression and its Evaluating Level
C431-1.4
optimization using Nature inspired algorithm. (C5)

the module
1. Introduction What is Image Processing? Review of Signal processing, 7
Matrix algebra, Probability/Statistics
2. Image Processing Sampling and Quantization, Image Transforms, Stochastic 10

Models for Images, Image Enhancement, Image Filtering,
Image Restoration
3. Image Edge detection, Boundary Extraction, Segmentation, Level 10

Analysis/Computer Set Method (brief introduction), Registration, Tracking,
Vision Reconstruction from Projections (Radon-transform,
Fourier-transform, recent methods)
4. Estimation topics In the context of restoration, registration, segmentation, 10

tracking, Bayesian cost functions, Least squares
estimation, EM algorithm, alternating minimization, Monte
Carlo methods, Kalman filter
5. Nature inspired Object Recognition, Image compression and optimization 8

algorithm using Nature inspired algorithm i.e. Genetic algorithm and
Particle swarm optimization.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Attendance: 5 Marks, Assignment: 15 Marks, Quiz: 5 Marks)
Total 100
1. Milan Sonka et al: Image Processing, Analysis and Computer Vision
2. Gonzalez and Woods: Digital Image Processing
3. Rafael C.G. and Woods R.E.(1992) Digital Image Processing.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 19B12EC413 Semester Odd Semester 7 Session 2020 -2021

Month from August to December
Course Name Convergence and Next Generation Networks
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Prakash Chandra Gupta

Teacher(s) Prakash Chandra Gupta
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
At the completion of the course, students will be able understand principles of Understanding
C430-3.1 multimedia, quality of service (QoS), network security and various signaling (C2)
systems.
At the completion of the course, students will be able apply above concepts for Applying
C430-3.2 developing understanding of the frameworks/protocols required for secure (C3)
transport of multimedia with required quality of service.
At the completion of the course, students will be able analyze NGN architecture Analyzing
C430-3.3
with application of frameworks of QOS, security and signaling systems. (C4)

the module
1. Introduction to a) Overview of telecom & broadcasting networks. 2
Convergence & b) Convergence & its key economic drivers.
NGN c) Architectural outline of NGN.
2. Voice/ a) Quality of service parameters, Bandwidth & traffic control. 11
multimedia over b) Queuing & scheduling mechanisms, Queue buffer
IP Network management using RED and ECN.
c) Quality of service frameworks, RSVP, Differentiated
service, Policy based quality of service implementation.
d) Audio & video digitization & compression, Codec standards.
e) Requirements for multimedia transport over IP network,
Protocols for real-time & stored multimedia transport (RTP,
RTCP, RTSP).
f) Multicasting principles, group addressing. And protocols
(PIM/IGMP).
3. Network a) Security requirements, security services, and security 7
Security mechanisms.
b) Encryption principles, Block ciphers & modes of operation.
c) Message integrity verification and source authentication.
d) Security at IP layer, IPSec (AH, ESP, transport and tunnel
modes), IPsec framework components.
4. Signaling a) Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), ITU-T H.323, SS7 7
Protocols for Signaling protocol and its transport over IP (SCTP).
Converged b) Interworking between networks based on SIP, H.323 and
Networks SS7.
5. Media Gateway a) Separation of media and call control functions, softswitch 2
Control & architecture, media gateway control, MEGACO/H.248.
Softswitch
6. Next Generation a) NGN architecture (ITU-T Y.2012). 10
Network b) IP Multimedia subsystem (IMS) and its functional
architecture.
c) CSCF, HSS, SLF, BGCF, MGCF, MRFC, MRFP, PDP, PEP
functions.
d) IMS addressing, Private/public user identities. Globally
routable user agent
e) Discovery and session control.
f) IMS services. Emergency service.
g) Operations support system (OSS).
7. Trends a) Overview of fixed mobile convergence (FMC), generic 1
access network (GAN).
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA (Assignment, Quiz, Participation) 25
Total 100
Project Based Learning: Assignment component of the evaluation is project-based. Groups of 3 students will
be assigned on projects that will be application oriented and will be extension of the concepts learn in the
classroom.

1. Hu Hanrahan, Network Convergence, John Wiley &Sons, 2007
Lingfen Sun , Is-HakaMkwawa, Emmanuel Jammeh, Emmanuel Ifeachor, Guide to Voice and Video over
2.
IP For Fixed and Mobile Networks, Springer, 2013
3. Daniels Collins, Carrier Grade Voice Over IP, MaGraw-Hill, 2013
4. William Stallings, Data & Computer Communication, Pearson, 2014
5. Prakash C Gupta, Cryptography and Network Security, PHI, 2014
6. A. Ahson Syed, Ilyas Mohammad, Fixed Mobile Convergence Handbook, CRC Press. 2018
Detailed Syllabus
Subject 19B12EC417 Semester: Odd Semester 7th Session 2020-2021

Code (specify: Odd/Even) Month from August to December
Subject
Name Machine Learning and Statistical Pattern Recognition
Faculty Coordinator(s) B.Suresh

(Names)
Teacher(s) B.Suresh ,Dr.Parul Arora
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE LEVEL
S.NO DESCRIPTION (BLOOMS TAXONOMY)
Identify supervised learning generative/discriminative learning, Applying

C430-6.1
parametric/non-parametric learning, Level (C3)
Test for their Knowledge in Clustering, dimensionality reduction, kernel Analyzing
C430-6.2
methods. Level (C4)
Understanding
C430-6.3 Explain Bias/variance tradeoffs; VC theory; large margins
Level (C2)
Utilize software Python to design and implement text and web data Applying
C430-6.4
processing applications. Level (C3)
Subtitle of the No. of Lectures for the

Module No. Topics in the module
Module module
Familiarity with the basic probability theory,

1 Basic Familiarity 6
Familiarity with the basic linear algebra
Generative/discriminative learning,
parametric/non-parametric learning, neural
supervised
2. networks, support vector machines 10
learning
Implementation of these module topics using
Python
clustering, dimensionality reduction, kernel
unsupervised methods
3. 9
learning Implementation of these module topics using
Python
bias/variance tradeoffs; VC theory; large margins
4. learning theory 9
Implementation of these module topics using
Python
Robotic control, data mining, autonomous
Recent navigation, bioinformatics, speech recognition,
5. applications of and text and web data processing 8
machine learning Implementation of these module topics using
Python
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Attendance: 5 Marks,
Assignment: 15 Marks, Quiz: 5 Marks)
Total 100
Project based learning: Each student in a group of 3-4 select a topic related to latest development in the technolog
and write done Algorithms and their corresponding code, This method of learning will help students to understan
latest development in the industry once they land in to entry it will be a simple task to design and implement an
given task. Knowledge acquired during this course will boost their confidence and clarity while attending an
Interview related to placement activities and establishment of their own application based startup company relate
with latest and cutting edge technologies
1. Machine Learning A Probabilistic Perspective, Kevin P. Murphy.2012 MIT press.
2. Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications Richard Szeliski, 2019 Springer.

The Elements of Statistical Learning Data Mining, Inference, and Prediction, Trevor Hastie, Robert
3.
Tibshirani Jerome Friedman.Second Edition 2017,Springer
.
Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 17B11EC731 Semester ODD Semester 7th Session 2020 -2021
Month from Aug to Dec
Subject Name Mobile Communication
Faculty Coordinator(s) Kuldeep Baderia, Juhi Gupta

(Names)
Teacher(s) Bajrang Bansal, Juhi Gupta, Kuldeep Baderia, Vivek Dwivedi
(Alphabetically)

Explain the evolution of mobile communication and basics of all Understanding Level
C410.1
the wireless standards currently being employed. (C2)
Perform mathematical analysis of cellular systems and cellular Analyzing Level (C4)
C410.2
capacity improvement designs.
Analyze large and small scale propagation models and their Analyzing Level (C4)
C410.3 design both mathematically and conceptually. Analysis of
various fading models.
Analyze architecture of 2G, 3G and 4G systems and issues Analyzing Level (C4)
C410.4 associated with them. Formulate research problems based on the
issues associated with 4G systems.
for the module
1. Mobile communication Evolution of mobile communication systems. 3

system evolution 2G, 3G, and 4G systems. Block diagram of
mobile communication system. Problems of
mobile communication: spectrum, propagation.
Near far problem.
2. The cellular Concept – System Introduction, Frequency reuse, Channel 8

Design Fundamentals assignment strategies, Handoff strategies,
Interference and system capacity, Improving
coverage & capacity in cellular system
3. Mobile Radio Propagation Free Space Propagation Model, Ground 12

Reflection Model, Small scale Propagation,
Impulse Response model of a multipath
channel, Parameters of mobile multipath
channels, Types of small scale fading, Rayleigh
and Ricean distributions, Level crossing rates
and Average fade duration.
4. Multiple Access Techniques FDMA, TDMA, CDMA and OFDMA 5

techniques and their performance. Number
of channels.
5. Mobile communication network GSM: GSM standards and architecture, GSM 8

architectures Radio aspects, typical call flow sequences in
GSM, security aspects. GPRS, UMTS.
JIIT, Noida
6 Introduction to 4G systems Long Term Evolution (LTE) and Worldwide 4
Interoperability for Microwave Access
(WiMax).
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25(Attendance, Performance. Assignment/Quiz)
Total 100
1. T. S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications (principle and practice), PHI/Pearson, 2002.
2. William C.Y. Lee, Mobile Cellular Telecommunications- Analog & Digital Systems, Mc.Graw Hill,
1995
3. Andrea Goldsmith, Wireless Communications, Cambridge University Press, 2005
4. V.K.Garg, Principles and Applications of GSM, Pearson Education, 1999
5. V.K.Garg, IS-95 CDMA and CDMA 2000, Pearson Education, 2000
JIIT, Noida
Detailed Syllabus
Lab-wise Breakup
Course Name Major Project Part-1
Credits 4 Contact Hours
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Sajai Vir Singh

Teacher(s)
Mr. Varun Goel
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Summarize the contemporary scholarly literature, activities, and explored Understanding
(C2)
CO1 tools/ techniques/software/hardware for hands-on in the respective project
area in various domain of Electronics Engineering.
Analyze/ Design the skill for obtaining the optimum solution to the Analyzing
CO2 (C4)
formulated problem with in stipulated time
Evaluate /Validate sound conclusions based on evidence and analysis Evaluating
CO3
(C5)
Develop the skill in student so that they can communicate effectively in both Create Level
CO4 (C6)
verbal and written form.
Evaluation Criteria
Mid Sem Viva 20
Final Viva 30
Day to Day 30
Project Report 20
Total 100
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B19EC792 Semester -: Odd Semester-: 7th Session 2020 -21
(specify Odd/Even) Month- : August - December
Course Name Term Paper
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Bhagirath Sahu, Mandeep Narula

Teacher(s)

Summarize the contemporary scholarly literature, activities and
C460.1 Understand Level (C2)
techniques for various domain of Electronics Engineering.
Analyze the recent technology and research trends in Electronics and
Communication.
Develop the skill so that they can communicate effectively in both verbal
and written form.
Evaluation Criteria
Mid-Term Seminar & Viva 20
D2D upto Mid-Term 20
End Term Seminar & Viva 20
D2D upto End-Term 20
End-Report 20
Total 100
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 16B1NHS831 Semester: Odd Semester: VII Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month: July 2020 -Dec 2020
Course Name Gender Studies
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Puneet Pannu

Teacher(s)
Puneet Pannu
(Alphabetically)

LEVELS
Demonstrate knowledge of the construct of gender and the way it Understand (C2)
C401-19.1
intersects with other social and cultural identities of race, class,
ethnicity and sexuality
C401 - 19.2 Apply feminist and gender theory in an analysis of gender including Apply (C3)
an examination of the social construct of femininity and masculinity
Analyze the ways in which societal institutions and power structures Analyze (C4)
C401- 19.3
such as the family, workplace impact the material and social reality of
women‟s lives
C401-19.4 Assess the need for Gender Sensitization and Gender Inclusivity and Evaluate (C5)
its practice in contemporary settings
Evaluate and interpret information from a variety of sources including Evaluate (C5)
C401- 19.5
print and electronic media, film, video and other information
technologies

the module
1. Introducing • Sex and Gender 9
Gender Issues • Types of Gender
• Gender Roles
• Gender Division of Labor
• Gender Stereotyping and Gender Discrimination
2. • Biological, Phenomenological and Socio-Cultural 6
Perspectives of body
Gender
• Body as a Site and Articulation of Power Relations
Perspectives of
• Cultural Meaning of Female Body and Women‟s
Body & Language
Lived Experiences
• The Other and Objectification
3. • Bio-Social Perspective of Gender 9
• Gender as Attributional Fact
Social • Feminine & Feminist
Construction of • Major Theorists of Feminism Challenging Cultural
Femininity & Notions of Femininity
Feminism • Feminism Today: Radical, Liberal, Socialist,
Cultural, Eco feminism & Cyber feminism
• Images of Women in Sports, Arts, Entertainment,
Media and Fashion Industry ;Cultural Feminism &
Celebrating Womanhood
• Analysis of role women have played across cultures
4. • Definition and Understanding of Masculinities 9
• Sociology of Masculinity& its Types
Social • Social Organization of Masculinity and Privileged
Construction of Position of Masculinity
Masculinity • Politics of Masculinity and Power
• Major Theorists of Masculinity
• Masculine Identities in Literature, Cinema &
Media.
5. 9
Gender • Women & Women Rights In India
Sensitization
• From Women’s Studies to Gender Studies: A
Empowerment
Paradigm Shift
&Gender
• Gender Sensitization & Gender Inclusivity
Inclusivity
• Gender Studies & Media: Creating New Paradigms
in Gender & Culture
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project/ Assignment)
Total 100
1 Davis K., et al, “Handbook of Gender and Women's Studies. London: Sage. (2006)
2 Helgeson, Vicki S., “The Psychology of Gender”, Pearson(2012)
3 Friedan B., “The Feminine Mystique”, Penguin. (1971/1992)
4 Debeauvoir S. , “The Second Sex”, Vintage (1953/1997)

Wharton Amy S., “The Sociology of Gender: An Introduction to Theory & Research”, Wiley-Blackwell
5 (2005)
6 Pachauri G.,” Gender, School & Society”, R.Lall Publishers( 2013)
7 Connell R.W, “Masculinities”, Cambridge: Polity. (1985)
8 MacInnes J., “The End of Masculinity”. Buckingham: Open University Press. (1998)
9 Kaul A.& Singh M., ”New Paradigms for Gender Inclusivity”, PHI Pvt Ltd (2012)
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 17B1NBT732 Semester Odd Semester VII Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month from July-December
Course Name Healthcare Marketplace
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Indira P. Sarethy

Teacher(s) Dr. Indira P. Sarethy, Dr. Shweta Dang
(Alphabetically)

Explain healthcare market, drugs and devices, role of various
C401-14.1 Understand Level (C2)
stakeholders
Apply related intellectual property laws and regulatory
C401-14.2 Apply Level (C3)
approvals for healthcare sector
Analyze the various business models/ innovations in the
C401-14.3 AnalyzeLevel (C4)
healthcare industry
Compare and examine economic aspects pertaining to the
C401-14.4 AnalyzeLevel (C4)
sector

the module
1. Introduction to About the various Regulatory bodies for approval of new 02
Healthcare medical innovations
markets
2. Clinical Biologic sampling techniques, analytical methods for the 05
Pharmacokinetics measurement of drugs and metabolites, and procedures that
and Clinical trials facilitate data collection and manipulation.
for new Drugs Clinical Trials: PhI, II, III and IV
3. Regulatory Preclinical studies 06
approval
US and EU filings
pathways
IND submissions, NDA and BLA Submissions, Non-patent
exclusivities, data and market exclusivities cost analysis
4. Patents of drugs Role of patents on new drugs and devices, Ever-greening of 08
and devices, Entry patents, Product and Process patents.
for generics in Hatch Waxman act and Introduction of generics and
health care resulting cost reduction, Orange book (FDA) and related
markets case studies.
5. Economics of Stakeholders in healthcare- doctors, hospitals and insurers 7
healthcare and theirroles, technology and human capital
6. Medical For medical devices, pharmaceuticals, genetic diagnostic 4
technology and tests and their regulations
insurance
7. Indian hospital Various players – government, private, PPP models, 4
sector strategic perspectives, case studies
8 Innovations in the Health to market innovations 4
marketplace
9 Healthcare e-health, collection of health data, data processing, 2
informatics evaluation, health information systems, case studies
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignments 1, 2, 3, Attendance)
Total 100
1. Research papers and online resources
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 17B1NBT733 Semester Odd Semester VII Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month from July-December
Course Name Stress: Biology, Behaviour and Management
Credits 3 (3-0-0) Contact Hours 3
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Vibha Gupta

Teacher(s)
Vibha Gupta
(Alphabetically)

C401-16.1 Explain the biological basis of stress. Understand Level (C2)
C401-16.2 Relate cognitive processes and stress management. Understand level (C2)
Apply acquired knowledge in understanding and adjusting to
C401-16.3 Apply level (C3)
different people and situations.
C401-16.4 Improve quality of life by reducing stress. Create level (C6)

No. for the module
1. The concept of Stress - Major stressors vs. routine hassles
; Major types of Stressors - Occupational Stressors;
Introduction 3
Organization Stress; Environmental Stressors; Happy
Interactive Class (HIC)
2. Scientific HIC 1, The Nature of Stress; Human Physiology; Stress
5
Foundations of Stress and Relaxation Responses; Stress and Disease
3. HIC2, Nervous System, Endocrine System, immune
Body Systems
system, Cardiovascular system, Gastrointestinal System, 9
activated by stressors
Muscles
4. HIC3, Theoretical models: psychodynamic, behavioral,
and cognitive; Thoughts, Beliefs and Emotions:
Cognitive
Behavioral Patterns; Self-concept and Self-esteem; Stress 11
Psychology
emotions - Anger and Fear; Personality Traits – Stress
prone and Stress resistant
5. HIC4, Family and Culture; Demands and Responsibilities;
Social Psychology Relationships; Verbal and Non-verbal Communication; 3
Human Spirituality
6. Stress and the HIC4, Time; Body Rhythms; Weather and Climate;
Human Nutrition; Exercise; Drugs and Addictions; Violence and
3
Environmental Post Traumatic Stress
Interactions
7. Happy Interactive HIC1 - DIY Strategies- Exercise and Health; HIC2 -
Class (HIC) related Journal Writing/Music and Art Therapy; HIC3- Humor HICs to be
to Stress and Comic Relief; HIC4- Meditation/Mindfulness/Belly delivered in the
management Breathing/Visual Imagery/Progressive Muscle Relaxation modules 1-6
techniques and Psychological interventions; Developing Cognitive
therapeutic strategies Coping Skills; Creative Problem Solving (case studies);
4
8. The adaptive brain Neuroplasticity – positive adaptation to stress 2
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project, Quiz and class discussions)
Total 100
George Fink “Stress: Concepts, Cognition, Emotion, and Behavior: Handbook in Stress Series; Volume 1;
1.
Academic Press; 2016
2. Jeanne Ricks “The Biology of Beating Stress”Kindle Edition; 2014
3. Jerrold S. Greenberg “Comprehensive Stress Management” Tata McGraw-Hill Edition; Tenth Ed., 2009
Brian Luke Seaward “Managing Stress: Principles and Strategies for Health and Well-Being” Sixth Ed.,
4.
Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2009
Saundra E. Ciccarelli, and Glenn E. Meyer “Psychology” South Asian Edition; Published by Pearson
5.
Education (2008); ISBN 10:8131713873 / ISBN 13: 9788131713877
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 17B1NHS731 Semester: Odd Semester VII Session 2020 -2021
Month from July 2020 to Dec 2020
Course Name Customer Relationship Management
Teacher(s) Dr. Shirin Alavi

(Alphabetically)

C401-17.1 Apply the financial, social and electronic aspects of the Customer Apply Level (C3)
Relationship in business situations.
C401-17.2 Appraise the role of customer share and customer centricity in Apply Level (C3)
organizations.
C401-17.3 Develop the skills to understand customization, innovation and co- Analyze Level (C4)
creation in organizations and apply them in business contexts.
C401-17.4 Analyze the role of interactive technology for customer engagement, Analyze Level (C4)
customer retention and customer experience management in
organizations.
C401-17.5 Evaluate the technological solutions and their applications for effective Evaluate Level (C5)
Customer Relationship Management across different functions in
organizations.
C401-17.6 Develop specific models for response modelling and consumer Create Level (C6)
profiling in organizations.

the module
1. CRM-The Strategic Introduction, CRM in Marketing and IT, CRM for Business 3
Imperatives Leadership, Criticality of customer relationships, Why
businesses should adopt CRM, Implementing CRM.
2. Conceptual Evolution of CRM, Benefits, Schools of thought on CRM, 7
Foundations of Defining CRM. Customer Retention and Customer
CRM, Building Acquisition, Customer Profitability is Skewed, Service
Customer Benefits of CRM, Transaction Marketing vs. Relationship
Relationships Marketing, Relationship Building as a process, Bonding for
Customer Relationships-Financial, Social, customization
and Structural bonds, Ladder of Loyalty Zero Customer
Defection, CRM Framework.
3. Relationship Internal and external relationships, Electronic 6
Marketing and Relationships, Operational, Analytical and Collaborative
Economics of CRM CRM, Market Share vs. Share of Customer, Customer
Lifetime Value, and Activity based costing for CRM
4. CRM in B2C ,B2B CRM in Product and Service Markets, Case Studies, 7
Markets , Customer Characteristics of Business Markets, Participants in the
Experience business buying process, Key Account Management, Using
Management KAM for Customer Segmentation, Customer Retention
Strategy, KAM as a growth and Development S t r a t e g y ,
Customer Value Management in Business Markets,
Importance of CRM in B2B Markets, Customer Emotion,
Customer Knowledge, Reciprocity, Voice of the Customer,
Participation.
***Dominos using different types of content to practice
engagement
5. Components of e Data warehousing, Datamining and CRM, Market Basket 7
CRM solutions Analysis and Retail sector, Campaign Management, Sales
(Overview) and Force Automation, Customer Service and Support,
Role of Digital Corporate Blogs, Online communities, Twitter, Wikis. The
Technologies Experience ecosystem. CEM, Consumer engagement,
segmentation and differentiation.
** Exercise on online campaign management solutions
6. Product offerings in Evaluating Technological solutions for CRM, Comparison 7
the CRM of Siebel, Oracle, MySAP.com and People Soft Enterprise
Marketplace (Overv solutions, Comparison of Talisma, Sales logix, Microsoft
iew) and CRM and Sales notes for small and medium enterprises, Defining
Roadmap a CRM strategy, CRM Implementation Roadmap,
Developing a relationship orientation, Customer centric
marketing and processes, Building organizational
capabilities through internal marketing, Issues in
implementing a technology solution for CRM.
7. Operational issues Process view of CRM, Budgeting for attraction vs. 5
in implementing retention, Learning from customer defections, Customer
CRM, Social Retention Plans, Evaluating Retention programs, Social
CRM Customer Relationship Management, Social Customer
Insights, Social CRM Strategy, and Social Customer
Analytics. * Excercise on Mckinsey’s social media model

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
1. Customer Relationship Management, Ed. Peelan Rob Beltman, 2nd Edition, Pearson, 2014.
2. Ou, Y. C., Verhoef, P. C., & Wiesel, T. The effects of customer equity drivers on loyalty across
services industries and firms. Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, 45(3), 336-356,
2017.
3. Lin, Y. C., Lee, Y. C., & Lin, S. Y. The influence of the personality traits of webcasters on online
games. International Journal of Electronic Customer Relationship Management, 11(1), 94-103, 2017
4. Menzel, C. M., & Reiners, T.Customer relationship management system a case study on small-medium-
sized companies in north Germany. In Information Systems for Small and Medium-sized Enterprises pp.
169-197. Springer, Berlin, Heidelberg, 2014.
5. Customer Relationship Management-A strategic perspective, G. Shainesh, Jagdish Sheth,
Reprinted Macmillan Publishers India Limited, 2009.
6. Mukerjee, K., Customer Relationship Management-A Strategic approach to Marketing, 3rd
Edition Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
7. Customer Relationship Management Concepts and Technologies-Francis Buttle, 3rd Edition
Taylor and Francis, 2015.
8. Berry, Michael, J. A, Linoff, Gordon S., Datamining Techniques for Sales, Marketing and CRM, 2nd
Edition, Wiley Publications, 2007.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B12CS424 Semester Odd Semester VII Session 2020-21
Course Name Algorithm Analysis and Artificial Intelligence
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Varsha Garg

Teacher(s)
Varsha Garg
(Alphabetically)

C401- Analyse algorithm’s time complexities (Master’s method, Recursion Analyse Level
12.1 tree and substitution method- Sorting and Searching algorithms) (Level 4)
C401- Propose solutions for real life computing problems using greedy, Create Level
12.2 divide & conquer, and dynamic programming techniques. (Level 6)
C401- Apply informed and uninformed searching algorithms (A*, Hill Apply Level
12.3 Climbing and Simulated Annealing) in AI related problems. (Level 3)
C401- Solve constraint satisfaction problems and adversarial search Create Level
12.4 algorithms (Level 6)
C401- Apply inference mechanisms( propositional logic , first order Apply Level
12.5 predicate logic, and probabilistic reasoning) (Level 3)
C401- Design and simulate Genetic Algorithms for Optimization. Create Level
12.6 (Level 6)
Sr. Module Chapters Lectures
1. Introduction Time Complexity analysis: Master’s Method. 06
Divide and Conquer methods: Insertion Sort, Merge Sort,
Quick Sort
2. Divide and Conquer and Strassen’s Matrix multiplication , Knapsack Problem; 09
Greedy Algorithms Coin change Problem; Huffman Coding; Activity
Selection; Minimum Spanning tree etc.
3. Dynamic Programming Knapsack Problem; Coin change Problem; Matrix chain 05
Algorithms Multiplication, Longest common subsequence etc.
4. Artificial Intelligence : State Spaces, Uninformed search strategies (BFS, DFS, 07
Problem Spaces and DLS, IDS, Bidirectional search), Informed Search &
Problem Solving by exploration (A*,Heuristic, Local search algorithms,
search online search agents)
5. Constraint satisfaction Constraint satisfaction problems (backtracking, variable 06
and value ordering, local search), Adversarial Search
problems
(games, alpha beta pruning, elements of chance, state of
art games)
6. Propositional Logic Knowledge based agents, PL, FOPL, Syntax and 06
semantics, use, knowledge engineering) , Inference in
FOPL(Propositional vs First order inference
7. Uncertainty Probabilistic reasoning, Bayesian rule, Bayesian network, 03

Inference, Reasoning over time
8. Travelling Salesman Problem, Knapsack Problem 01
Genetic
Algorithms
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25(Attendance-10 Quiz/Assignments/Presentations/Mini-Project- 15)
Total 100
Project based learning: Each student understood on the application of Artificial Intelligence for algorithmic
optimization. They presented the application by a power-point presentation. It can help improve the efficiency of
the real life projects in the real world IT organizations.
TEXT BOOKS
Thomas H. Cormen, Charles E. Leiserson, Ronald L. Rivest, and Clifford Stein , Introduction to
1.
Algorithms, MIT Press, 3rd Edition, 2009
2. Artificial Intelligence – A modern approach by Stuart Russel and Peter Norvig, PHI, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS Journals, Reports, Websites etc. in the IEEE format
3. Artificial Intelligence Review: An International Science and Engineering Journal, Springer
Nunes de Castro, Leandro, “ Nature-Inspired Computing Design, Development, and Applications” IGI
4.
Global, 31-May-2012 - 435 pages
5. Steven Skiena ,The Algorithm Design Manual, Springer; 2nd edition , 2008
Knuth, The art of Computer Programming Volume 1, Fundamental Algorithms, Addison-Wesley
6.
Professional; 3 edition,1997
7. Horowitz and Sahni, Fundamentals of Computer Algorithms, Computer Science Press, 1978
Detailed syllabus
Subject Code 18B12HS211 Semester: ODD Semester VII Session 2020-2021

Months: from Aug 2020 to Dec 2020
Subject Name PSYCHOLOGY OF PERSONALITY
(Names)
(Alphabetically)

Understanding
C401-9.1 Demonstrate a basic understanding of concepts of personality
(Level 2)
C401-9.2 Applying
Apply the concepts of personality in day to day life
(Level 3)
C401-9.3 Examine the different theoretical perspectives and approaches of Analyzing
personality (Level 4)
C401-9.4 Develop solutions for handling problems and achieving goals using Creating
personality concepts, theories and approaches (Level 6)
for the module
1. Introduction to the Definition and perspectives, Approaches, 6
Psychology of Personality Research methods
2. Determinants of Psychology Motivation and Emotion, Interior selves 6

of Personality and interior worlds, Mental abilities
3. Theories Psychoanalytical Theory of Personality: 10

Freud, Neo Freudians: Jung, Horney,
Erikson
4. Approaches Trait Approach: Allport, Cattell, Biological 10

Approach, Social learning , Humanistic
approach
5. Assessment of Personality Interviews, Projective tests, Behavioral 10
assessment, Personality inventories
Total: 42
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignment, Quiz, Oral Questions)

Total 100
1. Schultz, D. P., and Schultz, S. E., Theories of personality. Cengage Learning 11th Ed., 2016.
2. Burger, Jerry M. Personality: an introduction. Cengage Learning, 10th Ed., Cengage

Learning, 2019.
3. Mayer, John D. Personality: A systems approach. Rowman & Littlefield, 2017.

Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B12HS412 Semester Odd Semester VII Session 2020 -2021
Month from Aug 2020 - Dec 2020
Course Name HUMAN RESOURCE ANALYTICS
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr Kanupriya Misra Bakhru

Teacher(s) Dr Kanupriya Misra Bakhru
(Alphabetically)

Understand different analytical techniques used for solving Understand Level
C401-20.1
HR related problems. (C 2)
Apply descriptive and predictive analysis techniques to Applying Level
C401-20.2
understand trends and indicators in human resource data. (C 3)
Analyze key issues related to human resource management Analyze Level
C401-20.3
using analytical techniques. (C 4)
Critically asses and evaluate the outputs obtained from Evaluate Level
C401-20.4
analytical tools and recommend HR related decisions. (C 5)
Create hypotheses, propose solutions and validate using Create Level
C401-20.5
appropriate analytical techniques (C6)

the module
1. Introduction to Understanding the need for mastering and utilizing HR 8
Human Resource analytic techniques, Human capital data storage and ‘big
(HR) Analytics (HR) data’ manipulation, Predictors, prediction and
predictive modeling, Current state of HR analytic
professional and academic training, HR’s Contribution to
Business Value, the Changing Nature of HR.
2. Human Resource Understanding HR metrics and data, Data collection, 8
information tracking, entry, Data availability in the entire Employment
systems and data Lifecycle, Approaches and costs of collecting HR related
data, Analysis software options, Using SPSS, Preparing the
data.
3. Analysis Strategies From descriptive reports to predictive analytics, Statistical 10
significance, Data integrity, Types of data, Categorical
variable types, Continuous variable types, Using
group/team-level or individual-level data, Dependent
variables and independent variables, Introduction of tools
for HR data analysis: Correlation, Regression, Factor
Analysis, Cluster Analysis, Structural equation modeling.
4. Application of Workforce Planning Analytics, Diversity Analytics, Talent 10
Human Resource Sourcing Analytics, Talent Acquisition Analytics, Talent
Analytics Engagement Analytics, Training and Intervention
Analytics, Analytical Performance Management, Retention
Analytics.
5. Future of Human Rise of Employee Behavioral Data, Automated Big Data 6
Resource Analytics Analytics, Big Data Empowering Employee Development,
Quantification of HR, Artificial Intelligence in HR.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project, Quiz)
Total 100
1. Edwards and Edwards, Predictive HR Analytics. Mastering the HR Metric, Kogan Page, Limited, 2019
2. Banerjee, Pandey and Gupta, Practical Applications of HR Analytics, Sage, 2019
3. Bhattacharyya, HR Analytics: Understanding Theories and Applications, Sage, 2017
Isson, Harriott and Jac Fitz-enz, People Analytics in the Era of Big Data: Changing the Way You Attract,
4.
Acquire, Develop, and Retain Talent, Wiley, 2016
Guenole, Ferrar and Feinzig, The Power of People: How Successful Organizations Use Workforce
5.
Analytics To Improve Business Performance, First Edition, Pearson, 2017
Sesil, Applying Advanced Analytics to HR Management Decisions: Methods for Selection, Developing,
6.
Incentive and Improving Collaboration, Pearson, 2014
Detailed Syllabus
Course Name Nanoscience and Technology
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Navendu Goswami

Teacher(s)
Navendu Goswami
(Alphabetically)

Define the Nanoscience and Technology and to know about various Remembering (C1)
C401-4.1 other terminologies and developments involved with Nanoscience and
Technology
Classify the nanomaterials depending on the nature of dimensionalities, Understanding (C2)
C401-4.2 type of materials classes and explain the basic concepts of
nanomaterials
Apply the concepts of Nanoscience for solving the theoretical and Applying (C3)
C401-4.3
numerical problems
Determine the properties of nanomaterials through suitable Analyzing (C4)
C401-4.4
characterization tools

the module
1. Introduction Development of nanoscience and nanotechnology, naturally
occurring nanomaterials, Crystallinity of nanomaterials,
Metallic nanostructures, Semiconductor nanostructures 10
Magnetic nanomaterials, Chemically assisted
nanostructures, Growth in 2-D nanostructures, Carbon
nanomaterials
2. Properties of Surface to volume ratio, Surface states and energy,
Nanomaterials Nanoscale oscillators, Confinement in nanostructures,
Density of States and number of states of 0-, 1-, 2-, 3- 5
dimensional systems, Change in Band structure and gap,
Energy levels, confinement energy and emission in nano,
Fluorescence by QDs, Concept of Single electron transistor
3. Nanomaterials Introduction to synthesis techniques, Top down and bottom
Synthesis up approach, Biological methods, Sol-gel method,
Nucleation and growth, Ball Milling technique, Chemical 10
vapor deposition, Physical Vapor deposition: Concept of
Epitaxy and sputtering, Basics of Photolithography and its
limitations, Soft Lithography and Nanolithography
4. Characterization of Resolving power (Rayleigh and other criteria) of
Nanomaterials microscopes and their limitations for nanostructure
measurements, Concept of Far and Near field and 5
modification by NSOM, Basic principle, Design of setup,
Theory and working, Characterization procedure, result
analysis, Merits/demerits of SEM, TEM, STM, AFM
5. Application of Nanoelectronics, Nanobiotechnology, Catalysis by 10
Nanomaterials nanoparticles, Quantum dot devices, Quantum well devices,
High T c nano-Superconductors, Nanomaterials for memory
application, CNT based devices, MEMS and NEMS
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
Total 100
1. Nanostructures and nanomaterials: synthesis properties and application, Guozhong Cao, Imperial college
press, London.
2. Introduction to nanotechnology, Charles Poole et al J John Wiley & Sons, Singapore.
3. The Handbook of Nanotechnology: Nanometer Structures, Theory, Modeling, and Simulation, A.

Lakhtakia, Spie Press USA.
4.
Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology, Edited by B. Bhushan, Springer Verlag.
Detailed Syllabus
Semester: VII, Session2018

: 2020-2021
-2019
Subject Code 17B1NPH731 Semester : Odd
Month from: July to December
Subject Name Introduction to Quantum Information Processing
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Prof Anirban Pathak and Dr Amit Verma

Teacher(s)
Prof Anirban Pathak and Dr Amit Verma
(Alphabetically)

C401-5.1 Correlate Quantum Information Processing and their applications in Remembering (C1)
quantum communication and computation.
C401-5.2 Explain quantum information, Qubit, quantum gates, and quantum Understanding (C2)
circuits. Their applications in quantum computing, quantum
cryptography and communications.
C401-5.3 Demonstrate the use of basic principles in solving various problems Applying (C3)
related to quantum circuits with the use of linear algebra and many
algorithms and protocols.
C401-5.4 Prove and estimate solution of numerical problems using physical and Evaluating (C5)
mathematical concepts involved with various quantum circuits.
C401-5.5 Design of quantum circuits of desired output for quantum cryptography Creating (C6)
applications.

the module
What is information? Why do we need to know how to
manage the information growth? Is the information
1. Introduction independent of physical laws used to store and process it? 3
What is the present status of the subject and how far can we
go? Definitions of classical information, Quantum
information and their differences.
Introduction to thermodynamics; First and second law of
Thermodynamics
2. thermodynamics; Microstates and Macro states; Entropy, 6
and statistical
Conditional entropy; Entropy as a measure of disorder (up
mechanics
to S = kln (omega)
Basic ideas of classical information theory, Measures of
information (information content and entropy); Maxwell‟s
Demon; Data compression; The binary symmetric channel;
3. Classical theory of error correcting codes; Classical theory of computation; 8
information Universal computer; Turing machine; Computational
complexity; Uncomputable functions; Shortcomings of
classical information theory and necessity of information
theory.
4. Introduction to Basic ideas of quantum mechanics; Probability 8
quantum mechanics interpretation; Measurement problem; Hilbert space;
Schrodinger equation.
Quit; Quantum gates; No cloning theorem (Why quantum
information can’t be perfectly copied); Dense coding;
Quantum Quantum teleportation; Quantum data compression;
information Quantum cryptography; The universal quantum computer;
5. Universal gate; Church-Turing principle; Quantum 9
algorithms; Simulation of Physical systems; Shor‟s
factorization algorithm; Grovers‟s search algorithm;
Experimental quantum information processors; Quantum
error correction.
Computers and
6 Intelligent Basic ideas of quantum computers and intelligent machines. 4
machines
Summary of entire course and a short of introduction to the
7 Summary 2
present goals of quantum information technology.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 [2 Quiz (10 M), Attendance (10 M) and Class performance (5 M)]
Total 100
1. Neil Gershenfeld, The Physics of information technology, Cambridge University Press.
2. H Hirvensalo, Quantum computing, Springer Verlag.
Lecture notes for Physics 229: Quantum Information and Computation, John Preskil
3. http://www.theory.caltech.edu/people/preskill/ph229/#describe
Andew steane, Quantum computing, Rep. Prog. Phys. 61, 117-173 (1998) or quant-ph/9708022
4 http://xxx.lanl.gov
5 P A M Dirac, The principles of Quantum mechnaics, Oxford University Press.
6 David J.C. MacKay, Information Theory, Inference and Learning Algorithm.
7 A. Barenco, Quantum Physics and Computers, Contemporary Physics, 37, 375-89 (1996).
8 C.H. Bennett, Quantum Information and Computattion, Physics Today, Oct., 1995, 24-30 (1995).
9 A. Ekert, P. Hayden, H Inamori, Basic concepts in quantum computation, quant-ph/ 0011013.
10 D. Gottesman and H K Lo, From quantum cheating to quantum security, Physics Today, Nov., 2000.
11 J Preskill, battling decoherence: the fault – tolerent quantum computer. Physics Today, 24-30, June 1999.
12 A. M. Steane and W. Van Dam, Physicists triumph at guess my number, Physics Today, 35-39, Feb. 2000.
13 V. Vedral and M. B. Plenio, Basics of quantum computation, Prog. Quant. Electron, 22 1-39 (1998)
14 A. Zeilinger, Fundamentals of quantum information, Physcs World, 11, March, 1998.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Name Green Energy and Climate Modeling
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Prashant Chauhan

Teacher(s) Prashant Chauhan

Recall the basic information about different energy resources, reserves Remembering (C1)
C401-6.1 and define the problem with fossil fuel
Explain green house effect, modelling of temperature measurement and Understanding (C2)
C401-6.2
physics behind the global warming
Demonstrate the basic principles and designs of different solar collectors Applying (C3)
C401-6.3 and concentrators, and identify the best design/material/location to absorb
maximum solar energy
Analyze the potential of different renewable energy sources like wind, Analyzing (C4)
C401-6.4
ocean and bio mass energy
Compare the output of renewable energy source using different design Evaluating (C5)
C401-6.5
under different conditions/location

No. for the module
Man and energy, world and Indian production /reserve of

1. Introduction 02
conventional energy sources, alternative energy sources.
Physics behind greenhouse effect, Blackbody radiation, layer
model depending on energy flux and temperature at earth
The greenhouse surface, radiation effect on Greenhouse gases, temperature
2. 10
effect structure of the atmosphere, Heat, pressure, wind, feedback
mechanism. Carbon Cycle and Climate, Fossil Fuels, Effect of
Conventional energy sources.
Nature and availability of radiation, estimation of solar energy
radiation. Effect of receiving surface, location and orientation,
3. Solar energy heat transfer consideration relevant to solar energy, 06
Characteristics of materials and surface used in solar energy
absorption. Device for thermal collection and storage
Tidal energy, and its characteristics, tidal energy estimation,
important component of tidal energy plant, single basin plant,
double basin plant, turbine, tidal power plant development in
4. Ocean Energy 06
India, wave energy, design parameters of wave energy plant,
introduction and working of ocean thermal energy conversion,
Introduction to wind energy, Nature, power, forces, conversion

Wind Energy and and estimation. Components of wind energy system types,
5. 10
Bio Mass energy safety and environment, Introduction to bio mass energy,
conversion and utilization of biogas plants and gas fiers
Basics of DT fusion, Magnetic confinement fusion, laser
6. Fusion Energy inertial fusion, present status of fusion reactors and future 6
scope at international and national level
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
Total 100
1. Global Warming : Understanding the forecast by David Archer, Wiley
Kothari D.P. renewable energy resources and emerging technologies, Prentice of India
2.
G D, Non-conventional energy sources, Khanna Publishers
3.
Duffie J A & Beckmann W A, Solar engineering of thermal process, Wiley-International Publication
4.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 20B12PH411 Semester ODD Semester 7th Session 2020 -2021
Course Name SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS, MAGNETS AND DEVICES
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Dinesh Tripathi

Teacher(s)
NA
(Alphabetically)

CO1 Define unusual properties exhibited by superconducting materials Remember Level
and how these properties are important in the development of (Level 1)
superconducting Devices.
CO2 Explain the theories of superconductivity, the basic and operating Understand Level
parameters of superconductors, their classifications and design (Level 2)
limitations for superconductor’s applications-devices.
CO3 Solve the various issues related to fabrication of superconducting Apply Level
wires, tapes, design of superconducting magnets and devices. (Level 3)
CO4 Examine the potential use of low Tc and high Tc superconductors for Analyze Level
designing both small and large scale applications. (Level 4)
Modu Title of the Topics in the Module No. of

le No. Module Lectures
for the
module
Historical review, the state of zero resistance, Perfect Diamagnetism,
Meissner effect, London’s theory, Penetration depth, Concept of
Basic properties
coherence length and origin of surface energy, Intermediate and
1. of
mixed states, Critical currents and critical fields, Outlines of B-C-S 10
Superconducting
theory, concept of energy gap, Levitation force of superconductors,
materials
Tunneling in superconductors: Gaiever tunneling and Josephson
tunneling
Type I and Type II superconductors, Classification of
Classifications superconducting materials, Conventional superconductor: metals (Pb,
2. & synthesis of Nb, Ti etc.), metal alloys (NbTi, Nb3Sn etc.) and Inter-metallic
10
Superconducting superconductors (MgB2); Non-conventional Superconductors: Oxide
materials based superconductors (BSCCO, YBCO), iron pnictides
superconductors, Fabrication of superconducting wires & tapes.
Flux flow, Flux pinning, Pinning force, Magneto-thermal Instabilities

in Type II superconductors, Flux Jumps, Stabilization Criterion:
Design of
3. Cryostatic and dynamic stabilization, Manufacture of long length
Superconducting 12
superconducting multifilamentary wires, Design and fabrication of
magnet
superconducting magnets, Magnetic field calculations, current leads,
Persistent switches, and superconducting magnet energization.
Josephson junction in magnetic field, Superconducting Quantum
4. Superconducting Interference Devices (SQUIDS) and its applications, Superconductive
8
devices Switches, Infrared detectors Superconducting energy storage system
(SMES), Fault current limiters (SFCL), Maglev trains
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignment (5), Quiz (5), Attend. (10) and Class performance (5 ))
Total 100

1. Roseins & Rhodrih, Introduction to Superconductivity, 2nd Edition, Pergamon Press plc
Vladimir Z. Kresin & Stuart A. Wolf, Fundamentals of Superconductivity, Springer Science & Business
2.
Media
3. Williams, Applied Superconductivity , Academic press New York.
M. N. Wilson, Superconducting Magnet Design (Monographs on Cryogenics), Clarendon Press, Oxford
4.
Science Publications
Applied Numerical Methods (17B1NMA732)
Course Description
Course Code 17B1NMA732 Semester - Odd Semester VII Session 2020-21

Course Name Applied Numerical Methods
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr Yogesh Gupta and Dr Neha Ahlawat
Teacher(s)
Dr Yogesh Gupta, Dr Neha Ahlawat, Dr. Pankaj Srivastava
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
solve a single and a system of non-linear equations and analyze the Applying Level
C401-8.1
convergence of the methods. (C2)
explain finite and divided difference formulae for numerical Understanding
C401-8.2
interpolation. Level (C3)
apply numerical differentiation and integration in engineering Applying Level
C401-8.3
applications. (C3)
solve a system of linear equations using direct and iterative methods Applying Level
C401-8.4
with their applications in various engineering problems (C3)
solve eigen-value and corresponding eigen- vector problem for a Analyzing Level
C401-8.5
square matrix (C4)
evaluate the solutions of initial and boundary value problems using Evaluating Level
C401-8.6
various numerical methods. (C5)
No. for the module
1. Roots of Non-linear Concept of round-off and truncation errors. 6
Equations Iterative methods to find roots for one or more
nonlinear equations with their convergence
2. Interpolation and Interpolating polynomial, Lagrange formula with 7
Approximation error, Formulae for equi-spaced points, Divided
differences, Spline interpolation, Least square
approximation
3. Numerical Approximation of derivatives, Newton-Cote’s 7
Differentiation and formulae, Gauss-Legendre quadrature formulae,
Integration Double integration
4. Numerical Linear Gauss-elimination and LU-Decomposition 10
Algebra Methods. Iterative methods: Jacobi and Gauss
Seidel Methods and their convergence. Power’s
method for the largest eigen-value, Jacobi and
Householder’s methods for eigen-values of real
symmetric matrices
5. Numerical Solutions Runge-Kutta and predictor corrector methods for 12
of ODE and PDE IVPs, Finite difference methods for BVPs,
Shooting methods, Numerical solutions of
parabolic and elliptic partial differential
equations by Finite Difference Methods
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Quiz, Assignments, PBL)
Total 100
1. Gerald, C.F. and Wheatley P.O., Applied Numerical Analysis, 7th Ed., Pearson Education, 2004.
2. Conte, S.D. and deBoor, C., Elementary Numerical Analysis, 3rd Ed., McGraw-Hill, 1980.
3. Gupta, R.S., Elements of Numerical Analysis, 2nd Ed., Cambridge University Press, 2015.
Jain, M.K., Iyengar, S.R.K. and Jain, R.K., Numerical Methods for Scientific and Engineering
4.
Computation, 6th Ed., New Age International, New Delhi, 2014.
5. Smith, G.D., Numerical Solution of Partial Differential Equations, 2nd Ed., Oxford, 1978.
Generalized Fuzzy Set Theory with Applications (19B12MA412)
Course Description
Course Code 19B12MA412 Semester Odd Semester VII Session 2020-21

Course Name Generalized Fuzzy Set Theory with Applications
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Mohd. Sarfaraz
Teacher(s)
Dr. Mohd. Sarfaraz, Dr. Amit Srivastava
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Apply the concept of Intuitionistic fuzzy sets in defining new
C401-21.1 information measures and in medical diagnosis and pattern recognition C5
problems.
C401-21.2 Explain various hesitant fuzzy and generalized fuzzy operations. C2
C401-21.3 Describe various aggregation and generalized aggregation operators. C2
Apply the concept of Pythagorean fuzzy sets in defining new
C401-21.4 information measures and in multiple attribute decision making C5
(MADM) problems.
C401-21.5 Illustrate Fuzzy and possibility measures with evidence theory. C3
the module
1. Intuitionistic Intuitionistic fuzzy sets (IFSs) – Basic definitions 10
fuzzy sets and operations. Measures of entropy, similarity
and discrimination between Intuitionistic fuzzy
sets (IFSs). Applications of IFSs in medical
diagnosis and pattern recognition.
2. Hesitant fuzzy sets Hesitant fuzzy sets – concepts, basic operations 10
and basic properties. Extensions of hesitant fuzzy
sets – Dual Hesitant fuzzy sets, Interval valued
Hesitant fuzzy sets, Triangular Fuzzy Hesitant
Fuzzy Sets, Hesitant Fuzzy Linguistic Term Sets.
3. Aggregation Aggregation Operators – concepts, basic 8
Operators operations and basic properties, weighted
aggregation operators, Ordered weighted
averaging operator, Induced ordered weighted
averaging operator.
4. Pythagorean fuzzy Pythagorean fuzzy sets - concepts, basic 8
sets operations and basic properties, Hesitant
Pythagorean fuzzy sets and their aggregation
operators in multiple attribute decision making.
5. Dempster-Shafer Dempster-Shafer Theory as an alternative to 6

Theory Bayesian networks. Frame of discernment, Belief
function, Plausibility and basic probability
assignments.

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25(Quiz, Assignments, PBL)
Total 100
1. Atanassov, Krassimir T., Intuitionistic Fuzzy Sets -Theory & Applications, Springer, 1999.
2. Xu, Zeshui, Hesitant Fuzzy Sets Theory, Springer Verlag, 2014.

Bhargava, A. K., Fuzzy Set Theory, Fuzzy Logic and Their Applications, S. Chand & Company
3.
Pvt. Ltd., 2013.
Cengiz Kahraman, Uzay Kaymak, Adnan Yazici, (Editors), Fuzzy Logic in Its 50th Yea New
4. Developments, Directions and Challenges, Studies in Fuzziness and Soft Computing, Springer
Verlag, Vol. 341, 2016.
Huchang Liao, Zeshui Xu, Hesitant Fuzzy Decision Making Methodologies and Applications,
5.
Uncertainty and Operations Research, Springer Verlag, 2017.
Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 16BINEC831 Semester: Even Semester 8thEvenSession 2020-21
Subject Name Sonar system and acoustic imaging
Faculty Coordinator(s) Kapil Dev Tyagi

(Names)
Teacher(s) Kapil Dev Tyagi
S. NO. DESCRIPTION COGNITIVE LEVEL

(BLOOMS
TAXONOMY)
C434-5.1 define and explain sonar terminology and

choose parameters for side scan sonar according to Applying
the required azimuth and range resolutions. (Level C3)
C434-5.2 select parameters for synthetic aperture sonar (SAS) Applying
as per the design requirements. (Level C3)
C434-5.3 analyze the continuous time frequency modulation Analyzing

(CTFM) technique for sonar applications. (Level C4)
C434-5.4 apply and discover signal processing application for Analyzing

ship speed measurement system like JANUS. (Level C4)
C434-5.5 take part in the development of simple array design Analyzing
for acoustic localization. (Level C4)
No. of Lectures
Module No. Subtitle of the Module Topics in the module
for the module
Introduction to sonar system. Side scan
Side Scan and Sector Scan
1. sonar, sector scan sonar, beam-forming 6
Sonar
methods in sector scans sonar.
Swept frequency delay line

scanning, phase beam-forming,
2. Modulation Scanning 8
modulation scanning, multistage
beam-forming, DFT beam-former.
Limitation of scanning sonar,
Basic of synthetic aperture sonar,
matched filtering, Doppler shift
aspects, range resolution in
3. Synthetic aperture sonar 8
synthetic aperture sonar, minimum
sampling rate for synthetic
aperture sonar, spot lights, and
squints in synthetic aperture sonar.
Continuous time frequency
modulation technique (CTFM),
blind time problem in CTFM,dual
4. CTFM 8
demodulator CTFM technique,
phase difference radial projection
method.
Estimation of moving target speed in
Signal processing for Ship water,GPS, DGPS, SQUID, Doppler log,
5. 6
speed measurement JANUS, Issues in Doppler log methods,
correlation-log,
Localization using time delay

estimation, Beacons,
Pingers.Localization using three
6. Acoustic localization 6
hydrophones, Localization using
four hydrophones, Non-planar
array using five hydrophones.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Practical implementation of theory based learning: On each topic covered in the course an
experiment is designed and assigned to the students,so that the concept/algorithm covered can
be written in the code form in MATLAB software.
Project based learning: Group of 3 students are formed to solve simulation based coding
problems. This helps in deeper understating of the theory and motivate students to think on
real world applications and problems. Practical knowledge acquired by the students during
this course will boost their confidence and clarity on various topics and this ultimately help
them in placement interviews and further motivate them to be an entrepreneur.After schemes
like “Atmanirbhar Bharat”many project in the area of sonar will provide many
entrepreneurialopportunities to the students specialized in the sonar system.
List of Simulation Experiments in Sonar system and acoustic
imaging
Ex1. Generate the sine wave of 1 kHz with sampling frequency of 10 kHz
with constant amplitude and with initial phase of (i) 0 rad, (ii) pi/3
radians, (iii) pi/6 radians. Calculate the FFT of these signals and plot the
magnitude and phase of these signals. Scale the frequency axis in Hz/kHz
(take the Y scale normalized with maximum amplitude).
Ex2. Linear Chirp signal of with starting frequency of 100 Hz ending
frequency of 2 KHz and duration of 1 sec.
Ex3. Generate Sine waves of 1 kHz with sampling frequency of 10 kHz
and amplitude decreasing exponentially with different slops.
Ex4.Calculate the FFT of the signal plotted in Q1 a. b. and c. and scale
the frequency axis in Hz/kHz (take the Y scale normalized with
maximum amplitude).
Ex5.Draw the radiation pattern of a N element uniform array as a
function of angle. Reference document is given in the study material.
Ex6.Let Fourier transform corresponding to a signal contains 10 impulses
starting at 45 kHz at a gap of 5 kHz. Plot the time domain signal
corresponding to this Fourier transform.
Ex7.Generate a signal s(t) consisting of three linear chirp signals. Each
chirp signal c(t) has starting frequency of 100 Hz, ending frequency of 2
KHz and duration of 1 sec. In s(t) the first chirp signal c(t) has zero delay,
the second has 100 ms delay and the third one has 300 ms delay. Take
sampling rate 1 MHz. Correlate this composite signal with the chirp
signal c(t) .
Ex8.Generate a signal consisting of the following signals A. a chirp
signal c(t) as mentioned above B. a 2 second delayed signal of 50 KHz
with duration 20 us. C. Series of 3 second delayed pulses (10) of 65 kHz
of duration 31.6 us. Plot the spectrogram take averaging duration of 50
us. Take sampling rate at 1 MHz.
1. Lawrence J. Ziomek,An Introduction to Sonar Systems Engineering, Taylor & Francis Inc,
2017.
2. A. D. Waite, Sonar for Practising Engineers, 3rdedition, John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
3. Authors: Au, Whitlow W.L.The Sonar of Dolphins, Springer-Verlag New York, ISBN 978-1-
4612-4356-4, 1993.
Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 17B1NEC735 Semester Even Semester 8th Session 2020-21
Subject Name Information Theory and Applications
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Alok Joshi

(Names)
Teacher(s)
Dr. Alok Joshi
(Alphabetically)

C434-6.1 Understand the concept of probability, its relation with information, Understanding Level (C2)
entropy, and their application in communication systems.
C434-6.2 Identify theoretical and practical requirements for implementing and Analysing Level (C4)
designing compression algorithms.
C434-6.3 Analyze the relationship between bandwidth and capacity of Analysing Level (C4)
communication channels and its importance in real life communication
systems.
C434-6.4 Analyze the need for channel coding in digital communication systems. Analysing Level (C4)
C434-6.5 Generate error correcting codes for error detection and correction. Analysing Level (C4)
for the module
1. Review of Basic Probability Probability spaces. Random variables. 3

Distributions and densities. Functions of
random variables. Statistical Averages.
Inequalities of Markov and Chebyshev. Weak
law of large numbers.
2. Information Measure Discrete entropy. Joint and conditional 5
entropies. Entropy in the continuous case.
Maximization of continuous entropy. Entropy
of a bandlimited white Gaussian process.
3. Data Compression Uniquely decipherable and instantaneous 4
codes. Kraft- McMillan inequality. Noiseless
coding theorem. Construction of optimal codes.
4. Data Transmission Discrete memoryless channel. Mutual 5
information and channel capacity. Shannon’s
fundamental theorem and its weak converse.
Capacity of a bandlimited AWGN channel.
Limits to communication – Shannon limit.
5. Error Control Coding Coding for reliable digital transmission and 3
storage. Types of codes. Modulation and
coding. ML decoding. Performance measures.
6. Linear Block Codes Algebra Background, Groups, Fields, Binary 8

field arithmetic. Vector Spaces over GF(2).
Generator and parity check matrices. Syndrome
and error detection. Standard array and
JIIT , Noida
syndrome decoding. Hamming codes.
7. Cyclic Codes Polynomial representation, Systematic 6

encoding. Cyclic encoding, Syndrome
decoding.
8. Convolutional Codes Generator Sequences. Structural properties. 8

Convolutional encoders. Optimal decoding of
convolutional codes- the Viterbi algorithm.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
Total 100
Project Based Learning: Students will learn about the design and implementation of compression
algorithms as well as error-correcting codes with the help of assignments. Using MATLAB the above
concepts can be utilized for project too.
1. R.B. ASH: Information Theory, Dover, 1990.
2. R. BOSE: Information theory, coding and cryptography, Mcgraw Hill 2016.
3. R.W. YEUNG: Information Theory and Network Coding, Springer, 2010.
4. S. LIN & D.J. COSTELLO: Error Control Coding, 2nd Edn, Pearson, 2011.
5. T.K. MOON: Error Correction Coding, Wiley, 2006.
JIIT , Noida
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B12EC411 Semester Even Semester VIII Session 2020 -2021
Course Name Introduction to IOT
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Gaurav Verma (62)

Teacher(s)
Mr.Abhay Kumar (128)
(Alphabetically)
Outline the basic concepts of IOT with networking and protocol

C434-7.1 Understand (C2)
considerations in IOT scenario.
Identify various IOT hardware platforms and their utilization with

C434-7.2 Apply (C3)
various sensors and actuators.
Experiment the basic concepts of python programming and make use

C434-7.3 of them in image processing, data analytics and machine learning Apply (C3)
applications.
Examine various case studies and cloud platforms in an IOT scenario

C434-7.4 Analyze (C4)
for monitoring, control and analysis.

the module
1. IOT Basics and its Introduction to IOT (People Connecting to Things, Things 6
Importance Connecting to Things, Definition of IOT, History of IOT),
IOT Components (Sensors & Actuators, Things,
Communications, Networks, The Internet, Protocol Stack),
Evolution of Connected Devices, IOT Applications, IOT
Companies, Baseline Technologies (Machine to Machine
(M2M) Communication, Cyber Physical Systems (CPS),
Web of Things (WOT)), Address Crunch in IOT, IOT
Terminologies (IOT Node, LAN, MAN & WAN, IOT
Gateway & Proxy), IOT Network Configuration (Gateway
Prefix Allotment, Impact of Mobility on Addressing,
Concept of Tunneling, Multi-homing), IPv4 Versus IPv6.
2. Basics of IOT Introduction to IOT Networking, Networking Standards and 6
Networking Technologies (Network Access & Physical Layer, Internet
Layer, Transport Layer, The application layer), IOT
Networking Protocols, Network Access and Physical layer
IoT Network Technologies ((LPWAN (Low Power Wide
Area Network), Cellular, Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE),
RFID, NFC, Zigbee, Wifi, Ethernet), Internet layer IoT
network technologies (IPv6, 6LoWPAN, and RPL),
Application layer IoT network technologies (HTTP,
HTTPS, MQTT, AMQP, and XMPP), IoT networking
considerations and challenges, IoT Platforms Capabilities.
3. IoT supported Introduction to Arduino (Different Arduino boards, Arduino 12
Hardware platforms Uno board description and its pin configuration, Arduino
(Arduino) & data IDE and program uploading, different functions related to
visualization using GPIOs and special functions (PWM and Serial
cloud. communication), Interfacing with Arduino using processing
language (LED, Switch, Seven Segment, LCD, DC Motor,
Relay, IR, LDR and DHT11 sensor), Interrupts, use of
simulator and compiler, basics of HTML, Arduino
supported IOT modules (Ethernet &Wifi Shield) and their
configuration, Monitoring of sensor data on cloud and Web
based controlling of actuators.
4. Introduction to Introduction to python, python IDE, Data types, various 10
Python, Data programming constructs (loops, if, else etc.), operators,
Analytics, Machine functions, modules, data handling (pandas), file operations,
Learning and Case Image operations (PIL-pillow), data plotting in python
Studies. (Matplotlib), basics of machine learning in python (Scikit)
and related case studies.
5. IoT supported Introduction to Raspberry pi (Raspberry pi different model 8
Hardware platforms comparison, Pin Configuration, Raspberry Pi operating
(Raspberry pi) & its system choices, Set up your Raspberry pi, Raspbian OS,
Applications Remote Access using SSH, Remote Access using
TightVNC), Interfacing with Raspberry pi using python and
use of open source libraries (LED, Switch, LCD, DC
Motor, Relay, IR, LDR and DHT11 sensor), IOT
Applications (Water management system, Weather
monitoring station on cloud, Smart Agriculture System,
Smart Energy meter, Pollution Monitoring system, Smart
Dustbin management system.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignments, Attendance & Quiz)
Total 100
Project Based Learning Component: This course teaches IoT using a building block approach, which allows
one to visualize the requirement of an IoT framework and then to design it efficiently. IoT cuts across different
application domain verticals ranging from civilian to defence sectors. These domains include agriculture, space,
healthcare, manufacturing, construction, water, and mining, which are presently transitioning their legacy
infrastructure to support IoT. The course will teach IoT based system design using IoT boards, namely Arduino,
ESP8266, and Raspberry Pi. The course will introduce various interfacing techniques for popular input devices
including sensors, output devices and communication protocols. It will also teach effective embedded
programming techniques in python with application to image processing and Machine Learning. It will have a
significant practical component, which will be achieved by providing real time demonstrations of various case
studies based on IoT.
"The Internet of Things: Enabling Technologies, Platforms, and Use Cases", by Pethuru Raj and Anupama
1.
C. Raman (CRC Press)
2. "Internet of Things: A Hands-on Approach", by ArshdeepBahga and Vijay Madisetti (Universities Press)
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B12EC413 Semester Even Semester VIII Session 2020 -
2021
Month from Jan-June
Course Name Digital Control System
Credits 4 Contact Hours 3L+1T
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Ritesh Kumar Sharma

Teacher(s) Ritesh Kumar Sharma
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
C433-2.1 To represent the systems in the Z domain and in state space representation. Remembering
Level(C1)
C433-2.2 To analyze transient and steady state behaviors of linear discrete time control Analyzing
systems with modified transfer function.
Level (C4)
C433-2.3 To understand and gain knowledge in stability analysis of digital control Understanding
systems. Level (C2)
C433-2.4 To Design Digital Control Systems Designing

Level ( C6)
Module Subtitle of the Topics No. of Lectures

No. Module
1. Review of Z z transform and inverse z transform . 3
transform Relationship between s- plane and z- plane-
Difference equation .
Solution by recursion and z-transform.
2. Review of state Review of state space techniques to continuous data 5
space techniques systems, state
space representation of discrete time systems-
Transfer function from state space model-various
canonical forms- conversion of transfer function
model to state space model-characteristics equation-
solution to discrete state equations.
3. Introduction to Basic Elements of discrete data control systems, 8
Digital Control advantages of discrete data control systems,
System examples. Signal conversion & processing: Digital
signals & coding, data conversion & quantization,
sample and hold devices, Mathematical modeling of
the sampling process; Data reconstruction and
filtering of sampled signals: Zero order hold, first
order Hold.
4. Analysis of Digital Digital control systems- Pulse transfer function . z 8
Control Systems transform
analysis of closed loop and open loop systems-
Modified z- transfer function- Stability of linear digital
control systems and Jury’s stability test
5. Stability tests Stability tests- Steady state error analysis- Root loci - 8
Frequency domain analysis- Bode plots- Gain margin
and phase margin.
6. State feedback Controllability and Observability - Response between 5
concept sampling
instants using state variable approach-Pole placement
using state feedback .
7. Digital System Observer Design for digital control, Pole placement design based 5
Design on input-output models.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Project Based Learning: Students will learn about the analysis and Design of Digital controllers with
the help of assignments/simulations based projects. Additionally, students in group sizes of two-three
are required to prepare a review of any one application of the Digital Control System using one or more
research publications.
1. B. C. Kuo , “Digital control systems” (Second Edition) , Oxford University Press,2007.
2. K. Ogatta, “Discrete Time control systems ”, 2nd ed. PHI),1995
3. M. Gopal, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, 3rd Edition, TMH, Sep-2008.
4. G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell, M. Workman, Digital Control of Dynamic Systems, 3rd Edition, Longman, 1998.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B12EC417 Semester Even Semester 8th Session 2020-2021

Course Name Satellite Communication
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Abhishek Kashyap

Teacher(s)
Dr. Abhishek Kashyap, Dr. Ajay Kumar
(Alphabetically)

Define Satellite and its historical background, outline the basic
concepts of Satellite communications, recall the Kepler's laws of Remembering Level (C1)
C433-4.1
planetary motion
Develop the equations of the orbit, explain the satellite launching and
C433-4.2 launch vehicles and outline terminology of earth-orbiting Satellites.
Demonstrate the space segment, antenna subsystem, estimate different

Creating Level (C6)
C433-4.3 parameters and design uplink and downlink.
Apply various multiple access techniques for satellite communication

and analyze Noise and Bandwidth. Also Interpret applications of Evaluating Level (C5)
C433-4.4
various types of satellites established in different earth orbits.

the module
1. Introduction Introduction to the Subject and its Importance. Contents. 4
Books and Reading References. Evaluation.
Space Environment. Artificial Satellites. Communication
Satellites.
2. Satellite Orbits and Orbital Mechanics. Orbits Employed for Satellite 8
Frequency Bands Communication like LEO, MEO & GEO, their Merits and
Demerits. Satellite Launching. Launch Vehicles. Radio
Wave Propagation Effects. Communication Window.
3. Communication Geostationary Communication Satellite-Transponder. 10
Satellites and Link Ground Station System. Communication Link-
Design Consideration, Calculation and Design. Power and
Bandwidth Limitations and Budget.
4. Modulation Modulation and Demodulation Techniques. Performance 6
Techniques Analysis- Noise and Bandwidth.
5. Multiple Access Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA), Time 8
Division Multiple Access (TDMA) and Code Division
Multiple Access (CDMA)
6. Different VSAT. Navigational Satellites. Broadcasting Satellites. 5
Communication Remote Sensing Satellites. Low and Medium Earth Orbit
Satellite Systems Satellites. INSAT. INTELSAT.
7. Some DBS TV. Multimedia Transmission Related Issues, 4
Communication Advantages& Bit Rates for Digital TV, HDTV, Bandwidth
Satellite Considerations and Introduction to Compression Standards.
Applications Convergence of Communication, Introduction to IPTV.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Project based learning: Each student in a group of 3 students select a topic related to latest development
in the technology of satellite communication, This method of learning will help students to understand
latest development in the industry like ISRO, once they land in to entry it will be a simple task to
design and implement any given task. Knowledge acquired during this course will boost their
confidence and clarity while attending any Interview related to placement activities and establishment
of their own application based startup company related with latest and cutting edge technologies
1. T. Pratt, C.W. Bostian and J.E. Allnut, Satellite Communications, 2 Ed, John Wiley & Sons (Asia), 2003
2. Dennis Roddy, Satellite Communications, 4 Ed, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2006
G. Maral & M. Bousquet, Satellite Communications Systems- Systems, Techniques and Technology, 4
3.
Ed, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.
4. Richard Brice, Newness Guide to Digital TV, 2Ed, 2003.
5. Gerard O’ Driscoll, Next Generation IPTV Services and Technologies, John Wiley & Sons, 2008
Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 19B12EC412 Semester Semester 8th Session 2020-2021

Even Month from January to June
Subject Name Advance Topics in Wireless Communications (19B12EC412)
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Vivek Dwivedi
Course Objectives: At the end of the course student should be able to

Blooms Taxonomy
C434-3.1 Explain basics of MIMO systems and need of diversity Remembering

schemes (Level I)
C434-3.2 Analyze the effect of fading in the wireless medium and Analyzing
mathematical modeling of fading channels (Level IV)
C434-3.3 Analyze channel capacity expression of MIMO systems Analyzing

(Level IV)
C434-3.4 Evaluate performance of the MIMO detection system Evaluating
andneed of UWB systems (Level V)
Module No. Subtitle of Topics No. of

the Mod- Lectures
ule
1. Introduc- Evolution of wireless generation technologies and their 8

tion to transition challenges. Need and expectation of next
generation of wireless technology. Basic concept of
MIMO random variable,Introduction of Wireless communica-
systems tion systems, diversity-multiplexing, trade-off, and
transmit diversity schemes. Concept of SISO, SIMO,
MISO and MIMO systems.
2. Wireless Channel Fading and Distribution: Small 10

scale, large scale and multipath fading channels. Ray-
Fading leigh, Rician, Exponential, Nakagami-m, Lognormal
Environ- and α-κ-µ distributions.
ments
3. Channel Ergodic and deterministic Capacity for SISO and 10
capacity of MIMO channels, Capacity of i.i.d., separately corre-
lated and keyhole Rayleigh fading MIMO channels.
MIMO Power allocation in MIMO systems: Uniform, adaptive
systems and near optimal power allocation.
4. Space time Space-Time codes: Advantages, code design crite- 10

codes and ria, Alamouti space-time codes, SER analysis
of Alamouti space-time code over fading channels.
MIMO MIMO detection: ML, ZF, MMSE based detection.
detection
5. UWB Definition of UWB, FEC mask, properties and limita- 4

Technolo- tion of UWB signal. UWB channel Modelling: IEEE
gy 802.15.3a and IEEE 8032.15.4a standards.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Project based learning: students will learn about the multiple input multiple output (MIMO) wire-
less communications systems to improve the system performance. Further, they will study about vari-
ous fading distributions to analyze the effect of channel over signal. Additionally, student will study
and design the space time codes and MIMO detectors to mitigate the effect of fading in channels.
1. R. S. Kshetrimayum, Fundamentals of MIMO Wireless Communications, Cambridge

2. S. Emami, UWB Communication Systems: Conventional and 60 GHz, 2013
3. Chung G. Kang, Jaekwon Kim, Wŏn-yŏng Yang, and Yong Soo Cho, MIMO-OFDM
Wireless Communications with MATLAB, John Wiley & Sons, 2010.
4. Mohinder Jankiraman-Space-Time Codes and MIMO Systems,Springer New York,

2004.
5. B. Kumbhani and R. S. Kshetrimayum, MIMO Wireless Communications over Gener-

alized Fading Channels, 2017.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 19B12EC414 Semester : Even Semester: 8th Session 2020 -2021
Course Name Natural Language processing with Deep Learning
Faculty Coordinator(s) B Suresh

(Names)
Teacher(s)
B Suresh
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Understanding the problems associated with Natural language

C433-5.1 Understanding
processing and recent technological developments.
(Level C2 )
Applying deep learning approaches to improve the performance

C433-5.2 Applying
NLP tasks.
(Level C3)
Applying
Develop the basic concepts of python programming to NNM
C433-5.3
models which can deal with NLP.
(Level C3)
Analyzing
Analyzing performance of various neural networks in the NLP
C433-5.4
applications.
(Level C4)
the module
1. Introduction and Word2Vec The Skip-Gram Model Efficient Estimation 5
Word Vectors of Word Representations in Vector Space, Distributed
Representations of Words and Phrases and their
Compositionality Word Vectors 2 and Word Senses
Implementation of these module topics using Python
2. Word2Vec - The Efficient Estimation of Word Representations in 10
Skip-Gram Model Vector, Space Distributed Representations of Words
and Phrases and their Compositionality Word Vectors
2 and Word Senses

3. GloVe: Global Improving Distributional Similarity with Lessons 11
Vectors for Word Learned from Word Embeddings, Evaluation methods
Representation for unsupervised word embeddings, A Latent Variable
Model Approach to PMI-based Word
Embeddings,Linear Algebraic Structure of Word
Senses, with Applications to Polysemy On the
Dimensionality of Word Embedding. Word Window
Classification, Neural Networks, and Matrix Calculus
4. Backpropagation Learning Representations by Backpropagating Errors 9
and Computation Derivatives, Backpropagation, and Vectorization
Graphs understand backprop Linguistic Structure: Dependency
Parsing Incrementality in Deterministic Dependency
Parsing A Fast and Accurate Dependency Parser using
Neural Networks Dependency Parsing Globally
Normalized Transition-Based Neural Networks

5. N-gram Language The Unreasonable Effectiveness of Recurrent Neural 10
Models Networks Sequence Modeling: Recurrent and
Recursive Neural Nets On Chomsky and the Two
Cultures of Statistical Learning, Vanishing Gradients
and Fancy RNNs

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Project based learning: Each student in a group of 3-4 select a topic related to latest development in the
technology and write done Algorithms and their corresponding code, This method of learning will help
students to understand latest development in the industry once they land in to entry it will be a simple
task to design and implement any given task. Knowledge acquired during this course will boost their
confidence and clarity while attending any Interview related to placement activities and establishment
of their own application based startup company related with latest and cutting edge technologies
Deep Learning in Natural Language Processing 1st ed. 2018 Edition
1.
by Li Deng (Editor), Yang Liu (Editor)
Neural Network Methods in Natural Language Processing (Synthesis Lectures on Human
2. Language Technologies) Paperback – April 17, 2017 by Yoav Goldberg (Author), Graeme Hirst
(Editor)
Natural Language Processing with Python: Analyzing Text with the Natural Language Toolkit 1st
3. Edition, Kindle Edition by Steven Bird (Author), Ewan Klein (Author), Edward Loper
(Author)Dec 12, 2018
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code Semester Odd (specify Semester VIII Session 2020-21
19B12EC415 Odd/Even) Month from Jan to June
Course Name Digital Integrated Circuits in Deep Submicron Technology
Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Shruti Kalra

(Names)
Teacher(s)
(Alphabetically)

Recall the important concepts of logic gates, static input-output Remembering
C434.1
characteristics, noise margins and propagation delay Level (C1)
Understanding
C434.2 Illustrate the key issues in deep submicron technology node.
Level (C2)
Identify and solve static and dynamic design issues for high speed Applying
C434.3
combinational and sequential circuits. Level (C3)
Analyzing
C434.4 Analysis and design of VLSI memories
Level (C4)
Module No. Title of the Module Topics in the Module No. of Lectures
for the module
1. Introduction to deep Review of digital logic gate design and 6
submicron digital IC Design digital integrated circuit design, MOS
transistor operation in deep submicron
technology.
2. MOS inverter circuits Analytical modeling of CMOS inverter in 9
submicron technology node, Pseudo
NMOS inverters, sizing inverters.
3. Static MOS gate circuits Analytical modeling of CMOS gate 9
circuits, complex CMOS gates,
Multiplexer circuits, D Flip flop and
latches
4. High speed CMOS logic Load capacitance calculations, improved 7
design delay calculations with input slope, gate
sizing for optimal path delay, optimizing
paths with logical effort.
5. Transfer gate and dynamic Pass Transistor, capacitive feedthrough, 6
logic design charge sharing, sources of charge loss, TG
logic, Dynamic D-Latch
6. Introduction to semiconductor MOS Decoders, Static RAM cell design, 5
memory design. SRAM column I/o circuitry.

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Project based component: The student will be able to understand the different design steps required to carry out a
complete digital VLSI (Very-Large-Scale Integration) design at submicron technology node. Students in group of 2-3 will
complete a design project having a set of objective criteria and design constraints.

1. Veendrick, Harry. Deep-submicron CMOS ICs: from basics to ASICs. Springer Publishing
Company, Incorporated, 2015.
2. Hodges, David A. Analysis And Design Of Digital Integrated Circuits, In Deep Submicron
Technology (special Indian Edition). Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2005.
Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 20B12EC413 Semester Semester VIII

(Even) Session – 2020- 2021
Month Jan –June 2021
Subject Name Basics of Antenna and Wave Propagation
Credits 4 Contact Hours 4 (3 - 1 – 0)
Faculty Coordinator(s) Vishal Narain Saxena
(Names) Teacher(s) (Alphabetically) Vishal Narain Saxena
Course Objectives:
• To introduce the fundamental principles of different types of antennas and their
applications.
• Emphasis will be on dipole antennas, loop antennas, antenna arrays, aperture antennas
and microstrip patch antennas, their design considerations for use in wireless
communication systems.
• Learn how to characterize antennas and use antenna design for communications, radar,
remote sensing systems.
• Emphasis on modern antennas like Reconfigurable antenna, Active antenna, Dielectric
antennas, Electronic band gap structure and propagation of radio waves

Blooms Taxonomy
CO1 Recall the concepts of Electromagnetic field theory, classify different Understanding
types of antennas, illustrate antenna parameters and demonstrate the (Level II)
effect on antenna parameters due to changes in the physical dimensions.
CO2 Compare Broadband Antennas, Frequency Independent antennas and Applying
Aperture antennas. Explain Dipole antenna and their characteristic, loop (Level III)
antenna
CO3 Design Array Antennas and identify the E and H fields for the antennas. Creating
Design Reconfigurable antenna, Active antenna, Dielectric antennas and (Level VI)
measure radiation pattern, polarization and VSWR.
CO4 Define terminology relevant to mode of propagation and examine the Analyzing
propagation of radio waves in different atmospheres. (Level IV )
Module Subtitle of the Topics No. of

No. Module Lectures
1. Radiation Antenna types, radiation, use of potential functions, radiated 8

Fundamentals & fields, far fields, Radiation from current element, Infinitesimal
Antenna Parameters dipole, antenna parameters, radiation pattern, Directivity,
numerical evaluation of directivity, Gain, efficiency,
impedance, Loss resistance, Polarization, equivalent area,
effective area and its relation to gain
2. Linear Antennas Loop Linear antennas, current distribution Total power, radiation 7
Antennas resistance, Short-dipole, center-fed dipole, Half-wave dipole,
dipole characteristics, folded dipole, Small loop antenna,
Loop characteristics
3. Antenna Arrays Antenna arrays, Broadside and End-fire arrays, Hansen- 7
Woodyard array, Binomial arrays, Array theory Scan
blindness in array theory ,Aperiodic arrays
4. Broadband Antennas, Yagi-Uda arrays, helical antennas Log-periodic antenna 7

Frequency Fields as sources of radiation; Horn antennas, Reflector
Independent antennas antennas
& Aperture antennas
5. Modern antennas- Reconfigurable antenna, Active antenna, Dielectric antennas, 6

Electronic band gap structure and applications, Antenna
Measurements - Test Ranges, Measurement of Gain,
Radiation pattern, Polarization, VSWR
6. Propagation of Radio Modes of propagation , Structure of atmosphere, Ground 8

Waves wave propagation , Free Space Wave Propagation, Ground
Reflection, Surface Waves, Tropospheric propagation , Duct
propagation, Troposcatter propagation , Flat earth and Curved
earth concept, Ionospheric propagation, Sky wave
propagation – Virtual height, critical frequency , Maximum
usable frequency – Skip distance, Fading , Multi hop
propagation, Electrical Properties of Ionosphere

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Project based learning: Each student in a group of 4-5 will do project based on antenna
designing and measurement. Each group will assign designing problems on different types of
antenna with its real time applications. Apart from course different research paper will
provide to the students then based on the research data students will solve different design
problem and do discussion in class.
1. John D. Kraus & RJ Marhefka, Antennas for all applications, The McGraw-Hill Companies,
5th edition, 2017
2. C.A. Balanis, Antenna Theory, Analysis and Design. NY: John Wiley and Sons, 4th edition,
2016.
3. WL Stutzman& GA Thiele, Antenna Theory and Design , John Wiley and Sons, 2nd
edition,1997
4. Edward C.Jordan and Keith G.Balmain” Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems”
Prentice Hall of India, 2015
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B19EC891 Semester:Even Semester:8th Session 2020 -2021

(specify Odd/Even) Month from:January to May
Course Name Project Part-2
Credits 12 Contact Hours ----
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Sajai Vir Singh, Ms. Shradha Saxena
Teacher(s)
Sajai Vir Singh, Shivaji Tyagi, Shradha Saxena, Varun Goel
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES- At the completion of the course, students will be able to,
LEVELS
C451.1 Summarize the contemporary scholarly literature, activities, and explored Understanding level
(C2)
tools/ techniques/software/hardware for hands-on in the respective project
area in various domain of Electronics Engineering.
C451.2 Analyze/Design the skill for obtaining the optimum solution to the Analyzing level
(C4)
formulated problem with in stipulated time
C451.3 Evaluate /Validate sound conclusions based on evidence and analysis Evaluating level
(C5)
C451.4 Develop the skill in student so that they can communicate effectively in both Creating Level
(C6)
verbal and written form.
Evaluation Criteria
MidSem Viva20
Final Viva 30
D2D30
Thesis 20
Total 100
Project based learningProject part II is the continuation of Project part 1 done in the previous semester. The Project Work
is by far the most important single piece of work in the B. Tech programme. It provides the opportunity for student to
demonstrate independence and originality, to plan and organize a large Project over a long period and to put into practice
some of the techniques, student have been taught throughout the course.In Project work initially, first all students are
advised to make groups having 2-3 students in each group and also to select the supervisor of their own choice and research
field. The students are also advised to choose a Project that involves a combination of sound background research, software
skill, or piece of theoretical work. Interdisciplinary Project proposals and innovative Projects are encouraged and more
appreciable. Objective of project part II is for the students to learn and experience all the major phases and processes
involved in solving “real life engineering problems related to electronics and communication or Interdisciplinary area. The
major outcome of this project work must be well-trained the students. More specifically students must have acquired:
• System integration skills
• Documentation skills
• Project management skills
• Problem solving skills
• team work skill.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 15B1NHS832 Semester Even Semester VIII Session 2020 -2021
(specify Odd/Even) Month from : Jan - June
Course Name International Studies
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Chandrima Chaudhuri

Teacher(s)
Dr. Chandrima Chaudhuri
(Alphabetically)

Demonstrate an understanding of the basic concepts in the area of Understanding (C2)
C402-8.1 international studies
Compare the changes in India’s foreign policy in the Cold War era and Applying (C3)
C402-8.2 the post Cold War era
Analyze the major political developments and events since the 20th Analyzing (C4)
C402-8.3 century
Demonstrate an understanding of the rise of new power centers in the Understanding (C2)
C402-8.4 changing world order

the module
1. Basic Concepts Balance of power and Collective security 4
National Interest and its instruments
2. An Overview of World War I: Causes and Consequences 8
Twentieth Century Significance of the Bolshevik Revolution
International Rise of Fascism / Nazism
Relations History World War II: Causes and Consequences
3. Cold War Politics Origin of the Cold War 8

Evolution of the Cold War
Collapse of the Soviet Union
Causes of the End of the Cold War
4. India’s foreign Basic Determinants (Historical, Geo-Political, Economic, 6

policy during the Domestic and Strategic)
Cold War era India’s Policy of Non-alignment
5. India’s foreign India and SAARC 8

policy in the Post- India and the Look East policy
Cold War era Impediments to regional co-operation: river water disputes;
illegal cross-border migration; ethnic conflicts and
insurgencies; border disputes
6. Emergence of European Union 8

Other Power Rise of Asia Powers- Russia, China and Japan
Centres
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project, Quiz, Attendance)
Total 100
1. A. Chatterjee, International Relations Today. Noida, India: Pearson, 2019
Appadorai, & M.S.Rajan, India’s Foreign Policy and Relations. New Delhi, India: South Asian Publisher,
2.
1985
E.H. Carr, International Relations between the Two World Wars: 1919-1939. New York, USA: Palgrave,
3.
2009
J. Baylis &S. Smith, Ed. The Globalization of World Politics: An Introduction to International Relations.
4.
Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 2011
5. P. Calvocoressi, World Politics: 1945—2000. Essex, UK: Pearson,2009
Detailed Syllabus
Subject 17B1NHS732 Semester: Even Semester : 8th

Code Session : 2020 -2021
Month: January to June
Subject INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM
Name
Faculty Coordinator(s) 1. Dr. Mukta Mani (Sec 62) 2. Dr.Sakshi Varshney (Sec
(Names) 128)
Teacher(s) 2. Dr. Mukta Mani 2. Dr.Sakshi Varshney
(Alphabetically)
NBA Code Course Outcomes Cognitive

Level
C401-31.1 Understand the inter-linkage of components of financial system and C2
financial instruments of Money market and Capital market.
C401-31.2 Analyze ways of fund raising in domestic and international markets C4
C401-31.3 Understand functioning of Stock market and evaluate securities for C5
investment.
C401-31.4 Apply the knowledge of Mutual Funds and Insurance in personal C3
investment decisions
C401-31.5 Apply knowledge of Income tax for calculation of tax liability of C3
individual.
Module Subtitle of Topics in the module No. of

No. the Module Hours
1. Introduction Meaning, Importance, and functions of Financial system. 3

Informal and Formal financial system, Financial markets,
Financial Institutions, Financial services and Financial
instrument
2. Features of money market Instruments: Treasury bills,
Money 3
commercial bills, commercial papers, certificates of deposit,
Market
call and notice money, Functions of money market, Linking
of money market with Monetary policy in India
3. Features of Capital market instrument: Equity shares, Bonds.

Capital 3
Fund raising through Initial Public Offering, Rights issue,
Market
Preferential allotment and Private Placement. Process of IPO-
Intermediaries in IPO, Book building process and allotment
of shares
4. Fund raising from foreign market through: Foreign direct
Foreign 3
investments investment and foreign institutional investment, ADR, GDR,
ECB, and Private equity.
in India
5. Trading in secondary market- Stock exchanges, regulations,
Stock 3
demutualisation, broker, listing of securities,
Market
dematerialisation, trading, short selling, circuit breaker, stock
market indices- methods of calculation of indices.
6. Stock Investing basics: Consideration of Risk and Return, Stock 7

Valuation Valuation and Analysis- Fundamental analysis: Economy,
and industry and company analysis; Technical Analysis of stocks
Analysis using technical charts
7. Investing in Mutual Funds: Basics, Types of funds, risk and return 6
Mutual considerations in selection of funds; Insurance: Basics, Life
Funds and insurance and health insurance, types of policies
Insurance
8. Overview of Basics of Income tax- Concept of previous year, assessment 14
Income Tax year, person, income. Calculation of Income tax liability for
individuals: Income from salaries- basic, DA, HRA, leave
salary, Gratuity, Pension, Allowances and Perquisites;
Income from Capital Gain, Deductions under section 80C to
80U.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project, Class participation and Attendance)
Total 100
Project Based learning: The students will form groups of 4-5 students. They will carry-out
stock analysis of a selected company on the basis of fundamental and technical analysis
techniques studied in lecture classes. Finally they will give their recommendation about the
performance of stock.
Recommended Reading material: Author(s), Title, Edition, Publisher, Year of Publication etc. (
Text books, Reference Books, Journals, Reports, Websites etc. in the IEEE format)
1 Pathak Bharti V, Indian Financial System, 5th Edition, Pearson Education, 2018
2 Madura Jeff, Personal Finance, 6th Ed, Pearson Education, 2017.
3 Machiraju H R, Indian Financial System, 4th Ed, Vikas Publication, 2010
4 Bhole L M, Financial Institutions and Markets, 4th ed. Tata McGraw Hill Publication,
2006.
5 Singhania & Singhania, Students Guide to Income Tax, Taxmann Publication, 2019.
6 How to Stimulate the Economy Essay [Online]Available:
https://www.bartleby.com/essay/How-to-Stimulate-the-Economy-FKJP5QGATC
7 Reserve Bank of India, ‘Money Kumar & the Monetary Policy’, 2007
8 Ashiwini Kumar,Sharma,’ De-jargoned: Book building process, Live Mint,2015.
9 Madhavan, N. “Pushing the accelerator instead of brakes: Can Subhiksha make a
comeback?”, Business Today, 28th June 2009.
10 Kaul, Vivek, “Master Move: How Dhirubhai Ambani turned the tables on the Kolkata bear
cartel”, The Economic Times, July 1, 2011.
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B12HS814 Semester Even Semester VIII Session 2020 -2021
Course Name Knowledge Management
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Anshu Banwari
Teacher(s)
Dr. Anshu Banwari
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Demonstrate the way knowledge is embedded in today’s organization and Understanding
C402-30.1
behavioral aspects involved in managing it Level (C2)
Compare and contrast different methods of KM to preserve, nurture, share and Understanding
C402-30.2
manage knowledge Level (C2)
Identify appropriate methods for knowledge integration to gain competitive Applying
C402-30.3
advantage Level (C3)
Identify the legal ramifications arising from knowledge sharing and an insight Applying
C402-30.4
into the ethical concerns faced by individuals and organizations Level (C3)

the module
1. Introduction to Cognition and Knowledge Management, Data, 4
Knowledge Information and Knowledge, Types of Knowledge,
Management Reasoning and Heuristics, Expert Knowledge, Human
thinking and Learning, Knowledge Management myths
2. Life Cycle of a Challenges in building Knowledge Management Systems, 6
knowledge Conventional V/S Knowledge Management System
Management Lifecycle, Knowledge Management System Life Cycle,
System System Justification, Role of Rapid Prototyping, Selecting
an expert, Role of Knowledge developer
3. Knowledge Models of Knowledge Creation and Transformation, 5
Creation and Knowledge Architecture, The people Core, Identifying
Knowledge Knowledge centers, The technical core
Architecture
4. Capturing Tacit Evaluating the expert, Developing a Relationship with 6
Knowledge expert, Fuzzy reasoning and the quality of Knowledge
capture, Interview as a tool, Knowledge capture
techniques
5. Knowledge Codification Tools and Procedures, The knowledge 6
Codification and Developer’s Skill set, Quality assurance, Approaches to
System Logical testing and Acceptance testing, Issues related to
Implementation deployment
6. Knowledge Transfer strategies, Inhibitors of Knowledge transfer, Role 5
Transfer and of Internet in Knowledge Transfer
Knowledge Sharing
7. Managing Business Roles in the Learning Organizations, Work 5
Knowledge adjustment and the Knowledge Worker, Technology and
Workers the Knowledge worker, Role of the CKO, Managing
Considerations, Managing Knowledge Projects
8. Ethical, Legal and Knowledge Owners, Legal Issues, Ethical Decision cycle, 5
Managerial Issues Major threats to Ethics, The Privacy factor
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignments, Project)
Total 100
Project based learning: Students have to form a group (maximum 5 students in each group) and have to
identify an organization who has successfully implemented knowledge management. Students have to
analyze techniques, tools and methods adopted by organization to preserve, nurture, share and manage
knowledge. Understanding of different methods, processes and techniques used by organizations for
successful KM implementation enhances the students practical understanding on how knowledge
management is integrated into different business functions. These days most of the organizations are
using knowledge management in their various endeavors. This subject surely enhances student’s
employability in all those organizations where knowledge management has been implemented or where
they are planning to implement knowledge management.
1 D. Hislop, Knowledge Management in Organizations, Oxford University Press, 2013
2. E. M. Awad and H. M. Ghaziri, Knowledge Management, Pearson Education, 2007
3. S. Warier, Knowledge Management, Vikas Publishing House, 2011
Tan, H., Carrillo, P. and Anumba, C.J., Case study of knowledge management implementation in a
4. medium-sized construction sector firm. Journal of Management in Engineering, 28 (3), pp. 338 – 347,
2012
RagsdelL, G., Ortoll Espinet, E. and Norris, M., Knowledge management in the voluntary sector: a
5. focus on sharing project know-how and expertise. Knowledge Management Research and Practice, 12(4),
pp.351–361, 2014
Detailed Syllabus
Subject Code 16B1NHS832 Semester:EVEN Semester VIII Session 2020-2021

Subject Service Management Marketing
Name
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr Swati Sharma

Teacher(s)
Dr Swati Sharma
(Alphabetically)

LEVELS
C402-1.1 Understand service products, consumers and markets C2
C402-1.2 Apply 4P’s of marketing to service C3
C402-1.3 Determine and Interpret the customer Interface C5
C402-1.4 Create and design profitable service strategies C6
for the module
1. Introduction to Product to Services—The Challenges 5
Services • The Gaps Model
• The Services Marketing Mix
2. Consumer Behavior In Managing Customer Behavior— 3

Services The three-stage model of Service
Consumption
3. Delivering Quality Challenges of Measuring Service 5

Service Quality
• Measures of Service Quality
• Dimensions of Service Quality
SERVQUAL
4. Positioning Services in Focus Strategies 4

Competitive Markets Developing effective positioning
strategies
5. Creating value in a Developing and positioning a service in 8
competitive market the market
and service promotion
Applying the 4 Ps of Marketing to

services
Value addition to the service product
Planning and branding service products
Crafting the service environment
New service development.
7 Culture and Service People and Service 5
National Cultures,
Managing and marketing of Service
across boundaries
6. Technology & Service Introduction to e services 6
Strategy Electronic Commerce Models,
Types of E services
Value Chains in E Service
7 Planning and Creating delivery systems in price, 6
managing service cyberspace and time, The physical
delivery evidence of the service space. The role
of intermediaries, enhancing value by
improving quality and productivity.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Project, Viva and Oral Quiz)
Total 100
1. Valarie A. Zeithaml& Mary Jo-Bitner: Services Marketing-Integrating Customer Focus
Acros the Firm, 7/e, TMH, 2018.
2. Christopher Lovelock: Services Marketing People, Technology, Strategy, Fourth Edition,
Pearson Education, 2011
3. Rao, Services Marketing, Pearson Education, 2/e,2011
4. Thomas J. Delong& Asish Nanda: Managing Professional Servies-Text and Cases, McGraw-
Hil International, 2002
5 Roland T. Rust and P.K. Kannan, e-Service New Directions in Theory and Practice, Prentice-
Hal of India Pvt. Ltd., 2002

Detailed Syllabus
Semester:VIII, Session 2:018

2020-2021
-2019
Subject Code 18B12PH814 Semester :Even
Subject Name Plasma Physics
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Anuraj Panwar

LEVELS
Define terminology and concepts of plasma physics with various Remembering Level
C402-6.1
natural phenomena and engineering applications. (C1)
Summarize plasma and explain its electric, magnetic, dielectric Understand Level
C402-6.2 and thermal properties. (C2)
Develop magneto-hydrodynamic fluid and kinetic models to
C402-6.3 explain various phenomena taking place in homogeneous, isotropic Apply Level (C3)
and anisotropic plasma conditions.
C402-6.4 Analyze and formulate mathematical / analytical expressions for Analyze Level (C4)
various nonlinear processes in plasmas.
C402-6.5 Evaluate physical problems, estimate their numerical solutions and Evaluate Level (C5)
draw inferences from the results.
Module Subtitle of No. of Lectures for

Topics in the module
No. the Module the module
Elementary concepts, definition of temperature Debye

Introdu- Shielding, plasma parameters, applications of Plasma
ction to the Physics, Production of Plasmas in the laboratory, Drifts of
1. 10
Plasma charged particles under the effect of different
State combinations of electric and magnetic fields and Mirror
Machine.
Relations of Plasma Physics to ordinary electromagnetics,

Fluid
dielectric constant of a plasma, collisions, equation of
2. description 04
continuity, macroscopic parameters of plasma, two and
of plasmas
one fluid equations for plasma.
Nonlinear Plasma oscillations, space charge waves of warm plasma,

3. Waves in ion-acoustic waves and electromagnetic waves in 08
Plasmas magnetized plasma.
Decay of Plasma by diffusion, diffusion across a magnetic
Diffusion field, single fluid MHD equations, Diffusion in fully
4. and ionized Plasmas, Bohm diffusion and Neoclassical 06
Resistivity diffusion.
The equilibrium of plasma, classification of plasma

Stability of
5. instabilities, stability analysis: Two stream instability and 04
fluid plasma
Gravitational instability or Rayleigh Taylor instability
(Plasma supported against gravity by magnetic field).
Ponderomotive force, Parametric instabilities, decay
Nonlinear instability, two plasmon decay, stimulated Raman
6. 06
effects scattering and stimulated Brillouin scattering, non linear
Landau damping.
Controlled
thermo- Magnetic and inertial confinement schemes, ITER,
7. 02
nuclear TOKAMAK.
fusion
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 [2 Quiz (10 M), Attendance (7 M) and PBL and Class performance
(8M)]
Total 100
1. F. F. Chen., Introduction to Plasma Physics,Springer (2016).
2. Krall and Trievelpiece, Principles of Plasma Physics, McGraw-Hill (1973).
3. W. L. Kruer, The Physics of laser plasma interactions, Addison Wesley (1988).
Liu and Tripathi,Interaction of electromagnetic waves with electron beams and plasmas, World
4. Scientific (1994).
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B12PH811 Semester: Even Semester: VIII Session 2020 -2021
Month from January to June
Course Name Photonics and Applications
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Navneet Kumar Sharma

Teacher(s)
Navneet Kumar Sharma
(Alphabetically)

Recall the fundamental properties of light and the processes involved Remember Level (C1)
CO1
in the generation of light
CO2 Interpret the theory of fiber optics Understand Level (C2)
Apply the fundamentals of various nonlinear optical effects in Apply Level (C3)
CO3
technology; make use of holography and its applications
Compare the operational principles, characteristics and trade-offs of Analyze Level (C4)
CO4
optical detectors and modulators of light

the module
1. Lasers Review of different types of laser systems. LEDs, 8
Semiconductor lasers, Quantum well lasers, Modes of laser
cavity, Q-switching and Mode locking in lasers.
2. Fiber Optics Numerical aperture, Step and graded index multimode 10
fibers, attenuation and dispersion, modes in optical fibers.
Single mode fiber, mode cutoff and mode field diameter.
Connector and splice losses, Erbium doped fiber amplifier
and Characterization techniques including OTDR.
3. Photo detectors Semiconductor photo detectors. 5
4. Optical Electronics Wave propagation in anisotropic media, Electro-optic 4
effect: phase and amplitude modulation. Acousto-optic
effect: modulators, deflectors and tunable filters, Magneto-
optic effect: modulators.
5. Optical devices Electro-optical device, Acousto-optical device, Magneto- 2
optical device, Voice communication, Optical
communication.
6. Nonlinear Optics SHG, Sum and Difference frequency generation, parametric 6
amplification, wavelength converters, Self focusing with
lasers.
7. Holography Recording and Reproduction of Hologram, Applications of 4
holography.
8. Applications of CD, VCD, DVD. 1
Photons in Memory
devices
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
Project based learning: Each student in a group of 4-5 students will opt a topic and will do the theoretical
study in detail. The students will submit their report. To make the subject application based, the students
analyze the optical fiber applications, holography applications and use of photons in memory devices.
This shall improve the skills and employability of the students in laser and photonic industries.
1. R. P. Khare, Fiber Optics and Optoelectronics, Oxford University Press.
2. A. K. Ghatak and K. Thyagarajan, Optical Electronics, Cambridge university Press.
3. A. K. Ghatak and K. Thyagarajan, An Introduction to Fiber Optics, Cambridge university Press.
4. B. B. Laud, Lasers and Nonlinear Optics, New Age International.

Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 18B12PH812 Semester: Even Semester: 8, Session : 2020 -2021

Course Name Astrophysics
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Prof.Anirban Pathak and Dr. Sandeep Chhoker

Teacher(s) Anirban Pathak
(Alphabetically) Sandeep Chhoker

Relate historical development of astrophysics with the modern Remembering (C1)
C402-4.1 concepts and recall the mathematical techniques used & definition of
different units
Explain the models of universe, ideas of stellar astrophysics, life cycles Understanding (C2)
C402-4.2 of stars, physical principles that rules galaxies, and general theory of
relativity
Apply mathematical principles and laws of physics to solve problems Applying (C3)
C402-4.3
related to astrophysical systems
Compare different models of universe and decide which one is Analyzing (C4)
C402-4.4
logically acceptable and why

the module
1 Introduction to Historical development of astrophysics (from mythology to 8
Astrophysics contemporary astrophysics), Mass, length and time scales in
astrophysics, sources of astronomical information (effect of
discovery of spectroscopes and photography), astronomy in
different bands of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. Optical
astronomy, infra-red astronomy radio astronomy, X-ray
astronomy. Gamma-ray astronomy etc. with specific
mention of Hubble space telescope). Kirchoff’s law,
Doppler effect and Hubble’s law.
2. Stellar Classification and nomenclature of stars. Basic equations of 8
Astrophysics stellar structure, main sequence, red giants and white
dwarfs, HR diagram, stellar evolution, supernovae, extra
solar planets.
3. Death of a star End states of stellar collapse: degeneracy pressure of a 6
Fermi gas, structure of white dwarfs, Chandrasekhar mass
limit, neutron stars pulsars and black holes.
4. Our galaxy The shape and size of Milky way and its interstellar mater 2
5. Extragalactic Normal galaxies, active galaxies, cluster of galaxies, large- 6
astrophysics scale distribution of galaxies.
6. GTR and Models of Qualitative idea of general theory of relativity (without 6
Universe using tensor calculus) and its implications.
Different models of universe. Specific attention to the ideas
related to big bang, cosmological constants, dark matter and
dark energy.
7. Astrobiology Drake equation and related questions. 2
8. Conclusion Review of the present status of Astrophysics and open 2
questions.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 [2 Quizes (10 M), Attendance (10 M) and Class performance (5 M)]
Total 100
1. Astrophysics for Physicists, Arnab Rai Choudhuri, Cambridge University Press, Delhi, 2010.
2. Astrophysics: Stars and Galaxies, K D Abhyankar, University Press, Hyderabad, 2009.

Facts and Speculations in Cosmology, J V Narlikar and G Burbidge, Cambridge University Press, Delhi,
3.
2009.
4. The Cosmic Century, Malcolm Longair, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 2006.
5. An Introduction to Astrophysics, BaidyanathBasu, Prentice Hall of India, Delhi 1997.
6. Fundamentals of Equations of State, S. Eliezer, A Ghatak and Heinrich Hora, World Scientific, Singapore,
2002. Only Chapter 15.
Detailed Syllabus
Semester: Semester: 8th Session: 2020-21

Subject Code 15B1NPH831
Even Month: January to June
Subject Name Integrated Optics and Applications
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr Amit Verma

Teacher(s)
Dr Amit Verma
(Alphabetically)
C402-26.1 Recall Integrated optical circuits and their applications in Remember Level
communication and photonics. (Level 1)
C402-26.2 Explain Elements of optics, ray transformation, optical sources, Understand Level
detectors, waveguides and their applications in photonics and (Level 2)
communications.
C402-26.3 Demonstrate the use of Matrix optics and Fourier transform in Apply Level
solving various problems related to waveguides and optical (Level 3)
integrated circuits.
C402-26.4 Prove and estimate solution of numerical problems using physical Evaluate Level
and mathematical concepts involved with various optical circuits and (Level 5)
switches.
C402-26.5 Design of optical circuits of desired output for communication Create Level
applications. (Level 6)

the module
1. Matrix Optics Introduction, Postulates of Ray Optics, Matrix optics; The 7
ray transfer Matrix, Matrices of some simple, cascaded
optical components and Periodic optical systems (Light
Guides).
2. Fourier Optics Fourier series and analysis of periodic functions, 7
Exponential form of Fourier series and Fourier transform
Convolution and applications in image processing;
frequency filtering, low pass, high pass and band pass
filters.
3. Lasers Lasers; threshold condition, resonator wave guides and 7
Types of Lasers, Laser diodes; Fabry-Perot lasers. DFB,
DBR lasers, ultrafast optics and Applications.
4. Optical waveguides Optical waveguides and fibers, Planar and strip waveguides, 7
Amplifiers (EDFA), Directional couplers, Diffraction
Grating couplers, Grating-assisted optical components.
Fiber sensors, fiber optic network and communication,
5. Micro and nano Lithography. Etching, Metallization, Packaging, Nanoscale 4
waveguide, micro-ring resonator, micro-disk resonator and
lithography applications.
6. Photonic integrated Integrated optical Devices; Design and Processing 8
circuits TechnologyPhotonic switches, PIC (Photonic Integrated
Circuits), Photonic crystal cavity, plasmonic waveguide
based devices, NRI (negative refractive index) Optics,
perfect lens, near-field scanning optical microscope
(NSOM) and Applications.

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25
Total 100
1. R. P. Khare, Fiber Optics and Optoelectronics, Oxford University Press.
2. A. K. Ghatak and K.Thyagarajan, Optical Electronics, Cambridge university Press.
3. A. K. Ghatak and K.Thyagarajan, An Introduction to Fiber Optics, Cambridge university Press.
4. B. B. Laud, Lasers and Nonlinear Optics, New Age International.
Optimization Techniques (16B1NMA831)
Course Description
Course Code 16B1NMA831 Semester Even Semester VIII Session 2020-21

Course Name Optimization Techniques
Faculty Coordinator(s) Prof. Amrish K. Aggarwal
(Names) Teacher(s)
Prof. Amrish K. Aggarwal
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
C402-2.1 apply generalized, revised and dual simplex method for linear Applying Level
programming problems (LPP). (C3)
C402-2.2 apply graphical, algebraic and linear programming techniques for pureApplying Level
and mixed strategy problems in game theory. (C3)
C402-2.3 classify and solve the problems on queuing and inventory models. Analyzing Level
(C4)
C402-2.4 solve and analyze the network scheduling and sequencing problems. Analyzing Level
(C4)
C402-2.5 make use of dynamic programming technique to solve complex linear Applying Level
C402-2.6 determine numerical solution of nonlinear multidimensional problems. Evaluating
Level (C5)
1. Review of Convex sets, Linear Programming Problems (LPP), 08
Linear graphical and simplex method, Big-M method, Two
Programming phase method, generalized simplex method, revised
simplex method, Duality theory, dual simplex
method.
2. Game Theory Rectangular Games, Minmax Theorem, Graphical 06
Solution of 2×n, 3×n, m×2, m×3 and mxn Games,
Reduction to Linear Programming Problems.
3. Queuing Theory Introduction, Steady-State Solutions of Markovian 08
& Inventory Queuing Models: M/M/1, M/M/1 with limited
Model: waiting space, M/M/C, M/M/C with limited space,
M/G/1, Inventory Models.
4. Sequencing & Processing of Jobs through Machines, CPM and 06
Scheduling PERT.
5. Dynamic Discrete and Continuous Dynamic Programming, 06
Programming Simple Illustrations.
6. Nonlinear Unimodal function, One Dimensional minimization 08
Programming problem, Newton's Method Golden Section,
Fibonacci Search, Bisection, Steepest Descent
Method, Multidimensional Newton's method.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Quiz, Assignments)
Total 100
Project based learning: Each student in a group of 4-5 will analyse literature on mathematical
application of discrete and continuous dynamic programming technique to solve complex linear
programming problems. To make the subject application based, the students analyze the
optimized way to deal with dynamic programming problems.
1. Taha, H. A., Operations Research - An Introduction, Tenth Edition, Pearson Education, 2017.
2. Rao, S. S. - Engineering Optimization, Theory and Practice, Third Edition, New Age International
Publishers, 2010.
3. Hillier F., Lieberman G. J., Nag,B. and Basu, P., Introduction to Operations Research, 10th
edition, McGraw-Hill, 2017.
4. Wagner, H. M., Principles of Operations Research with Applications to Managerial Decisions, 2nd
edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1980.
Multi Attribute Decision Making (20B12MA411)
Course Description
Course Code 20B12MA411 Semester Even Semester VIII Session 2020-21
Course Name Multi Attribute Decision Making

Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Pankaj Kumar Srivastava
Teacher(s)
Dr. Pankaj Kumar Srivastava, Dr. DCS Bisht
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
C402-6.1 explain basic steps in decision analysis and decision making Understanding
environments. Level (C2)
C402-6.2 Applying Level
apply group decision making methods to reach a collective decision.
(C3)
C402-6.3 develop the concept of multi-criteria decision making process and Applying Level
attributes. (C3)
C402-6.4 apply elementary methods to solve multi-attribute decision making Applying Level
problems. (C3)
C402-6.5 analyze value based and outranking methods to solve multi attribute Analyzing Level
decision making problems. (C4)
1. Decision Basic steps in decision analysis, decision-making 8
Analysis environments, decision making under uncertainty,
decision making under risk, utility theory, decision
tree.
2. Group GDM methods, content-oriented methods, and 7

Decision disadvantages of non ranked voting, preferential
Making voting system, and social choice functions.
3. Multicriteria Multiattribute decision making, multi objective 8

Decision decision making, decision making process,
Making structuring process, decision matrix, attributes,
normalization, attribute weight assignment
methods.
4. Elementary Dominance relation method, even-swap method, 8
Methods for lexicographic method maximax method, maximin
MADM method, conjunctive method, disjunctive method,
median ranking, analytic hierarchy process, analytic
network process.
5 Value Based Multi attribute value theory, simple additive 11
and weighting, weighted product, TOPSIS outranking
Outranking methods.
Methods

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Quiz and Assignments)
Total 100
Project based learning: Students are divided in a group of 4-5 to do a survey on the applications of
classical and recent multi attribute decision making techniques in their respective branches. The student
recognizes the multi attribute decision making problems arising in real life and solves these problems
with the help of MADM techniques learnt in this course.
Ishizaka, Alessio, and Philippe Nemery. Multi-criteria decision analysis: methods and software.
1.
John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
Xu, Zeshui. Uncertain multi-attribute decision making: Methods and applications. Springer,
2.
2015.
Tzeng, Gwo-Hshiung, and Jih-Jeng Huang. "Multi Attribute Decision Making: Methods and
3. Applications." USA, CRC Press. 2016.
Fuzzy Optimization & Decision Making (18B12MA811)
Course Description
Course Code 18B12MA811 Semester Even Semester VIII Session 2020-21
Course Name Fuzzy Optimization and Decision Making
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Dr. Amit Srivastava
Teacher(s)
Dr. Amit Srivastava, Dr. Lakhveer Kaur
(Alphabetically)
COGNITIVE
COURSE OUTCOMES
LEVELS
Understanding
C402-24.1 explain the concept of fuzzy sets and fuzzy numbers.
level(C2)
Understanding
C402-24.2 explain various fuzzy and generalized fuzzy operations.
level(C2)
C402-24.3 apply the concept of fuzzy relations and approximate reasoning. Apply level(C3)
apply the concept of fuzzy sets and their generalizations in various Evaluate
C402-24.4
decision making processes. level(C5)
apply various ranking techniques in solving fuzzy transportation
C402-24.5 Apply level(C3)
problems.
1. Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy sets and fuzzy numbers, basic operations, 7
fuzzy numbers operations on [0, 1] – fuzzy negation, triangular
norms, t-conorms, fuzzy implications, aggregation
operations, fuzzy functional equations.
2. Fuzzy and Type - 1 and Type - 2 fuzzy sets, intuitionistic 7
generalized fuzzy sets. triangular fuzzy numbers, trapezoidal
fuzzy operations fuzzy numbers, bell shaped fuzzy numbers, fuzzy
numbers with a flat, piecewise quadratic fuzzy
numbers.
3. Fuzzy relations Fuzzy binary and n-ary relations, composition of 8

and approximate fuzzy relations, fuzzy equivalence relations, fuzzy
reasoning compatibility relations -fuzzy relational equations,
applications of fuzzy relations in approximate
reasoning.
4. Decision Decision making in a fuzzy environment, 10
making in fuzzy individual decision making, multiperson decision
environment making, multicriteria decision making, multistage
decision making, fuzzy zero-based budgeting,
fuzzy averaging for decision making.
5. Ranking Fuzzy ranking methods, fuzzy linear 10
techniques in programming, fuzzy transportation, basic
fuzzy definitions associated with fuzzy transportation,
transportation algorithms for solution of fuzzy transportation
problems problem.
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
Total 100
Project based learning: Students are divided in a group of 4-5 to do a survey on the applications of
applications of fuzzy relations in approximate reasoning in their respective branches. The students
recognize decision making problems in fuzzy environment arising in practical situations and solve
these problems with the aid of different techniques learnt in this course. The students also apply
various ranking techniques for solving fuzzy transportation problems.
Bhargava, A. K., Fuzzy Set Theory, Fuzzy Logic and Their Applications, S. Chand & Company
1.
Pvt. Ltd., 2013.
Zimmermann, H. J., Fuzzy Set Theory and its Applications, 4th Edition, Allied Publishers, New
2.
Delhi, 1991.
Ross, T.J., Fuzzy logic with engineering applications, 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, Ltd,
3.
2004.
4. Baczynski, M. and Jayaram, B., Fuzzy Implications, Springer Verlag, Heidelberg, 2008.
Klir, G. J. & Yuan, B., Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic: Theory and Applications, Prentice Hall
5.
NJ, 1995.
Detailed Syllabus [ Integrated M. Tech]
Course Code 18B12BT414 Semester Even Semester VIIIth Session 2020-

2021
Month from Jan - June
Course Name Machine Learning tools in Bioinformatics
Faculty Coordinator(s) 1. Dr. Chakresh Kumar Jain

(Names)
Teacher(s) 1. Dr. Chakresh Kumar Jain
(Alphabetically)

C402-13.1 Explain about the machine learning principle Understand Level (C2)
biological complexities and resources
C402-13.2 Apply Pattern Identification methods for motif Apply Level (C3)
discovery
C402-13.3 Apply machine learning in solving biological Apply Level (C3)
problems.
Analyzing the use of machine learning in disease- Analyze Level (C4)
C402-13.4 drug discovery
Module No. Subtitle of the Topics in the module No. of

Module Lectures
for the
module
1. Overview of Fundamentals of machine learning, 7
machine learning algorithms, introduction to biological
methods and scope problem and mapping, gene and genome,
in bioinformatics Structure, function and organization,
biological database, Scope of machine
learning in bioinformatics (Genomics,
proteomics, transcriptomics etc.)
2. Pattern Pattern and motif, domain, profile in 4
identification Bioinformatics, Search algorithms, String
search, Boyer moore, Robin Karp algorithm
KMP algorithm, Dynamics programming and
greedy approach etc. case studies
3. Data classification: Gene finding tools, Discrimination analysis ; 8
Clustering and tree LDA, Clustering methods: Hierarchical , K
algorithm mean, Normalization, similarity measure
(distances), Basics of tree, suffix tree and its
applications in Bioinformatics , validations,
statistical inferences and biological
interpretation (Gene ontology and microarray
data)
4. Basics of ANN and Fundamental of ANN, Back propagation 10
HMM algorithm, kNN, ANN model, Biological
tools like PHD, Intron identifier, splice site
prediction etc. Basics of HMM Stochastic
algorithm, profile generation, Pfam, protein
families, Gibbs sampling, Viterbi algorithm,
tools evaluation
5. SVM Introduction to SVM. Feature selection, 5
kernel methods, case studies(Bioinformatics
application ; protein structure and function
prediction , data mining in drug discovery
etc.)
6. Applications and SVM_light, GIST server, applications of 8

tools SVM, QSAR prediction, ADMET
predictions, case studies, Protein coding
region prediction, gene identification,
folding problems in protein sequences,
network analysis, RNAi Designing, PSORT,
Genscan, HMMTOP, DAS, Genemark ,
Glimmer, etc., case studies
Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA 25 (Assignment, Quiz, Case study, Project based evaluation)
Total 100
( Text books, Reference Books, Journals, Papers, Reports, Websites etc. in the IEEE format)
1. Pierre Baldi and Søren Brunak “Bioinformatics The Machine Learning Approach” ,
February 1998, 371 pp., 62 illus.,
2. Thomas H. Cormen “Introduction to Algorithms” , 2nd edition McGraw-Hill
Science,2001, 1056 pages.
3 Yang, Zheng Rong, “ Machine :Learning Approaches to Bioinformatics”, New Delhi
world Scientific, Pp 336, 2017
4 Research papers and manuals
Detailed Syllabus
Course Code 20B12EC415 Semester Even Semester 8 Session 2020 -2021

Course Name Network Security
Credits 4 Contact Hours 3-1
Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) P C Gupta

Teacher(s)
P C Gupta
(Alphabetically)

C433-6.1 At the completion of the course, students will be able to understand Understanding (C2)
the security requirements of networked information systems and
general principles of cryptography.
C433-6.2 At the completion of the course, students will be able to apply above Applying (C3)
concepts for developing security mechanisms used for network
access, message confidentiality, message authentication non-
repudiation.
C433-6.3 At the completion of the course, students will be able to apply the Applying (C3)
above security mechanisms to understand of standard security
protocols used in the IP network.
C433-6.4 At the completion of the course, students will be able to analyze Analyzing (C4)
a) network vulnerabilities to adversarial attacks/intrusions, and
b) security solutions for preventing such attacks/intrusions.

the module
1. Security concepts and General security concepts, need for security & security 2
terminology mechanisms
2. Symmetric-key & (a) Classical encryption methods 14

Asymmetric-key (b) Mathematical foundations I – Modular arithmetic
Cryptosystems (c) Block ciphers, DES, 3 DES, AES
(d) Modes of operation of block ciphers
(e) Stream ciphers, RC4
(f) Mathematical foundations II – Finite fields
(g) Asymmetric-key cryptography, RSA, ElGamal
(h) Elliptic curve cryptography
3. Message (a) Content integrity verification, hash functions, SHA, 4

Authentication & Whirlpool
Digital Signatures (b) Message Authentication Code (MAC),
(c) HMAC, CMAC
(d) Digital signature, RSA and ElGamal, applications of digital
signatures
4. Entity Authentication (a) Fixed and one-time passwords, authentication based on 3

& Security for challenge-response.
Remote Access (b) PPP, PAP, CHAP, EAP protocols, RADIUS & L2TP
tunneling
5. Key Distribution (a) Symmetric-key distribution, Diffie-Hellman key exchange, 3

(b) Key Distribution Centre (KDC), Kerberos
(c) Public Key distribution, Digital certificates, X.509,
Certification Authority (CA), Public Key Infrastructure
6. Security at the (a) Security at the Transport layer, 3

Transport and
Network Layers (b) TLS protocol
(c) Security at the IP layer, VPN, IPsec, AH, ESP protocols
7. Security in Wireless (a) Architecture of wireless LAN 2
Networks (b) WEP, RSN protocols
8. Network (a) IP attacks, TCP attacks, DOD & DDOS attacks 7

Vulnerabilities & (b) Firewalls – packet filtering, stateful inspection, proxy, circuit
Malware level
(c) Intrusion Detection Systems (IDS)
(d) Malware
9. Security at the (a) Secure Electronic Transaction (SET) 2

Application Layer

Evaluation Criteria
T1 20
T2 20
TA (Assignment, Quiz, Participation) 25
Total 100

1. Gupta, Prakash C., Cryptography and Network Security, PHI, 2014
2. Stallings W., Cryptography & Network Security, 6th Ed., Pearson, 2014
3. Forouzan, BA., Cryptography & Network Security, 3rd Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2015

Notsablosom

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Notsablosom

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Notsablosom

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Detailed Syllabus

Course Name PHYSICS-1

Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Anshu D. Varshney & Ashish Bhatnagar

Module Title of the Topics in the Module No. of

Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Anuraj Panwar and S K Awasthi

COURSE OUTCOMES COGNITIVE LEVELS

C170.5 Interpret and justify the results. Evaluating (C5)

Module Title of the Module List of Experiments CO

Course Code 15B11MA111 Semester Odd Semester I Session 2020-21

Course Name Mathematics-1

Credits 4 Contact Hours 3-1-0

Faculty Coordinator(s) Dr. Yogesh Gupta, Dr. Pinkey Chauhan

1. Partial Chain rule, change of variables, Taylor’s series for 7

2. Double integrals Change of order and change of variables, Gamma 7

3. Vector Gradient, divergence and curl, Normal and tangent 3

4. Vector Line integrals, Green’s Theorem in a plane, surface 7

5. Differential Differential Equations with constant coefficients, 6

6. Laplace Laplace Transform, inverse Laplace transform, 6

7. Matrices Linear dependence and independence of rows, row 6

Total number of lectures 42

Course Code 15B11HS112 Semester: Odd Semester: I Session 2020 -2021

Credits 3 Contact Hours 2-1-0

Teacher(s) Dr Anshu Banwari, Dr Ekta Srivastava, Dr Monali Bhattacharya, Dr

C114.3 Demonstrate an understanding of different forms of literature and rhetorical Understand

C114.4 Examine literature as reflection of individual and society Analyse (C4)

C114.5 Compose different forms of professional writing Create (C6)

Module Title of the Module Topics in the Module No. of Lectures

Total number of Lectures 28

6 Rabindranath Tagore, “Where the Mind is without Fear”, BK Classics

8 Pablo Neruda, “Ode To Clothes” Late & Posthumous Poems, 1968-74

COURSE OUTCOMES COGNITIVE LEVELS

Module Title of the Topics in the Module No. of

1 Herbert Schildt. “The Complete Reference C ”, 4th Edition, TMH, 2017

15B17CI171 Software Development Fundamental Lab - I

Course Name Software Development Fundamentals Lab-1

Module Title of the Topics in the Module No. of Weeks

2 Data Type, Data, variables and constants, data types, 1 Week

7 Pointers Pointers in C, Dynamic memory allocation for 2 Weeks

Total Number of Weeks 14 Weeks

Recommended Reading material: Author(s), Title, Edition, Publisher, Year of Publication

Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Vimal Kumar Mishra, Neetu Joshi

Module Title of the Topics in the Module No. of

3. Network Theorems Superposition Theorem, Thevenin’s Theorem, Norton’s 6

4. Sinusoidal Steady Physical Model for a Sinusoid, Average Value, Effective 4

Course Code 15B17EC171 Semester -: Even Semester II Session: 2020 -21

Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Bhagirath Sahu & Shradha Saxena

COURSE OUTCOMES COGNITIVE LEVELS

Acquire the knowledge of electrical network and circuit such as Analyzing

Study and verification of reduction technique using different network Remembering

Module Title of the List of Experiments COs

5. Analysis and C176.2

6. Study and C176.3

COURSE OUTCOMES COGNITIVE LEVELS

Module Title of the Topics in the Module No. of

C173.4 Perform exception handling in C++ programs. Apply Level (Level 3)

Module Title of the List of Experiments No. of Labs

Course Code 15B11PH211 Semester: Even Semester: II Session 2020-21

Faculty (Names) Coordinator(s) Prof. R.K. Dwivedi& Dr.Suneet Kumar Awasthi

COURSE OUTCOMES COGNITIVE LEVELS